Home

User Manual Digital Analysis System 070-8485-09

1. Discrete 1 0 Connector RS 232 Port Connectors Figure 2 2 Rear View of the DAS Master Mainframe Powering On and Powering Off Powering On the DAS XP Powering On the DAS NT DAS System User Manual The power on and power off procedures differ depending on whether you have a DAS NT or a DAS XP system Because the DAS NT is connected to a network you should not power off the mainframe operation is controlled from a workstation refer to the 92XTerm User Manual for information on controlling the mainframe from a workstation To normally power on the DAS XP system power on the terminal and then the mainframe The terminal goes through its power on tests before the mainframe performs its system checks When all power on checks have been completed the Menu Selection Overlay displays Figure 2 3 shows an example of the Menu Selection overlay If you have a DAS NT system the Menu Selection overlay displays after you start the 92X Term application From then on all menus are similar to those in a DAS XP system Operating Basics 2 4 Workspace Menu DAS SZASBID 1 utiittlon Diagnostic MS NEHU SELECTION Module Z H FE TRITT aon T T HE TO Hv UTILITY FRIHI Hola PEHL Figure 2 3 Menu Selection Overlay If your DAS is connected to a network and configured with the 92XTerm
2. Figure 2 1 Front View of the DAS Mainframe Figure 22 shows a rear view of the Master mainframe Acquisition probes and pattern generation probes connect to the individual modules at the rear of the instrument Expansion mainframes not shown do not include the rear panel connectors RS 232 ports Ethernet ports and I O port The Line Voltage Indicator on the rear panel Figure 2 2 shows the correct nominal voltage for the power source you are using either 115 V or 230 V If the mainframe has the three phase power supply cord installed there is no Line Voltage Indicator on the rear panel The line voltage indicator is only an indicator of the line voltage selection strapping within the power supply If the indicator shows the wrong voltage for the power source being used refer a qualified service person to the DAS 9200 Technician s Reference Manual for power supply reconfiguration and replacement of the power cord and fuse DAS System User Manual Operating Basics GPIB Connector amp ry 19 EREPRRH 630 Fuse 92LANSE Connectors DISCRETE I O Line Voltage Power Cord g Connection gt Indicator o E
3. eee eee eee 2 17 On Screen Macro Buttons 0 cece cece ee eee 2 18 Keyboard Equivalents eere 2 18 Signal Event Resources ccccccecsccsccece 3 9 External Event I O Connections 4 3 13 Asynchronous External Events eee 3 13 Print Screen Output Formats 3 51 DAS Mainframe Environmental and Safety A 1 Mainframe and 92C02 Module Mechanical A 2 Electrical 5 0 59 3 e E RES el Ee A 3 Standard Electrical Interfaces A 4 Discrete I O Signals eere A 5 Terminal Physical Dimensions eee A 6 Terminal Keyboard Physical Dimensions A 6 DAS XP Standard Accessories eeee B 1 DAS NT Standard Accessories Lese B 2 Expansion Mainframe Standard Accessories B 3 Optional Accessories eee B 3 Error Messages eese ehh nnn C 1 Phase 1 File System Check Error Messages D 11 Phase 2 File System Check Error Messages D 12 Phase 3 File System Check Error Messages D 13 DAS System User Manual Table of Contents DAS System User Manual Table D 4 Table D 5 Table E 1 Table F 1 Table F 2 Table F 3 Table F 4 Table F 5 Table F 6 Table F 7 Table G 1 Table G 2 Table G 3 Phase 4 File System Check Error Messages D 13 Phase 5
4. The following paragraphs briefly discuss the menus and submenus in the SCSI Hard Disk Format Utility The main menu displays general information about the hard disk and how it is partitioned If the hard disk has not been formatted the main menu will indicate that the hard disk has no valid partition information Figure D 2 shows an example of the main menu for the SCSI Hard Disk Format Utility D 3 Appendix D Loading System Software Main Menu SCSI HARD DISK FORMATTER Disk Description xxx xxxx Capacity 416575 512 byte logical block size Compatibility SCSI 1 Manufacture ID XXXXXXXXXXXX Product ID OXXXXXXXXXXX Revision NO XXX Disk Partition List NUMBER NAME PURPOSE LOCATION BLOCKS Kbytes X xxx xxx ROOT XXXXX X xxx xxx SWAP XXXXX X Xxx xxx MAP XXXXX X Xxx xxx ALL XXXXX Selections Available a Format Setup Menu b Change Swap Size Menu c Show Bad Block List d Exit Enter choice default d Figure D 2 SCSI Hard Disk Format Utility Main Menu XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXX Select the submenu or information you want to enter To format the hard disk select Option a the Format Setup Menu will display To change the swap partition space size of a previously formatted hard disk select Option b To display a list of bad blocks select Option c To make a selection enter the letter preceding the selection descri
5. The Sys Config selection displays a listing of the currently configured clusters and modules in the mainframe this display is similar to the information in the System Configuration menu The File Contents selection displays information on clusters and modules that were previously saved in the specified file The File Contents Sys Config selection shown in Figure 3 12 is a combination of the two previous selections This selection simultaneously displays both types of information Use this side by side display during save restore operations to help you decide which cluster or module is best suited to the operation being performed DAS System User Manual 3 23 Reference EL Rasto Idilis FB EXECUTE OPERATION TTA EHS Hi aa Du NN M M aM m Figure 3 11 Save Restore Menu Save Setup Operations The Save Restore menu has the following fields and features m Operation field This field specifies the operation to perform when you select function key F8 EXECUTE OPERATION m File field This field lets you select the name of the file that will contain the saved setup selections are all file names that appear in the directory listing For save operations this field is a fill in field blank characters are not allowed The new file name is not created until you press function key F8 EXECUTE OPERATION For restore and delete operations this field is a select field If you save a setup using the file name Power Up the syst
6. 12 module 3 19 remote on off F 17 remote operation 1 1 remove application operation 3 36 removing application software 3 36 modules F 11 F 18 renaming files 3 33 resolution defined Glossary 13 Restore Formation overlay function keys 3 29 restore operations 3 27 restore formation overlay 3 28 Restore Partial Setup 3 27 3 29 restoring system software E 4 E 5 user files 3 37 RS 232 ports 1 4 3 45 3 46 specifications A 4 RZ defined Glossary 13 DAS System User Manual Index S safety specifications A 1 sample clock defined Glossary 13 sampling rate Glossary 13 Save Cluster Setup 3 25 Save Module Refmem 3 27 Save Module Setup 3 25 save operations save refmems 3 26 save system setup 3 22 save refmem operations Display field 3 27 Master Module field 3 27 Save System Setup 3 25 Save Restore menu 2 10 3 21 3 30 Comments field 3 24 Delete operations 3 30 Delete Refmem 3 30 Display field 3 23 3 24 3 27 File field 3 24 file information 3 25 function keys 3 26 Master Module field 3 27 Operation field 3 23 3 24 precautions 3 21 3 22 Restore Formation overlay 3 28 Restore Partial Setup 3 27 3 29 Restore Setup operations 3 27 Save Cluster Setup 3 25 Save Module Refmem 3 27 Save Module Setup 3 25 save refmem operations 3 26 save setup operation
7. C 10 DAS System User Manual Appendix C Error Messages Table C 1 Error Messages Cont Error Message There are no fields to be deleted Key ignored There are no groups This Event already contains a Not This Event already contains an Event Filter This Event does not contain a Not This Event does not contain an Event F ilter Explanation There are no fields to delete The function key is ignored No groups are present in this menu The existing Not applies to the entire Simple or Compound Event The Event Filter applies to the entire Simple or Compound Event There is no Not to delete The only valid entries in this field are alphabetic characters except blanks and double quotes numerals plus minus and period This field cannot be blank Previous value restored You must enter a value in this field the previous value will be restored This field cannot be modified The Item ID fields along the left edge of the menu cannot be modified This field has no selection list Fill in a value with the ASCII keyboard This is a decimal field use 0 9 Timer not available 2 Counters in use Unable to invoke selected SW Support Restored the previous setup Unable to start 9202XT Undefined breakpoint label n Undefined IRQ call label n Undefined label n Undefined start label n Unexpected Use of Word and or Channel Events makes this selecti
8. Figure 2 16 Split Screen Menu You can use the mouse to scroll data in either side of the split screen Because you have locked the cursors together scrolling data in one screen automatically scrolls the data in the other and the cursors will track each other You have now had the opportunity to become familiar with operating the menus of the system You may want to spend some time experimenting with other menus to become more familiar with the operation For more details on the individual Setup and Display menus refer to the user manual for your acquisi tion module For more information on the system menus and the utility menus refer to the Reference chapter in this manual DAS System User Manual Reference This chapter provides reference information for the system menus utility menus and the associated overlays for those menus It also provides information on multimodule operation For detailed information on the Setup and Display menus for the acquisition and pattern generation modules refer to the individual module user manual For information on the Application menus refer to the appropriate manual for that application System Configuration Menu Module Formation DAS System User Manual The System Configuration menu provides an inventory of your logic analysis system It displays the following information m The contents installed cards of your mainframe m The identification number of the currently selected module
9. Getting Started 1 Ensure the 92C02 Module is correctly installed in slot 8 of the Master mainframe and all Expansion mainframes Note The last Expansion mainframe in the chain does not require a 92C02 Module installed in slot 8 2 Install the L shaped retaining bracket on the rear panel of the mainframe using the two screws provided Attach the bracket over the hole for slot 8 rows C and D Use the screw holes provided for the probe retaining brackets 3 Using care not to bend pins plug the end of the expansion cable board housing into the 92C02 connector at slot 8 Attach the housing to the retaining bracket with the two screws provided 4 Connect the ground cable by removing a screw on the mainframe and placing the ground lug under the screw head see Figure 1 3 Tighten the screw using care not to strip the screw threads Connect the other end of the ground cable to the ground lug of the next Expansion mainframe in the chain Probe Connections The probes for the acquisition and pattern generation modules attach to the cards through openings in the rear panel of the mainframe s except for the 92HS8 For information regarding proper use and connection of your probe refer to the user manual for the module using that probe GPIB Port Connections If you have a 92C02 GPIB Expansion Module installed in the Master Mainframe with the GPIB port connector you can connect the GPIB cable to the port connector However if you do n
10. The 92496 software support package requires a wider or narrower module than is presently available Verify that the required channel width for your support package and set up the module using the System Configuration menu If you change the Channel menu after setting up the Trigger menu the Trigger menu will be altered to reflect those changes If you change the Clock menu after setting up the Trigger menu the Trigger menu will be altered to reflect those changes If you change the Cluster Setup menu after setting up the Trigger menu the Trigger menu will be altered to reflect those changes If you change the Config menu after setting up the Trigger menu the Trigger menu will be altered to reflect those changes That specific combination of Compound Events is not supported You entered a value in a word recognizer field that is legal for the group radix but which cannot be used because there aren t enough bits associated with that digit to handle the value entered Enterthe value again using 0 3 Insufficient channels assigned to this group use 0 7 DAS System User Manual You entered a value in a word recognizer field that is legal for the group radix but which cannot be used because there aren t enough bits associated with that digit to handle the value entered Enter the value again using 0 7 C 5 Appendix C Error Messages Table C 1 Error Messages Cont Error Message Insufficient channels assigned
11. See also 92516 DAS System User Manual Glossary DAS System User Manual Aliasing The condition that occurs when data from a system under test is sampled at a rate that is slower than the rate at which data changes Aliasing results in meaningless data because the logic analyzer will miss data changes between the sample points Data pulses that fall between sample clocks meet the technical definition of a glitch and will be stored and displayed as such See also Asynchronous Acquisition Application Bus Provides high speed communication within modules and between adjacent module slots Application Software Software packages designed specifically to aid in certain tasks The application software resides on the hard disk as part of system software and can be loaded from floppy disks ASCII Abbreviation for American Standard Code for Information Interchange an eight bit code representing characters and control functions Assert To cause a signal or line to change from its logic false state to its logic true state Asynchronous Acquisition An acquisition made using a periodic clock signal generated internally by the logic analyzer The clock signal is therefore asynchronous to the user s circuit and should be considerably faster than the user s data rate to avoid aliasing See also Aliasing Autorun A mode of operation in which a logic analyzer automatically performs continuous acquisition cycles comparing the acquisiti
12. Selecting item F from the Main menu lets you specify the system name of the X server that will display the window in the 9202XT or 92XTerm Autostart operating mode In this mode the instrument automatically initiates an X win dow display on the Default X Server when the instrument is powered on Most X servers have only one display and one screen so server name 0 0 is the most common entry Appendix E Configuration Utility Set Default X Server Address Set LANPCL Port Number E 8 Enter the new value in the format server name d s where server name is the system name of the X server device d is the single digit number of the display on that device and s is the single digit number of the screen on that display The display number is required however the screen value will default to 0 if not specified To retain the current name press the Return key without entering any numbers This name is only for informational purposes unless the default X server address parameter is set to Use Name In this case there must be an entry in the instrument s etc hosts table that associates this name with an X server address If the operating mode is set to something other than 9202XT or 92XTerm Autostart this parameter has no affect Your system administrator should provide you with the correct name for your default X server Selecting item X from the Main menu lets you specify the default X server address The default X server address s
13. The Cluster Setup menu is shown in Figure 3 4 Each cluster has its own Cluster Setup menu The name of the cluster appears in the upper left corner of the display DAS System User Manual Reference DAS System User Manual SGASEI 1 setup Lus Setup Idle Morea d F2 z F F5 DEFINE DEFINE DEFTHE STGAAL CORRELATH AUTORUN pei e pa LLLI ETERNI m I rn NH M M M NM Figure 3 4 Cluster Setup Menu The Cluster Setup menu has the following key fields and features A list of the modules in the cluster A list of user defined input signals for each module You define signal events for each module in the Signal Definition overlay described on page 3 8 A list of user defined output signals for each module You define signal events for each module in the Signal Definition overlay described on page 3 8 A field describing whether a module is time correlated with another module You specify which modules you want to correlate in the Correlation Definition overlay described on page 3 14 You can only correlate acquisi tion modules in the same cluster A list of the names of reference memories used with Autorun for each module Run Mode field This field specifies the run mode for the cluster The default mode is Normal when acquisition is complete operation ceases and a display menu appears the other selection is Autorun acquisition is compared to a refmem and repeats until user defined conditions are sa
14. e ini ena EAE EE ee eens 3 20 SaverRestore Ment ccce TEDENPENEHES Sh ew es Sh eyes PS CERRO 3 21 Save Setup Operations 3 23 Saving the Power Up Setups sseseeeeeeee ee 3 25 Save Refmem Operations slleseeeeee rh 3 26 Restore Setup Operations 6 2 0 0 0 eee cece ee 3 27 Restore Formation Overlay 0 0 e cece ee eee 3 28 Delete Operations core E eis he Ee eh He ER RIS es e RES S 3 30 ii DAS System User Manual Table of Contents Disk Services Ment ii ciu RELREERDEPERRERBRSUNPRGON DE EEG 3 31 Copy File Operation 2 82 s ba sacs eee a a a ee ae ae et ates 3 32 Delete Fule Operation ser cela eC bee E Rx 3 34 Format Floppy Operation 0 0 eee eee eee 3 34 Verify Floppy Operation sssseeeeeeeeee ee 3 35 Duplicate Floppy Operation 0 0 0 eee eee eee eee 3 35 Install Application Operation 00 0 0 eee ee eee eh 3 36 Remove Application Operation 2 0 0 eee eee eee eee 3 36 Backup User Files Operation 0 0 0 eee eee eee 3 36 Restore User Files Operation 00 0 uurre eee ee eee 3 37 Symbol Editor Menu cR eA een eRe NR be ae EDEN REIS 3 38 File Functions Overlay 0 0 0 cece eee e 3 43 Search Definition Overlay 0 0 eee eee cee eee 3 44 Communications Menu sss naeia a e a eh 3 45 LAN Overlay teu EE ES RAI RV ERI REOS 3 47 Print Screen Setup Overlay corsie neir ecran adrar eee eee 3 50 Kermit File
15. eeeeeeeeeeeen nne Figure E 3 Configuration Utility Factory Default Network Configuration eeeeeeeeeen nnn Figure F 1 Module Placement in the Master Mainframe Figure F 2 Module Placement in the Expansion Mainframe Figure F 3 Removing the Mainframe Top Cover Figure F 4 Locations of Card Cage Door and Fasteners Figure F 5 Installing the GPIB Connector 3 54 3 55 3 56 3 57 3 59 3 62 3 63 3 73 vii Table of Contents List of Tables viii Table 1 1 Table 1 2 Table 1 3 Table 1 4 Table 1 5 Table 1 6 Table 1 7 Table 1 8 Table 2 1 Table 2 2 Table 2 3 Table 2 4 Table 3 1 Table 3 2 Table 3 3 Table 3 4 Table A 1 Table A 2 Table A 3 Table A 4 Table A 5 Table A 6 Table A 7 Table B 1 Table B 2 Table B 3 Table B 4 Table C 1 Table D 1 Table D 2 Table D 3 Power for Master Mainframes eee 1 9 Power for Expansion Mainframes 1 9 Power for Modules with Probes e 1 10 Terminal Default Boot Parameters 1 13 9 pin DCE to 25 Pin DTE Cable Connections 1 16 9 pin DCE to 25 Pin DCE Cable Connections 1 16 Baud Rate DIP Switches eere 1 18 Acquisition and Pattern Generation Modules 1 19 Three Button Mouse Description 2 11 On Screen Menu Buttons
16. 1 The 92A60 D and 92A90 D are both two card sets other modules are single card sets The 92A96 High Speed timing offers asynchronous support of 48 channels at 200 MHz and 24 channels at 400 MHz 3 The 92HS8 has a mainframe cabinet that connects to the DAS through an interface card DAS System User Manual 1 19 Getting Started 1 20 92A16 E Data Acquisition Modules The 92A 16 E Module is a 200 MHz 16 channel data acquisition module suited for general purpose medium speed hardware timing analysis and for high speed state analysis It uses two P6461 E probes or lower bandwidth P6460 probes to acquire data with either an internal asynchronous or external synchronous clock equation Data is stored on each active clock edge until a trigger is generated and the delay counter value is reached Support for two phase clocking demultiplexing is also provided The 92A16 Module acts as either a Master or an Expansion module the 92A16E Module is strictly an Expansion module The 92A16 and 92A16E Modules can be combined into a single 96 channel wide module in one mainframe all channels operate under the same trigger and clock conditions and run at 200 MHz no speed vs channel width trade offs The first 64 channels can be used for word recognition In addition to stand alone operation the 92A16 Module can be correlated with other data acquisition modules in the DAS mainframe to provide multiple time base capabilities 92A60 D an
17. 3 45 3 47 3 53 3 54 host port flow control field 3 47 Input EOL field 3 47 Interrupt field 3 47 LAN overlay 3 47 Mode field 3 47 Operation field 3 54 Output EOL field 3 47 Print Screen Setup overlay 3 50 Protocol field 3 47 3 53 compare field 3 19 compare mask 3 20 comparing acquired data 3 16 comparing data 3 65 components field 3 11 compound action defined Glossary 6 compound event defined Glossary 6 Config menu 2 7 2 8 Config utility E 1 E 12 DAS network name E 6 E 7 deleting software E 5 diagnostics E 2 factory default configuration E 5 gateway address E 7 GPIB port number E 9 internet address E 7 Index 2 LAN PCL port number E 8 main menu E 2 E 12 operating mode E 6 restoring saved system software E 4 E 5 saving current system software E 3 E 4 start up mode E 6 subnet mask E 7 system name E 6 user interface E 1 X server address E 8 X server name E 7 configuration guidelines F 4 92A16 E Modules F 4 F 11 92A60 90 Modules F 5 F 11 92A96 Modules F 5 F 11 92C02 Module F 6 92C96 Modules F 5 F 11 92HSS E Modules F 6 92816 32 Modules F 6 928X109 118 Modules F 6 configurations hosted 1 1 module F 3 F 10 stand alone 1 1 Control bus defined Glossary 6 Controller board 1 3 defined Glossary 6 copy file operation 3 32 correlation bus
18. 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Expansion Slave Expansion Slave Expansion Slave Figure F 2 Module Placement in the Expansion Mainframe F 10 DAS System User Manual Appendix F User Service Module Installation and Removal A Tools Required Removing the Top Cover and Card Cage Door A DAS System User Manual These procedures provide information on installing or removing user installable modules from the Master and Expansion mainframe Only a qualified service technician should install or remove the boards from slot 0 of the mainframe and other mainframe related components CAUTION Be sure to turn off the mainframe and disconnect the power cord before installing or removing a module Damage to circuitry can occur if the module is installed or removed while the mainframe is receiving power In these procedures directional terms top bottom left right and back are based on the assumption that your mainframe is in a normal upright position bottom down and that you are facing the front of the instrument Two board ejector tools are provided for installing or removing a module from a mainframe These ejector tools hang inside the front facade on the left side of the mainframe CAUTION Damage to circuitry can occur if a card is installed or removed while the mainframe is receiving power Before you unplug the power cord turn off the mainframe using the front panel switch and wait 60 seconds to allow suffici
19. 8 troubleshooting F 19 F 23 incorrect data F 21 no data F 21 printing problems F 22 F 24 terminal F 20 tutorial 2 11 2 32 U unassert defined Glossary 16 Updating Flash ROM E 9 user files 3 31 3 32 user service packaging F 1 preventive maintenance F 2 F 3 procedures F 1 F 26 user service procedures initial inspection F 1 utility menu 2 10 defined Glossary 16 V verifying software D 19 D 20 Version menu 2 10 3 59 3 60 function keys 3 60 version numbers hardware 3 59 3 60 software 3 59 3 60 W word recognition defined Glossary 16 Workspace menu 2 4 3 73 X X server address E 8 X server name E 7 X Terminal connecting to the mainframe 1 12 XOFF 3 46 3 47 XON 3 46 3 47 Z Z character defined Glossary 16 DAS System User Manual
20. DAS System User Manual 9202XT An early version of the 14 inch color X terminal 9203XT An early version of the optional 17 inch color X terminal 9204XT The second version of the 14 inch color X terminal 9205XT The second version of the optional 17 inch color X terminal 9206XT A color X terminal The standard terminal is a 15 inch terminal you can also order an optional 17 inch terminal 92A16 The 16 channel 8 K memory 200 MHz data acquisition module it is used for general purpose medium speed hardware timing analysis and high speed state analysis By using a combination of 92A16 cards and 92A16E cards expander cards you can create a 96 channel wide module 92A16E The 92A16 Expander card 92A16E cards can be combined with a 92A16 to provide up to 96 channels of acquisition 92A60 The 60 channel 32 K memory 20 MHz data acquisition module it is used for general purpose state analysis software performance analysis and microprocessor support 92A60D The 60 channel 128 K memory 20 MHz data acquisition module it is used for general purpose state analysis software performance analysis and microprocessor support 92A90 The 90 channel 32 K memory 20 MHz data acquisition module it is used for general purpose state analysis software performance analysis and microprocessor support 92A90D The 90 channel 128 K memory 20 MHz data acquisition module it is used for general purpose state analysis software p
21. Pack Operation Add Operation Remove Operation Read Operation Write Operation Delete Operation Quit Operation Optional Command Line Switches G 1 felt l C9 Q9 Q9 C29 Q2 P2 t2 Qoooooooooooononoo bah bk G 8 Table of Contents List of Figures vi Figure 1 1 Master Mainframe and Expansion Mainframes Figure 1 2 Expansion Mainframe Stacked on Master Mainframe eeeeeeee ehm n Figure 1 3 Master and Expansion Mainframe Connections Figure 2 1 Front View of the DAS Mainframe Figure 2 2 Rear View of the DAS Master Mainframe Figure 2 3 Menu Selection Overlay eee Figure 2 4 Workspace Menu on Tektronix X Terminals Figure 2 5 Setup Menus for Each Module Figure 2 6 Module Display Menus eee eee Figure 2 7 Menu Selection Overlay eee Figure 2 8 Set Date Time Overlay eee Figure 2 9 On Screen Buttons 0 cece cece ee cere eens Figure 2 10 Function Keys Map to the Function Key Legends Figure 2 11 Channel Menu cece cece cece n nnn Figure 2 12 Clock Menu cece cc cece cece en nnn Figure 2 13 Trigger Menu cece cece cece eee ree nnn Figure 2 14 State Menu ccc cece cece cece eee eee n
22. Signal pins 11 18 with respective ground pins 30 37 1 standard FTTL load with 4 7 KQ pull up resistor and approximately 60 pF capacitive load also includes 10 O series resistors and protection diodes A 5 Appendix A Specifications Table A 6 Terminal Physical Dimensions Terminal Depth 9202 04XT 14 2 in 36 14 8 in 37 6 cm 9203 05XT men Monitor 17 4 in 44 2 cm Logic Unit 11 0 in 27 9 cm 12 25 in 31 12 cm 15 inch Monitor 28 6 3 0 kg 15 0 in os 0 cm 14 6 in 37 2 cm 16 2 in 41 2 cm 17 inch Monitor 38 9 Ib 17 7 kg 16 6 in 42 2 cm 16 1in 41 0 cm 17 2 in 43 8 cm Table A 7 Terminal Keyboard Physical Dimensions Characteristic Specification Weight 2 6 lbs 1 1 kg Height Flat 1 7 in 4 3 cm to Key 1 0 in 2 54 cm Tilted 2 4 in 6 07 cm Width 18 5 in 46 9 cm Length 7 3 in 18 5 cm A 6 DAS System User Manual P Oi Appendix B Accessories DAS System User Manual The Digital Analysis System is available in configured systems Each configura tion has its own set of accessories The information in this appendix contains those accessories that are standard with the Master and Expansion mainframes For information on the accessories available with each acquisition or pattern generation module refer to the respective module user manual Table B 1 lists the standard accessories available for the DAS XP mainframe Table B
23. loading optional system software D 17 loading system software D 1 D 22 optional system software D 20 D 21 system software 1 22 version numbers 3 59 3 60 software installation 1 18 swap partition size D 6 sorting symbols 3 43 specifications A 1 A 6 Discrete I O port A 5 electrical A 3 environmental A 1 mechanical A 2 RS 232 A 4 safety A 1 terminal A 6 split screen defined Glossary 14 split screen display 2 31 2 32 stand alone defined Glossary 14 Start Mode field 3 8 state defined Glossary 14 display defined Glossary 14 State Display menu 2 9 status line 2 19 step mode defined Glossary 14 stimulus and response testing 3 64 Stop Mode field 3 8 storage qualification defined Glossary 14 subnet mask 3 49 E 7 Symbol Editor menu 2 10 3 38 3 45 base field 3 42 bit pattern 3 41 bit width field 3 40 cursor field 3 40 File Functions overlay 3 43 file name field 3 40 Index 7 Index function keys 3 41 lower bound fields 3 42 mode field 3 42 pattern symbols 3 40 3 42 radix field 3 40 range symbols 3 42 search functions 3 41 3 44 sequence number 3 41 symbol name 3 41 upper bound fields 3 42 symbolic radix defined Glossary 15 symbols creating symbol tables 3 43 deleting 3 43 opening tables 3 43 pattern 3 38 3 39 range 3 38 searching
24. m When using a Master and an Expander interface card in the same module both cards must reside in the same mainframe and the Expander card must be installed in the slot directly above the Master Interface card m When using a single 92HS8 probe cabinet the interface cable must connect to pod D of the interface card m When using more than one 92HS8 probe cabinet you will need to connect the interface cables and the clock cables between the interface card s and the probe cabinets 9216 32 and 925X109 118 Pattern Generation Modules The 92516 Pattern Generation Module and the 92832 Pattern Generation Module can operate in modules by themselves or together as a single module These modules can be placed in any slots of the mainframes m A maximum of seven 92516 Modules can be placed in a mainframe assuming there is no 92C02 GPIB Expansion Module in slot 8 Each 92816 operates as an individual 16 channel module However you can only run up to four modules at a time m A maximum of eight 928516 Modules can be placed in a DAS 92E9 Expansion mainframe assuming there is no 92C02 GPIB Expansion Module in slot 8 Each 92816 operates as an individual module However you can only run up to four modules in the entire system at a time DAS System User Manual Appendix F User Service DAS System User Manual A 92816 can be combined with one or more 92832 Modules to create a single module up to 234 channels in a mainframe and 270 chan
25. on the characteristics of its serial interface 2 Setthe parameters of the serial communications port on the printer and the system These parameters must match Refer to your printer manual for information on how to set the parameters for its serial interface The parameters for the system are set from the Communications menu You can also set the baud rate using the DIP switches on the Controller board near the rear panel of the mainframe 3 Display the menu or data you want to print on your terminal With the mouse point at the PRINT button at the bottom of the menu click on the left mouse button to call the appropriate print overlay 4 Select RS 232 Auxiliary Port in the Send Output To field 5 Define the remaining print parameters in the overlay 6 Select the appropriate function key legend to begin printing data Refer to your module user manual for information on accessing and using the State Print or Setup Print overlays Refer to your microprocessor support user manual for information on accessing and using the Disassembly Print overlay DAS System User Manual Reference DAS System User Manual To print data to a local file on the DAS perform the following steps 1 3 4 Display the menu or data you want to print on your terminal With the mouse point at the PRINT button at the bottom of the menu click on the left mouse button to call the appropriate print overlay Select File in the Send Output To field
26. see Table F 7 Table F 5 DAS XP System Options Option Description 2C GPIB Module Includes 92C02 GPIB Module GPIB Cable DAS 9200 Programmatic Command Language User Manual Module Installation Instructions and hardware 3D Delete probes lead sets and KlipChips 04 EMI Includes probe retainer kit and grounding clip 4X Substitute 17 inch terminal for 15 inch terminal 5C Thicknet AUI 05 Rackmount Includes manual chassis track retainer bracket and hardware 18 Removable Media Includes storage box media frame amp cartridge and label F 23 Appendix F User Service Power Cords A F 24 Table F 6 DAS NT System Options Option Description 2C GPIB Module Includes 92C 02 GPIB Module GPIB Cable DAS 9200 Programmatic Command Language User Manual Module Installation Instructions and hardware 3D Delete probes lead sets and KlipChips 04 EMI Includes probe retainer kit and grounding clip 3X Add 15 inch terminal 4X Add 17 inch terminal 5C Thicknet AUI 05 Rackmount Includes manual chassis track retainer bracket and hardware 18 Removable Media Includes storage box media frame amp cartridge and label The mainframe has no main AC power switch the power cord serves as the main power disconnect The mainframe uses a three wire power cord with a three con tact plug for connection to the power source and protective ground The three phase option uses a five wire power cord with a fi
27. system software automatically creates a set of module formation selections for each module type For example if your mainframe contains two 92A16 cards and three 92A16E cards in adjacent slots software establishes all valid module combinations of that module type there are eight in this case each formation is assigned a unique identification number Each valid combination is a module formation For instance formation 0 default might contain a single 80 channel wide module composed of all five cards formation 1 might split the five cards into one 64 channel module and one 16 channel module formation 2 might contain one 48 channel module and one 32 channel module Figure 3 31 shows the process of creating variable width modules System software establishes all valid combinations of modules or module formations that can be formed from each card type in the mainframe assuming all cards of a type are located in adjacent mainframe slots An identification number is assigned to each module formation you select the formation by number that best suits your application 3 61 Reference Time Correlate Data Between Two Modules 3 62 HARDWARE SOFTWARE Modules Installed In Mainframe Select Module Formation 1 Module formations established at DAS 9200 power up Mainfi Ie 2 Select desired formation s in S ystem Configuration menu Figure 3 31 Creating Variable Width Modules Figure 3 32 shows how the display
28. 3 31 Reference Copy File Operation 3 32 m A60 90 Trigger Selects files containing saved 92A60 90 user defined trigger setups Refer to the description of the Trigger Library in the 92A60 90 User Manual m A96 Clocking Selects files containing saved 92A96 clocking setups m A96 Trigger Selects files containing saved 92A96 user defined trigger setups Refer to the description of the Trigger Library in the 92A96 amp 92C96 User Manual W Autorun Selects files containing saved Autorun specifications m Compare Mask Selects files containing bit masks for Autorun or Compare operations m HS8 Deskew Selects files containing saved 92HS8 deskew values Wm Print Output Selects files containing previously stored data saved using the print overlay for the State Disassembly and Timing display menus m Reference Mem Selects files containing previously stored cluster module acquisitions m Setup Selects files containing the Setup menu selections for cluster module acquisitions m State Format Disasm Format Graph Format and Timing Format Each select the files containing the display menu selections for that type of display m Symbol Table Selects files containing symbol table information Refer to the Symbol Editor utility menu Other types of files may be available depending on the types of applications you have installed Using the Copy File operation Figure 3 16 you can copy individual files from the hard
29. 6 F 7 defined Glossary 3 92XTERM defined Glossary 3 A accessing menus 2 12 accessories B 1 B 4 DAS NT B 2 DAS XP B 1 expansion mainframe B 3 optional B 3 acquiring data 1 23 acquisition clock defined Glossary 4 cycle defined Glossary 4 DAS System User Manual defined Glossary 4 acquisition memory defined Glossary 4 acquisition memory sequence defined Glossary 4 action See also Compound Action simple defined Glossary 14 active module defined Glossary 4 address defined Glossary 4 algorithmic pattern generator defined Glossary 4 aliasing defined Glossary 5 application menus 2 10 application bus defined Glossary 5 application software defined Glossary 5 installing 3 36 D 17 removing 3 36 ASCH defined Glossary 5 assert defined Glossary 5 asynchronous acquisition defined Glossary 5 autorun defined Glossary 5 autorun comparisons 3 65 Autorun Definition overlay 3 16 Autorun Stop field 3 18 Compare field 3 19 Compare Mask column 3 20 function keys 3 20 Group Name column 3 19 Lower Bound Sequence Range field 3 19 Mask File field 3 19 Module field 3 18 Radix column 3 19 Refmem field 3 18 Refmem Module field 3 19 Upper Bound Sequence Range field 3 19 auxiliary port 3 45 3 46 baud rates 1 4 connecting a printer 1 17 backing up software 3 36 B
30. 8 E BM M E E E D o Figure 3 27 The Diagnostics Menu The Diagnostics menu has the following features W A report of the results of diagnostic testing with a PASS or FAIL message FAIL messages provide a four digit error code for use by the service technician DAS System User Manual 3 55 Reference Set Date Time Overlay 3 56 A summary of the modules installed in each slot Slots 0 and 1 contain the Controller board and the 92LANSE Network Controller slots 2 through 8 hold the acquisition modules and pattern generation modules Any attached Expansion mainframes provide additional slots to select an Expansion mainframe use the Configuration field near the top of the menu The version number of the system software currently loaded from the mainframe hard disk A summary of the conditions surrounding the last power off These and other error messages are described in Appendix C Error Messages The current date and the time in military format you can change the values in the Set Date Time overlay accessed by function key F5 SET DATE TIME The Set Date Time overlay see Figure 3 28 called by function key F5 allows you to set the current date and time of day in military format of the 24 hour clock The clock calendar feature is backed up by battery power Once set the system automatically tracks the current time day You need to reset the clock cal endar feature only when passing from one time zone to another or
31. 92832 can be used as a stand alone stimulation source or linked with a data acquisition module to provide a test system for debugging and verifying components boards and systems See also Sequential Pattern Generator 92832T A 92832 card with high speed bus jumpers set to the closed terminated position If a module contains a single 92832 card that card s jumpers must be set to the terminated position When two or more 92532 cards are combined in a module the final card in the series must be a 92S32T 92SX109 An enhanced version of the 92816 algorithmic pattern generator module providing nine channels of pattern generation at speeds up to 100 MHz 92SX118 An enhanced version of the 92832 pattern generator module providing 18 channels of pattern generation at speeds up to 100 MHz 92XTERM System software that allows the DAS mainframe to be part of a network environment The DAS mainframe is controlled over a network from a workstation The DAS menus are displayed on a work station window This software is standard on a DAS NT system DAS System User Manual Glossary 3 Glossary Glossary 4 Acquisition The capturing of data from a system under test by a logic analyzer Data is conditionally stored in acquisition memory in preparation for formatting by the user Data may be clocked into the logic analyzer yet qualified out before it can be stored in acquisition memory Use the trigger menu of the appropriate acquisition modu
32. 92XTERM Software Backup System S oftware Backup Terminal S oftware Refer to Table F 7 on page F 24 P6041 105 0985 XX Mainframe Power Cord Voltage range and plug type varies according to country Passive Probe used as Sync Out cable SMB to BNC Circuit board ejectors mm B 2 DAS System User Manual Appendix B Accessories DAS System User Manual Table B 3 lists the standard accessories available for the Expansion Mainframe Table B 3 Expansion Mainframe Standard Accessories Accessory Quantity Part Number Circuit board ejectors 105 0985 XX Sheet of stick on slot labels 334 6798 XX Mainframe power cord voltage range amp plug type varies Refer to according to country Table F 7 on page F 24 Table B 4 lists the optional accessories Table B 4 Optional Accessories Accessory Part Number Null modem cable mainframe to host connection 012 1399 XX Rackmount adapter 016 0845 XX Binder 016 0856 XX Four probe retainers 020 1484 01 Six 8 channel lead sets 12 Y cables 72 KlipChip Adapters 020 2108 00 DAS 9200 Technician s Reference Manual 070 5959 XX Coaxial cables set of four 198 5761 00 B 3 Appendix B Accessories B 4 DAS System User Manual P ns Xf Appendix C Error Messages This appendix lists some of the error messages that you may encounter with this product All error messages are listed in alphabetical order Table C 1 Error Messages Error
33. Clean the face of the display screen using a soft dampened cloth Use a soft artist s brush to remove any dust or foreign matter between the keys on the keyboard The following information provides guidelines for installing and configuring modules in the Master and Expansion mainframes Always read all guidelines warnings and cautions before installing any modules The Master mainframe is compatible with any DAS acquisition or pattern generation module If at any time the specific application for which your system is configured changes it may be advantageous to change the type or arrangement of instrument modules in the mainframe By following some basic guidelines you can choose a configuration that enhances the capabilities of the system NOTE Some configurations of modules require more power from the mainframe than others For configurations requiring power beyond the capabilities of the standard 12 A power cord use the optional higher current 15 A cord 230 V cords or three phase power cord Refer to DAS 9200 Module Power Require ments earlier in this manual for details Appendix F User Service F 4 Configuration Although the DAS can be configured to meet several different applications there are guidelines that should be followed when configuring a system In a Master mainframe slots 0 and 1 are reserved for the Controller board and the 922LANSE Module Slots 2 through 8 are available for the various DAS modules I
34. En E 3 L Lee LIC IMBRE 21 RR 3 UJ Ina ME 7M E BM B M 6D Figure 3 18 Symbol Editor Menu Pattern Symbol Table Displayed The Symbol Editor menu when used with pattern symbol tables has the following fields and features Cursor field This field lets you move the cursor by specifying a new sequence line number You can also move the cursor by using the cursor keys scroll keys joydisk or by entering number number or for end of list and pressing the Return key Radix field This field specifies the entry radix for the bit pattern This radix is saved in the symbol table This field also determines the State or Disassembly display radix for any samples that do not match any of the defined symbols File Name field This field displays the name of this symbol table file To open a different symbol table file select function key F2 FILE FUNCTIONS and refer to the File Functions overlay on page 3 43 for more instructions Bit Width field This field defines the width of each pattern in the symbol table The default value is the widest pattern in the table You can increase the width up to a maximum of 32 bits but never make it smaller than the widest existing symbol pattern DAS System User Manual Reference DAS System User Manual Sequence This list identifies the sequence number row number of each entry in the symbol table Symbol Name This area of the menu lets you enter the symbolic nam
35. F4 FR Fi F7 FH MARE DEFINE DEFINE SEARCH SEARCH DATA FORMAT SEARCH BACEWARD FORSARD Pil FI Se hhh at Remus Ds l M 8 E M BM E D D Figure 2 14 State Menu DAS System User Manual Operating Basics Scrolling State Data DAS System User Manual Notice that the State data in Figure 2 14 is displayed in the same manner as the Trigger menu and as defined by the Channel menu The names of the individual channel groups appear at the top of the menu There are several different ways to scroll data in the State menu 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 You can use the scroll buttons at the bottom of the screen point the mouse at the buttons and press the left button You can use the Joydisk point the mouse at the up or down arrows and press the left button You can scroll directly with the mouse on the menu You can move to a specific cursor sequence by entering a number in the Cursor Sequence field Point the mouse at one of the single arrow buttons and press the left button The data or line cursor will move one sequence each time you press the button Point the mouse at one of the double arrow buttons and press the left button The data will move several one half page of sequences each time you press the button Point the mouse at either the up arrow or down arrows on the Joydisk button on the bottom left side of the menu and press the left button The data will move one sequence each t
36. Host Port Auxiliary Port Items listed in the Performance Requirements column are product specifications that can be verified using the Verification and Adjustment Procedures document If a check of these specifications is necessary for incoming inspection refer the instrument to a qualified service technician Performance Requirement Supplemental Information Full Duplex Half Duplex Data Only 38400 default 19200 9600 4800 2400 1200 600 300 110 0 0596 38400 19200 9600 default 4800 2400 1200 600 300 110 0 0596 38400 19200 9600 default 4800 2400 1200 600 300 110 0 0596 Ethernet LAN Interface Supports TCP IP with IEEE 802 3 10Base5 and 10Base2 Transfer a file from the system to a host and back using FTP with either 10Base5 or 10Base2 For 10Base2 specification capacitive loading is 5 pF plus 9 inch coaxial cable equivalent capacitive loading is 12 pF Supports Internet Control Message Protocol ICMP Type 0 echo reply message Type 8 echo message Note Supports largest Ethernet packets of 1500 data bytes Supports Address Resolution Protocol ARP Supports File Transfer P rotocol FTP Supports Trivial File Transfer P roto col TFTP DAS System User Manual A 3 Appendix A Specifications Table A 3 Electrical Cont Characteristic Performance Requirement Supplemental Information Mainframe Power Primary Power Input 48 Hz
37. Index Internet address field 3 48 LAN boot status field 3 49 server field 3 49 Server Status field 3 49 Subnet Mask field 3 49 system name field 3 48 LAN PCL port number E 8 level sensitive defined Glossary 9 line fuse replacement F 18 line voltage indicator 2 2 loading software D 15 D 22 See also installing software M mainframe 1 2 card configurations F 8 F 9 defined Glossary 9 electrical specifications A 3 A 5 environmental specifications A 1 expansion 1 5 exterior cleaning F 2 GPIB connections F 16 grounding 1 15 1 19 mainframe connections 1 14 mechanical specifications A 2 power requirements 1 8 1 9 power on diagnostics F 19 printer connections 1 17 probe connections 1 15 rack mount 1 12 removing the top cover F 11 safety specifications A 1 site considerations 1 11 Make utility D 9 D 14 mask files 3 19 master mainframe 2 1 defined Glossary 10 master module defined Glossary 10 mechanical specifications A 2 menu Applications 2 10 capturing 3 72 Channel menu 2 7 2 8 Clock menu 2 7 Cluster Setup menu 2 6 3 6 3 20 Communications menu 2 10 3 45 3 54 Configuration menu 2 7 2 8 defined Glossary 10 Diagnostics menu 2 10 3 55 3 58 Disassembly Display menu 2 9 Disk Services menu 2 10 3 31 3 38 Display menus 2 8 Graph Display menu 2 9
38. No embedded spaces allowed in this field No field operation to cancel Once you ve started a module or cluster you cannot alter the configuration until the module cluster stops Rename module use a unique name To add or delete items position the cursor on the equation you want to change and press the function key In order to selecta menu position the cursor on the menu name and press the corresponding function key Position the cursor on the second line of the clock equation and press the function key again Rename cluster use a unique name The menu displayed contains no active fields that allow you to make selections You have not defined any assertable unassertable intermodule signals in the Signal Definition overlay to the Cluster Setup menu No channels are assigned to any group No data can be displayed You entered a display menu before an acquisition was performed The setup and hold values selected may not be valid because the channels have not been deskewed Entries in this field cannot contain spaces Enter a value with no spaces There are no selections to cancel To selecta menu position the cursor on the menu name and press the corresponding function key No Input Signals defined You selected a Signal Event but there are no input signals currently defined in the Signal Definition overlay to the Cluster Setup menu No match last valid choice will be restored if field is closed Your e
39. Select item press Close to accept value Esc to cancel operation Position cursor on the item you wantto select press the Enter key to verify your choice Signal cannot be asserted or unasserted This signal cannot be asserted and left asserted it must be pulsed or not used pulse only Similar field in other counter event s also Only one counter event resource is available if you change it it will be changed modified wherever it appears Similar field in other edge event s also Only one edge resource is available if you change it it will be changed wherever it modified appears Similar field in other glitch event s also Only one glitch resource is available if you change it it will be changed wherever it modified appears Similar field in other timer event s also Only one timer resource is available if you change it it will be changed wherever it modified appears Similar field in other word event s also Only one word resource is available if you change it it will be changed wherever it modified appears Software The last system power off occurred as a result of depleted system resources such as Some restored values changed because of different probe status Specify a breakpoint label Specify a start label Specify an IRQ call label State already contains maximum number of Clauses Subset restored file narrower than current module Subset restored file wid
40. The following steps are intended to help isolate problems if the DAS acquires incorrect data Verify that there is a good electrical connection between the system under test and the mainframe Try acquiring the data with a different probe and see if the data is still incorrect If you have more than one acquisition module try acquiring the data with a different acquisition module Verify that your Setup menus are set up properly for example check the clock settings channel assignments and trigger settings The following steps are intended to help isolate problems if the system does not acquire any data Verify that your Setup menus are set up properly for example check the clock settings channel assignments and trigger settings Verify that your probes are properly connected to the system under test and to the mainframe Verify that your system under test is powered and running F 21 Appendix F User Service No Data from Pattern Generator No Data Printed To Printer Connected to Auxiliary F 22 Port No Data Sent to a Network File The following steps are intended to help isolate problems if the system does not output any data m Verify that your probes are powered W Check the pattern generator Monitor menu to verify that the single step operation is not turned on Trace On The Print Screen Setup overlay indicates that data is not being sent to the local printer the value of the Print job byte
41. Timing test output 3a agr or Kane pm for output y Lewtes remain Fa F5 DEF ALT CLEAR FORMAT QUEUE FRIHT LT LL uU iscr Hi wT Figure 3 25 Print Screen Setup Overlay with Network Printer Selected The system can communicate with a host computer connected to the Host RS 232 port The Communications menu Protocol field lets you specify the protocol to use either the DAS 9200 Programmatic Command Language or the Kermit file transfer protocol The Programmatic Command Language allows the host computer to control the system but typically requires custom software on the host computer The Kermit file transfer protocol is widely used and available on many host computers You can use the Kermit protocol to move data between the system and the host you cannot however remotely start or control the system using Kermit DAS System User Manual Reference DAS System User Manual When you select the Kermit protocol all of the Host port fields in the Commu nications menu except baud rate change to predefined values required by the Kermit protocol see Figure 3 26 These fields return to their previously values when you reselect the DAS 9200 PCL protocol Before transferring files set the Host port baud rate to match the baud rate of your host computer NOTE Data transfers to and from the system may be unreliable at rates above 2400 baud when using the DAS 9200 PCL or above 9600 baud when using the Kermit file transfer
42. Transters gt 22 5 4 eux wince a ae ae leans ha EA 3 52 Diagnostics Ment vs zie EN ERU Eo wae fon ee EE YES 3 55 Set Date Time Overlay ex mi e iS 3 56 Boot Option Overlay sseseeeeeeeee ee 3 57 Version Ment i ERE nU US whee ioe e RADI RENS 3 59 Multimodule General Use 0 0 0 cece ce ee eee 3 60 Variable Width Modules 0 0 eee eee ee eee 3 60 Time Correlate Data Between Two Modules 004 3 62 Trigger One Module from Another or Cross Trigger Two Acquisition Modules 3 63 Stimulus and Response Testing 0 00 00 eee eee ee eee 3 64 Autorun Comparisons Between a Refmem and Acquired Data 3 65 Change the Pattern of the 92816 Pattern Generator 3 65 Send an Output Trigger Signal to External Test Equipment 3 66 Printer and Hardcopy General Use 0 0 0 0 e eee eee 3 67 Hard Copy of a Setup State or Disassembly Menu 3 68 Hardcopy of a Timing Menu 0 00 0 eee eee eee eee 3 70 PostScript Applications 3 70 HP Laserjet Printing sihan e a e eee eee 3 71 Capturing and Printing Menus 0 0 0 0 eee eA 3 72 Capturing Menus from a Stand alone System 0 3 72 Capturing Menus from a Networked System 004 3 73 Aborting Screen Captures on a Networked System 3 73 Deleting Print Jobs marisa cece eae 3 73 Appendices Appendix A Spe
43. Up menu See Diagnostics menu Power Up file 3 25 power on diagnostics 3 55 mainframe F 19 procedures 2 3 2 5 setups 3 25 power up restore feature 3 25 pre fill defined Glossary 12 preventive maintenance F 2 F 3 exterior cleaning F 2 Print Screen Setup overlay 3 50 function keys 3 52 output formats 3 51 Print Screen tool 3 73 printer connections 1 17 fault isolation F 22 F 24 Index 6 general use 3 67 3 71 port 3 46 problems F 22 F 24 Printer Support overlay 3 68 printing menus 3 51 3 67 3 71 3 72 3 74 to a host served printer 3 50 to a local file 3 69 to a local RS 232 printer 3 68 to a network printer 3 69 to a remote file 3 69 to a self contained network printer 3 50 probe adapter defined Glossary 12 connections 1 15 defined Glossary 12 product options F 23 F 26 program flow control defined Glossary 12 Program menu 2 8 program controlled function key defined Glossa 12 Pisanus Command Language See also PCL defined Glossary 12 Programmatic Command Language PCL 1 1 protocol Kermit file transfer 3 47 3 53 PCL 3 47 Q qualification storage defined Glossary 14 R R1 defined Glossary 12 radix symbolic defined Glossary 15 reference memories comparing data 3 16 reference memory defined Glossary 13 refmem comparing data 3 16 defined Glossary
44. Z X Return or Esc Enter a unique channel name Enter a unique group name Enter a unique pattern range name Enter a value from n to n Enter an octal number 0 7 Z X Return or Esc ENTER INSTR key is only valid in 922516 sequence lines Key ignored Expression can be simplified Enter the number without commas Event Filter or Compound Event conflict F n is not active Only decimal numbers are valid entries in this field You can also enter Z or X or press the Return key or the Esc key Only hexadecimal numbers are valid entries in this field You can also enter Z or X or press the Return key or the Esc key Channel name already exists rename channel using unique name Group name already exists rename group using unique name Pattern range name already exists rename pattern range using unique name Entries in this field must fall in the range of n to n Only octal numbers are valid entries in this field You can also enter Z or X or press the Return key or the Esc key This function key is only valid when the cursor is positioned on a 92516 sequence line Otherwise itis ignored The expression in the clock equation is redundant Commas are not valid numeric entries That specific combination of events and or event filters is not supported That function key is not active in the current context FAIL or The system does not contain optional software required for the current configuration F
45. a printer or to a file Displays on screen notes Calls the Menu Selection overlay Table 2 3 briefly describes the bottom row of on screen buttons These buttons are sometimes called macro buttons The macro buttons although visible do not operate when an overlay is open excluding the Menu Selection overlay You can use these buttons to quickly move between key menus Operating Basics Table 2 3 On Screen Macro Buttons SAVE On screen Button Button Name Description Configuration Calls the Configuration menu of the selected module Channel Calls the Channel menu of the selected module Clock Calls the Clock menu of the selected module Trigger Calls the Trigger menu of the selected module State Calls the State Display menu ofthe selected module Timing Calls the Timing Display menu of the selected module Disassembly Calls the Disassembly Display menu ofthe selected module Disk Calls the Disk Services menu Save Calls the Save Restore menu The on screen buttons also have their keyboard equivalents Table 2 4 shows the keyboard equivalents for Tektronix X Terminal keyboards Table 2 4 Keyboard Equivalents Key Function Typical X Terminal key Tektronix X Terminal Key Cursor Up R8 Keypad 8 Keypad 8 Cursor Right R12 Keypad 6 Keypad 6 Cursor Down R14 Keypad 2 Keypad 2 Cursor Left R10 Keypad 4 Keypad 4 Home R11 Keypad 5 Keypad 5 Page Up R9 Keypad 9 Key
46. a single 80 channel wide module composed of all five cards formation 1 might split the five cards into one 64 channel module and one 16 channel module formation 2 might contain one 48 channel module and one 32 channel module etc See also Module DAS System User Manual Glossary DAS System User Manual Notes System On line documentation provided with the software This information is provided in the form of brief quick access notes Two types of notes are available Field Notes and Key Notes Overlay A temporary display that partially covers the currently displayed menu usually opened by selecting a function key Paged Memory Acquisition memory can be divided into pages with each page containing a given number of samples Allows you to make multiple acquisitions around the trigger within a single acquisition memory Pattern Generator A module that outputs binary data at specified time intervals There are both 16 and 32 channel pattern generation modules See also 9285 6 and 92852 Pipeline The several stages of latches that acquired data must be clocked through to reach acquisition memory Pod A fixed group of pattern generator data channels See also Pod Connector Pod Clock Each P6464 and P6465 pattern generator probe provides nine data channels and one pod clock line The pod clock is asserted for each pattern generator clock cycle The leading edge of the pod clock signal can be delayed 5 ns relative to
47. allows you to select the software support mode default memory size and whether or not you want to capture signal glitches This menu shows you the name and type of module you have including the number of acquisition channels available and it indicates the number of intermodule signals you have defined m Channel Menu The Channel menu allows you to create channel groups and define their names radix and order You can also assign the individual channel names and define their polarities and threshold voltages m Clock Menu The Clock menu lets you select the sample clock source and the internal clock period or the external clock equations and qualifiers You can choose microprocessor specific options if you have microprocessor support application software installed on the hard disk and selected in the Config menu 2 7 Operating Basics 2 8 Display Menus Trigger Menu The Trigger menu lets you define the trigger position trigger specification program including states events and actions You can also define the type of storage qualification you want You can use trigger libraries that contain templates for trigger specification programs or create your own libraries Monitor Menu The Monitor Menu monitors the progress of the acquisition It displays if an acquisition is not completed within a few seconds You can use the Monitor menu to debug trigger specification programs by monitoring the status of the acquisition the coun
48. and specify a file name in the File Name field the default file name is output Define the remaining print parameters in the overlay Select the appropriate function key legend to print the data to a file To print data to a network printer perform the following steps 1 DG o 7 If the network printer is connected directly to the DAS and is not part of a hosted network ensure that the printer has a TCP IP compatible Ipr spooler Display the menu or data you want to print on your terminal With the mouse point at the PRINT button at the bottom of the menu click on the left mouse button to call the appropriate print overlay Select Network Printer in the Send Output To field Define the remaining print parameters in the overlay Enter the internet address of the network printer in the Internet Addrs field If the printer is part of a hosted network you may also need to enter the user name in the User field and the name of the printer in the Printer Name field Select the appropriate function key legend to print the data to the printer To print data to a remote file assuming the DAS is properly connected to a hosted network perform the following steps 1 Display the menu or data you want to print on your terminal With the mouse point at the PRINT button at the bottom of the menu click on the left mouse button to call the appropriate print overlay Select Network File rcp in the Send Output To field and sp
49. antistatic precautions before handling any module otherwise damage can occur The antistatic precautions are listed in the DAS 9200 Technician s Reference Manual 2 DAS System User Manual Insert the module into the desired slot of the mainframe with the component side down and the 540 pin connector pointing into the mainframe Place the module in the slot guides and gently slide the module into the mainframe until the three sections of the 540 pin connector rest against the slot connector After making sure that the guide pins line up with the connector insert the two ejector tools into the holes at the outside corners of the module Gently push on the ejector tools to place the module into position Verify that the card is fully seated into the 540 pin connector the outside edge of the module must be flush with the outer surface of the card cage and the sheet metal on both sides Replace the two board ejectors and install the card cage door taking care to fit the edge of the installed modules into the slots of the door Replace the top cover of the mainframe Reconnect the RS 232 cables probes and power cord F 15 Appendix F User Service F 16 Removing a Module A Installing the GPIB Connector Although the following procedures can be used to remove most cards from the mainframes the 92A60 90 Modules and the 92HS8 Modules require a few extra steps m If your mainframe contains a 92A60 90 Module y
50. approximately 10 seconds The Extended Self Test is intended for use by Tektronix service personnel For more information on both tests contact your local Tektronix service center Fault Isolation The following fault isolation suggestions are provided to isolate problems to either the terminal mainframe faulty probes or operator setups You should read through these procedures to help isolate a problem to a specific part of the instrument before contacting a Tektronix service center DAS System User Manual F 19 Appendix F User Service Color Terminal Problems F 20 The following sections provide information on problems that you may experi ence with the color terminal Baud Rate Problems If the terminal serial window displays unusual characters check the baud rate of the mainframe to ensure it is set at 38400 baud Check the setting of the DIP switches on the controller board Refer to Chapter 1 of this manual for information on setting the DIP switches Communication Parameter Problems If the window does not appear on the color terminal there may be problems with communication parameters on the terminal or the mainframe Refer to Appendix E Configuration Utility to check and set if necessary the mainframe network parameters or operating mode The terminal network parameters should match those listed in Table F 4 If not perform the following steps to reload the terminal s default parameters Table F 4 Terminal
51. by time correlated modules can be viewed in a single combined display menu Only clustered modules can be time correlated Figure 3 7 shows a simple correlation application for one cluster In this example two acquisition modules have been time correlated This means that data acquired by each of the modules is time aligned allowing you to determine where each data sample occurred relative to each other sample in time The fields in the Correlated Module column let you select modules you want to correlate Press the right mouse button while pointing at the blank field to view a list of choices If you want to add another module to the list select function key F7 ADD CORR a blank field will appear below the current list Available selections are the acquisition modules in the cluster pattern generation modules cannot be correlated DAS System User Manual Reference DAS System User Manual Control Logic 32 bit Microprocessor 92A16 92A90 async time base sync time base Time 2l Correlated Figure 3 7 Time Correlation Between Two Acquisition Modules in a Cluster The Correlation Definition overlay lets you enter the names of modules you want to correlate Figure 3 8 shows an example of the Correlation Definition overlay Ciustar 2 SZASBID 1 Setup Lum Gatup Idi CORRELATION DEFIMITIOM Corre late Fa DEFAULT CORR 1 I n uF o Bii j Lee LIC IMBRE S1 CHER T 1 l M BM n HUNE war Figur
52. cage is on top 3 Insert the module into the desired slot of the mainframe with the component side down and the 540 pin connector pointing into the mainframe 4 Place the module in the slot guides and gently slide the module into the mainframe until the three sections of the 540 pin connector rest against the slot connector CAUTION To avoid damaging the module or the pins on the backplane do not let the module drop into the card cage slot 5 After making sure that the guide pins line up with the connector insert the two ejector tools into the holes at the outside corners of the module Gently push on the ejector tools to place the module into position DAS System User Manual Appendix F User Service Verify that the module is fully seated into the 540 pin connector the outside edge of the module must be flush with the outer surface of the card cage and the sheet metal on both sides Replace the two board ejectors and install the card cage door taking care to fit the edge of the installed modules into the slots of the door Place the mainframe in its normal upright position and replace the top cover Reconnect the RS 232 cables probes and power cord Horizontal Installation Procedure To install a card in the horizontal position perform the following steps 1 With the front panel power switch in the OFF position and the power cord disconnected remove the top cover and card cage door CAUTION Observe
53. compliance to the EMC Directive 89 336 EEC for the following products when they are used with the above named products 92A96UD 92C96 92C96D 92C96SD 92C96XD 92816 92832 928 X109 928X118 9206XT rm M ni Table of Contents Getting Started Operating Basics DAS System User Manual General Safety Summary eeeeeeeee enhn nnn Preface How to Use This Manual 20 00 0000 ccc III Manual Conventions 0 0 0 e n Getting Started Product Description 57a cage SAA oq edema toned IR edipi Re RR n Mainframe Hardware 0 ccc ccc n DAS Mainframe with Option 04 000 c eee ee eee Mechanical Chassis io ea aucune IR RR eae Aa Aiea en SCR e Controller Board Aegis IER o RR ERR Ru AT RR sare EUR ANUS Backplane Board 2 3 60 os Cox Rue AER RR ane wa TR TRAD RA a Hard and Floppy Disk Drives 000 cee cence eee RS 232 Ports LAN Interface 0 eese Se wb aaa Rea AT e Rae CUN A NS I O Port Power Supply External Event Connections sieas aneso enansa ennan a ee Expansion Mainframe irine pean ea aa be gs RR Ree RU Installation Power Requirements 0 0 cece cece ete e eens Site Considerations 0 0 0 0 ccc cece eee teenies Terminal Connections 0 cette ee Mainframe Connections 0 0 c eect ee Host Computer or Serial Printer Connections 004 Terminal Hos
54. components if you have less than two output signal components defined the Combination field disappears Table 3 1 shows the number and type of signal event resources available with different modules Table 3 1 Signal Event Resources Module Input Output 92A16 Two normal and one high speed Two normal and one high speed 92A60 or 92490 Three normal Three normal 92A96 or 92C96 Two normal or high speed Two normal or high speed 92516 One normal or high speed One normal or high speed 92532 None None In interaction between any two modules only one module can drive a high speed signal event the other can only receive it Using Normal signal events any number of modules can drive or receive signal events To use high speed signals there cannot be any empty slots between the modules for which signals are defined If you have an 92C02 GPIB Expansion Module in your mainframe the Components field appears allowing you to designate external as well as internal signal components Figure 3 5 shows an example of the Signal Definition overlay DAS System User Manual 3 9 Reference Cius Gatup Ids SIGNAL GEFIKETIONW Signe here Pa Typa fora Lina Fi ESCAPE E LAHLEL Piht OTM Hid Bet ELE iT Figure 3 5 Signal Definition Overlay The Signal Definition overlay has the following key fields and features m Signal Name field Use this field to enter the name of a signal you want to define Select func
55. data to create the timing display Go To State Actions may have been modified A State in the Trigger menu was deleted Any Go To State Actions may have been modified Glitch input radix use G or X This field accepts only G look for glitch or X ignore Glitch is invalid when 92A16 Clock is not Internal Group names must be unique Hex input radix use O F or X High speed signals must have 1 inputand 1 output Illegal disk block size N Incompatible channel width detected Restored the previous setup Inconsistency with Channel menu forced a Trigger S pec change Inconsistency with Clock menu forced a Trigger S pec change Inconsistency with Cluster Setup menu forced a Trigger Spec change Inconsistency with Config menu forced a Trigger S pec change Invalid combination of Compound Events for State Insufficient channels assigned to this group use 0 3 You can only capture glitches if you are using internal clock mode No two group names can be the same The old group name will be restored The input radix for this field is hexadecimal enter 0 F or X High speed signals must have one input and one output Specify the missing input output signal When formatting or booting the hard disk the returned block size information N indicates that the hard disk is incompatible with the system software Contact your local Tektronix service center for information and recommended action
56. defined Glossary 6 clock latch 3 16 defined Glossary 6 Correlation Definition overlay 3 14 function keys 3 14 3 15 counter defined Glossary 6 creating hard copies 3 67 cross triggering modules 3 63 CTS 3 46 3 47 current system software E 3 E 4 cursor defined Glossary 7 D DAS 92E9 See Expansion Mainframe DAS NT 1 2 capturing and printing menus 3 73 defined Glossary 7 product options F 24 DAS XP 1 2 capturing and printing menus 3 72 defined Glossary 7 product options F 23 DASdisk utility adding file types G 5 change operation G 3 delete operation G 7 Dir operation G 3 file sets G 2 initializing floppy disks G 3 installation on a PC G 1 G list disk contents G 3 2 DAS System User Manual Index optional command line switches G 8 pack operation G 4 quit operation G 7 read operation G 5 removing file types G 5 screen color selections G 8 unpack operation G 3 using DASdisk G 2 G 10 write operation G 6 data cursor defined Glossary 7 date setting 3 56 DC on off switch 2 1 default network parameters E 5 default X server address E 8 default X server name E 7 delete file operation 3 34 3 35 delete operations deleting symbols 3 43 delete refmem 3 30 delta mark defined Glossary 7 delta time defined Glossary 7 demultiplex defined Glossary 7 deskew defined Glos
57. enter the name of the packed file set If the destination file set exists already its contents will be overwritten If you press the Return key without specifying a file set name DASdisk names the file set with the name of the directory to be packed If the file set name and the directory name are identical when the operation is complete the directory will no longer exist if they differ the source directory is unaffected 3 Enter Y to confirm the operation 4 After the operation is completed press any key to return to the Main menu G 4 DAS System User Manual Appendix G DASdisk Utility Add Operation Remove Operation Read Operation DAS System User Manual The DASdisk program only works with file types that are in its File Type List The Add Operation adds new types to the list To add a file type to the list select the Add operation in the Main menu and perform the following steps 1 In the New File Type Name field enter the name of the file type that you want to add press the Return key Pressing the Return key without entering a file name aborts the Add operation 2 Inresponse to the prompt enter a Y to confirm that the file is an ASCII file Enter N if the file is a binary file 3 Enter Y to confirm the operation DASdisk displays an updated list of file types showing the new file type DASdisk aborts the operation if the new file type already existed on the list of file types 4 Press any key to retu
58. equipment or c to service a product that has been modified or integrated with other products when the effect of such modification or integration increases the time or difficulty of servicing the product THIS WARRANTY IS GIVEN BY TEKTRONIX WITH RESPECT TO THIS PRODUCT IN LIEU OF ANY OTHER WARRANTIES EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED TEKTRONIX AND ITS VENDORS DISCLAIM ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE TEKTRONIX RESPONSIBILITY TO REPAIR OR REPLACE DEFECTIVE PRODUCTS IS THE SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY PROVIDED TO THE CUSTOMER FOR BREACH OF THIS WARRANTY TEKTRONIX AND ITS VENDORS WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY INDIRECT SPECIAL INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IRRESPECTIVE OF WHETHER TEKTRONIX OR THE VENDOR HAS ADVANCE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES EC Declaration of Conformity Tektronix Holland N V Marktweg 73A 8444 AB Heerenveen The Netherlands declare under sole responsibility that the DAS NT Option 04 DAS XP Option 04 and DAS 9221 Option 04 Logic Analyzers meets the intent of Directive 89 336 EEC for Electromagnetic Compatibility Compliance was demonstrated to the following specifications as listed in the Official Journal of the European Communities EN 55011 Class A Radiated and Conducted Emissions EN 50082 1 Immunity IEC 801 2 Electrostatic Discharge Immunity IEC 801 3 RF Electromagnetic Field Immunity IEC 801 4 Electrical Fast Transient Burst Immunity Tektronix Inc claims
59. error messages generated in this phase of the file system Check procedure D 14 DAS System User Manual Appendix D Loading System Software File System Install Utility Use the file system Install utility to install and verify the Base System Software the optional system software and application software You can also use the Install utility to remove the optional system software and application software You must install the Base System Software after you run the file system Make utility when you upgrade to a new version of system software or to repair any damage to the system software from an abnormal shutdown of the system You can also install the optional system software and the application software at this time However you can also install the application software using the Disk Services menu at a later time In all cases you will need to install some portion of the optional system software together with the Base System Software You can use the Install utility at a later time to install or remove any optional system software However you cannot use the Install utility to remove the Base System Software The file system Install utility has three functions Its main function is to install the software including the Base System Software the optional system software and application software You can use it to remove optional system software or application software You can also use it to verify that the installed software is b
60. for 3 44 sorting 3 43 sync out connector 3 66 synchronous acquisition defined Glossary 15 System Config menu See System Configuration menu System Configuration menu 2 6 3 1 3 6 cluster status 3 2 function keys 3 3 module formation list 3 3 module formation number 3 2 System Monitor menu 2 6 3 20 3 21 function keys 3 20 3 21 Modules column 3 20 Status column 3 20 system setup menus 2 6 system software 1 22 defined Glossary 15 system tutorial 2 11 2 32 T Terminal Flash ROM E 9 terminal boot parameters 1 13 description 1 2 exterior cleaning F 3 power requirements 1 8 site considerations 1 12 specifications A 6 terminal port 3 45 3 46 baud rates 1 4 threshold defined Glossary 15 time setting 3 56 time base bus defined Glossary 15 defined Glossary 15 time correlation example 3 62 time correlation 3 14 timer defined Glossary 15 Index 8 timestamp defined Glossary 15 timing display defined Glossary 15 Timing Display menu 2 9 TLA 510 defined Glossary 15 TLA 520 defined Glossary 16 trace mode defined Glossary 16 transferring files with Kermit 3 52 trigger defined Glossary 16 event defined Glossary 16 external triggering 3 66 position defined Glossary 16 program defined Glossary 16 specification program defined Glossary 16 Trigger menu 2
61. formation m The contents of clusters This menu provides the mechanisms for changing module formations and creating clusters These mechanisms are discussed in this chapter The modules installed in the mainframe are automatically arranged into module formations System software assigns a module formation identification number to each valid combination The default module formation selection labeled number 0 appears the first time you call the System Configuration menu By changing the module formation number you can view the various module formations for that type A module formation consists of one or more similar type modules and each module may contain one or more cards of that type Changing the cards installed in slots dramatically changes the module formations that can be selected Some configurations are more versatile than others For instance suppose your mainframe contains two 92C96D Modules System software establishes the valid combinations when you power on the system and assigns each combination a module formation number A module formation identified by number now exists for the 92C96D Modules Reference The System Configuration menu looks similar to Figure 3 1 In this example the mainframe contains a 92C96 Module 92516 Module and 92832 Module Because the 92C96 Module is a single card module it only has the default formation with no module formation number However the 92816 Module and the 92832 Module can fu
62. formatting D 2 D 8 Make utility D 9 D 14 hardcopy general use 3 67 3 71 Timing menu 3 70 hardware expansion mainframe hardware 1 5 mainframe 1 2 1 7 mainframe hardware 1 2 version numbers 3 59 3 60 hardware configurations 1 19 hardware installation 1 7 1 18 Hardware Software Version menu See Version menu high speed signals 3 10 hold time defined Glossary 9 host computer connections 1 16 host name 3 50 host port 3 45 3 46 baud rates 1 4 hosted configuration 1 1 HP Lazerjet Printing 3 71 I O signals external event 3 11 install application operation 3 36 Install utility D 1 D 15 D 20 installation procedures 1 7 1 18 installing modules F 11 F 18 horizontal installation procedure F 15 F 20 vertical installation procedure F 14 F 15 installing software 1 18 application software 3 36 D 17 optional system software D 17 system software D 15 D 22 interactive triggering defined Glossary 9 internal clock defined Glossary 9 internet address 3 48 E 7 J Joydisk defined Glossary 9 K Kermit 3 47 Kermit file transfers 3 52 key note 2 20 defined Glossary 9 L LAN boot status 3 49 LAN communication parameters 3 48 3 49 LAN interface 1 4 LAN overlay 3 47 Ethernet address field 3 49 function keys 3 49 Gateway address field 3 48 DAS System User Manual
63. from the hard disk Formatting prepares the hard disk for data storage all previous stored data is destroyed Before formatting the hard disk use one of the following methods to save files from the hard disk m Copy the files to floppy disks using the Backup Restore utility supplied in the Disk Services Menu m Transfer the files to a host computer using ftp or Kermit To access the main menu of the SCSI Hard Disk Format Utility follow these steps 1 Power off the mainframe Face the rear of the mainframe and locate the DIP switches mounted on the Controller board as shown in Figure D 1 2 Place DIP switch 1 the leftmost DIP switch in the closed down position Place DIP switch 2 in the open up position Leave all other DIP switches in their original positions 3 Power on the terminal Power on the mainframe wait for the prompt BOOT gt and then insert the System Utilities disk labeled FORMAT MAKE 4 Inresponse to the BOOT gt prompt type f format and press the Return key DAS System User Manual Appendix D Loading System Software EHHH RASEI LTTE LU LB UL BL C C A LB Bg 0g C BC gg e CHHU UUU UHH AIU TERE CU C WENFEEEFPFEPEEEFFEEF EEE IDIOT CU ME LACE HELL M LB BAR HA Figure D 1 DIP Switch Location SCSI Hard Disk Utility Main Menu DAS System User Manual MN Dip Switch 1 RS 9 Dip S witch
64. gt prompt is displayed proceed to step 4 If not follow steps 1 2 and 3 before continuing with step 4 1 Power off the mainframe Face the rear of the mainframe and locate the DIP switches mounted on the Controller board refer to Figure D 1 2 Place DIP switch 1 the leftmost DIP switch in the closed down position Place DIP switch 2 in the open up position Leave all other DIP switches in their original positions 3 Poweron the terminal Power on the mainframe wait for the prompt BOOT gt and then insert the floppy disk labeled FORMAT MAKE 4 Inresponse to the BOOT gt prompt type f make and press the Return key The following menu is displayed Press m to run the file system Make procedure Press c to run the file system Check Procedure gt 5 Type m to create a new file system This operation destroys all files on the hard disk A warning message and prompt will be displayed type y to continue with the Make utility D 9 Appendix D Loading System Software File System Check Procedure D 10 If you type c in step 5 the file system Check procedure repairs the damaged file system after a system failure occurs An unexpected loss of power or certain software or hardware failures can corrupt the file system and cause the system to shut down in an uncontrolled fashion When this happens recent file system changes may not be completely written to the hard disk and the file system on the hard di
65. in the instrument The configuration and diagnostic information is listed when you select item C in the main menu DAS System User Manual Appendix E Configuration Utility Figure E 2 shows an example of the configuration display listing The listing looks similar to the Diagnostic menu For each installed card or module the diagnostic results are displayed If a diagnostic failure exists the resulting error code displays The diagnostic results are those that were recorded as of the last normal power on A value of No S W indicates that the corresponding hardware could not be tested because the Optional System Software for that hardware was not installed CURRENT CONFIGURATION System Software Release 3 Version 1 40 Previous Shutdown Normal Slot Card Diagnostic Controller 92LANSE Network Controller PASS 92C96XD 96 Channels 10 ns Acquisition 128K Deep PASS 92516 18 Channels 20ns Pattern Generation PASS 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Figure E 2 Configuration Utility Hardware Configuration and Diagnostic Results Save Image of Current Selecting item S from the main menu lets you save a nonexecutable image of the System Software current system software in a different location on the hard disk This operation is useful when you plan to change the operating mode of the system You can save an image of the system software for the current mode of operation before installing new software If you later decide to return to the original m
66. matching of a specific data word with the presence or absence of that word in signals acquired by the logic analyzer Z A character that when entered in place of a numeric value in the 92S16 32 Program menu specifies the internal inhibit bit for the pattern generators DAS System User Manual Index Symbols rhosts file 3 51 Numbers 7 bit ASCII mode 3 47 8 bit binary mode 3 47 9202X T defined Glossary 1 9203XT defined Glossary 1 9204XT defined Glossary 1 9205X T defined Glossary 1 9206X T defined Glossary 1 92A16 E Modules 1 20 configuration guidelines F 4 F 5 defined Glossary 1 92A60 90 Modules 1 20 configuration guidelines F 5 defined Glossary 1 92A96 Module defined Glossary 2 92A96 Modules 1 20 configuration guidelines F 5 92C02 Module 3 11 configuration guidelines F 6 connecting the GPIB connector F 16 defined Glossary 2 electrical specifications A 4 mechanical specifications A 2 92C96 Module defined Glossary 2 92C96 Modules 1 20 configuration guidelines F 5 92CO2 Module external event pins 3 12 92HS8 E Modules 1 21 configuration guidelines F 6 defined Glossary 2 92HSSC defined Glossary 3 92LANSE Module defined Glossary 3 92PORT 1 24 92S16 32 Modules 1 21 configuration guidelines F 6 F 7 defined Glossary 3 928327 defined Glossary 3 928X109 118 Modules 1 22 configuration guidelines F
67. media mount m Rear panel probe shields m EMI gasket material on the edges of the base plate m Clip for holding the power supply tightly against the inside of the rear panel m Probe clamps for holding probes to the rear panel DAS System User Manual Getting Started m Conductive paint on the inside of the top cover and base plate that makes connection to the EMI gasket material along the edges of the base plate W Screen material on the front facade and top cover m EMI gasket material on the inside rear edge of the top cover Follow these precautionary guidelines when using a mainframe equipped with Option 04 W Avoid scratching any surface coated with conductive paint W Avoid bending or tearing gasket material along edges of base plate and take care not to snag clothing on gasket material Remove only the shields that correspond to probes or cables being attached unnecessary removal of shields increases EMI radiation To remove a rear panel probe shield you will need to remove two top screws and then the two screws for the adjacent shield After removing the shield replace the screws attaching the adjacent shield DAS Systems After January 1 1996 Newer DAS mainframes with Option 04 meet Directive 89 336 EEC for electromagnetic compatibility Option 04 applies to mainframes set for 230 V operation only operation at 115 V exceeds component ratings A mainframe with Option 04 includes a 230 V line filter to eliminate or reduc
68. menu to create programs to control when or where the trigger occurs and what sampled data to store in the acquisition module You can also use trigger libraries to load preconfigured trigger setups For the purposes of this tutorial you will keep the Trigger menu simple 26 Point the mouse at the button labeled TRIG and press the left button to display the Trigger menu Notice that the Trigger menu displays the channel grouping as you defined in the Channel menu see Figure 2 13 27 Select function key F6 ACCESS LIBRARY to display the default trigger library Trigger libraries let you use preconfigured trigger setups You can select any of the choices that meet your needs and restore that setup The trigger menu then prompts you to enter information to complete the Trigger menu setup DAS System User Manual Operating Basics DAS System User Manual Fa Fe F7 DEFAULT MESI DELETE TRIGGER LIBRARY rock Fra Se hmmm at ha hz porig o eE M E Dh BM oO Figure 2 13 Trigger Menu 28 29 30 Point the mouse at the library selection Trigger on Anything and press the left mouse button Select function key F5 RESTORE ITEM to restore the trigger setup You will be prompted to verify your actions Confirm your selection and then select function key F8 EXIT amp SAVE to close the trigger library Notice that the Trigger menu has changed according to your selection from the trigger library Also notice that
69. must use the Configuration utility Server This field designates the server to view the status of the server The tftp selection is required for communications with the terminal This field also selects a server to enter a password LAN Boot Status This field indicates the current status of the LAN subsystem Ethernet Address The Ethernet address is unique to the system s 92LANSE Module and is assigned at the factory Server Present Status This field displays the name and status of the sever specified in the Server field The status messages and their meaning are m listening The server is waiting for a remote connection m connected The server is currently connected to a host m down The server is not running If there is a software problem with the server or if the LAN system failed to boot you would get this message You can assign a unique password to each server in the LAN overlay To assign a password perform the following steps 1 2 Select the desired server in the Server field Select function key F5 SET PASSWD Enter a password of eight characters or less and press the Return key You will get a message to confirm the password Press the Return key to confirm your password or the Esc key to reject the password 3 49 Reference 3 50 Print Screen Setup Overlay When you receive your system no passwords are assigned Once set a password cannot be viewed If you want to use a server
70. next step is to set up the Channel menu The Channel menu lets you assign probe input channels to desired groups for easier recognition and interpretation of the acquired data 5 Point the mouse at the button labeled CHAN and press the left button The Channel menu displays If you selected one of the software support packages the Channel menu will be setup according to the software support package You can still change the Channel menu as necessary for your particular application The default Channel menu assigns 32 channels for the Address Group 32 channels for the Data Group and 32 Channels for the Control Group For the purposes of this tutorial assume that you only need 16 channels for the Data Group and four channels for the Control Group You can change the Channel menu using the mouse and the function keys 6 Pointthe mouse at the Data Group Section D3 field and press the left mouse to move the cursor 7 Pointthe mouse at the legend for function key F7 DELETE and press the left button 8 Point the mouse at the selection Delete Section From Group and press the right button to delete the Section The pop up window closes and the Section D3 is deleted from the Channel menu 9 Select function key F7 DELETE again and press the right button to delete Section D2 Assume that you were getting ready to delete Section D1 but you changed your mind If you still have the pop up window open you can abort the delete operatio
71. outputs you have defined for a signal Selections are OR and AND This field only appears if you define two or more output lines for the same signal Output and input assignments are shown in the Direction column in this overlay wm Modules column All modules contained in the current cluster are listed here The name of the current cluster is shown in the status line at the top of the menu m Direction column Entries in this column let you specify whether an output will be used by the signal being defined or whether the module will receive the signal as an input Selections are Input Output and None Function key F6 DELETE SIGNAL deletes a signal that is currently displayed Cycle through the signal names until the name of the signal you want to delete appears in the Signal Name field Then select function key F6 DELETE SIGNAL That signal will no longer appear in the list of defined signals If there are no signals to delete this function key will not appear on the menu Function key F7 ADD SIGNAL adds a signal Select function key F7 ADD SIGNAL the signal name field will change to fill in mode You can type in the name of a signal event you want to define or press the Return key and cause a default name to appear in the field for example Signal 1 This function key does not appear on the menu after you have defined all possible signals Using the External Event If you have a 92C02 Module installed in slot 8 of your mainframe or
72. protocol You must use either XON XOFF or DTR CTS flow control with the PCL Flow control is inherent in the Kermit protocol no additional flow control is necessary In addition to changes in the Communications menu fields a directory appears that contains a list of the files of the type selected in the File Type field The directory listing shows the file names file sizes in kilobytes and the date the files were created The File Name field is a fill in field the contents change as you move the directory cursor with the joydisk or scroll keys NOTE Some versions of Kermit for example UNIX Kermit but not PC Kermit distinguish between ASCII and binary files If your host Kermit makes this distinction remember to enter the SET MODE ASCII or SET MODE IMAGE command on the host before starting the file transfer If you fail to do so the data may be transferred incorrectly ASCII files include Disasm Format Symbol Table and some Print Output To begin the file transfer send or receive enter the necessary information and select function key F8 SEND FILE or RECV FILE A window appears that lets you track the status of the file transfer The status window contains informational fields describing the file name the data currently being transferred the number of bytes currently transferred and the number of retries attempted during the transfer You can abort the file transfer at any time by pressing the Escape key To forc
73. reload the system software Phase 4 Check Reference Counts This phase checks link count information in the file system You will almost always see some type of error here As a general rule if a file with a SIZE of 0 is unreferenced you should clear it do not reconnect it Table D 4 summarizes the error messages that can be generated during Phase 4 testing Table D 4 Phase 4 File System Check Error Messages Message UNREF FILE IH OWNER 20 MODE M SIZE S MTIME T RECONNECT CLEAR LINK COUNT FILE I OWNER O MODE M SIZE S MTIME M COUNT X SHOULD BE Y ADJ UST Explanation An unreferenced file has been detected always type n in response Note the file size if the file has a size greater than 0 run the file system Install utility Verify option to ensure that no system files have been deleted Most files that show up here are temporary files Deletion of these files is harmless since the files would not be usable if you were to try to reconnect them If you type n ata RECONNECT prompt another prompt appears telling you to clear the file You should then type y in response An incorrect link count has been detected type y in response LINK COUNT DIR I OWNER 0 MODE M SIZE S MTIME M COUNT X SHOULD BE Y ADJ UST An incorrect link count has been detected type y in response LINK COUNT F IH OWNER 0 MODE M SIZE S MTIME M COUNT X SHOULD BE Y ADJ UST An incorrect link cou
74. selections that you make in the Signal Definition overlay Cluster Setup menu The External Event Out pin passes a TTL level event signal from a specified DAS to an external component for use as an arming or triggering signal You can use the event out signal to trigger an oscilloscope or to stop start or trigger a separate DAS system Expansion Mainframe The DAS 92E9 Expansion mainframe provides additional slot space for acquisition and pattern generation modules Up to three Expansion mainframes can be added to the Master mainframe A Master mainframe and three Expansion mainframes provide a total of 28 slots Both Expansion and Master mainframes use the same mechanical chassis back plane and power supply however the Expansion mainframe does not include the disk drives or the power switch In an Expansion mainframe an Expansion Slave board takes the place of the Master mainframe Controller board see Figure 1 1 In a fully expanded system the Master mainframe and Expansion mainframes 1 and 2 require a 92C02 Module in slot 8 of each mainframe If one Expansion mainframe is used with the Master mainframe it can be placed on top of the Master mainframe as in Figure 1 2 the Master mainframe can only support the weight of one Expansion mainframe When using two or three Expansion mainframes all mainframes must be vertically rackmounted the Master mainframe must be positioned as the lowest mainframe in the rack For complete detail
75. software DAS NT and you have a Tektronix X terminal display such as a 9206XT you can use the Workspace menu of the X terminal to add functions to your DAS Figure 2 4 shows an example of the Workspace menu You can restart the windows by selecting TekLA Open Window When you start the DAS in this manner you can specify the font size of the DAS window using one of the selections in the pull down menu If you select Auto fontsize the DAS window will be automatically sized to your terminal You can close the menus or shut down a remote window session by selecting TekLA Close Window effectively resetting the DAS making it available for other local or remote users You can also start other applications or tools if they are available For example if you have the 92Port application you can start it from the Workspace menu refer to the 92Port Instructions for information on the 92Port application The Print Screen tool lets you capture menus and save them in a file or send them to a printer refer to Capturing and Printing Menus on page 3 72 for instructions on using the Print Screen tool DAS System User Manual Operating Basics sel Workspace Local Clients Tek LA 92 port Open Close Window font 12 font 16 Refresh font 20 Restart WM font 24 Reread Menu File Print Screen Exit WM Exit Figure 2 4 Workspace Menu on Tektronix X Terminals Pow
76. specification term Only one state or step in a trigger specification program is active at any one time Usually expressed in the form of an if then construction See also Trigger Specification Program State Display Tabular representation of logic states of input data channels Step Mode A feature of the 92S16 32 Pattern Generation Module s Monitor menu that causes the pattern generator to single step through its program one sequence line at a time Allows you to see each instruction and vector as it interacts with the system under test Storage Qualification The process of filtering out data that has been acquired but which you do not want to store in acquisition memory This allows you to avoid filling up your module s acquisition memory with irrelevant data samples See also Clock Qualification DAS System User Manual Glossary Symbolic Radix A format that allows you to substitute mnemonics names for radix numbers when using menus You enter your own mnemonics into the Symbol Table menu The logic analyzer will replace radixes throughout the menu structure with these assigned values Synchronous Acquisition An acquisition made using a clock external to the logic analyzer Such a clock is usually generated by the user s circuitry and is therefore synchro nous to it This external clock may or may not be periodic System Software System level software stored on a hard disk and loaded into system memory at power on A
77. that saving an image of the current system software causes the software to be removed Therefore you must install new software following a Save operation before returning to normal operation You can install new software either from the floppy disks or by restoring a previously saved image Saved images of system software vary in size according to the amount of optional system software and application software installed The minimum size is approximately 14 Mbytes If there is insufficient room on the hard disk to save the complete image the save operation will abort leaving the current system software intact Saving an image takes approximately three minutes The Available field at the right end of the save entry in the Main menu shows the type of system software that is currently installed and available for saving if any The value None signifies that the system software has not been installed or has been removed as the result of either a save or operating mode change You will be prompted to verify your actions before the save operation occurs If the save operation cannot be carried out you will be returned to the Main menu Selecting item R from the Main menu lets you restore a previously saved image of system software This operation is useful when you plan to change the operating mode of the system You can save an image of the system software supporting the current mode of operation before installing new software If you later decide t
78. the procedure displays an appropriate message and then displays the BOOT gt prompt Use the verify function of the Install utility to verify that all Tektronix supplied software including the Base System Software the optional system software and the application software is completely and correctly installed and has not been corrupted Use the verify function of the Install utility after executing the file system Check procedure of the Make utility Each base optional and application software package is individually verified as you install it Therefore it is not necessary to use the verify function of the Install utility after installing software You can also verify all Tektronix supplied software through the Version menu If the BOOT gt prompt is already displayed proceed to step 4 If not begin with step 1 1 Power off the mainframe Face the rear of the mainframe and locate the DIP switches mounted on the Controller board refer to Figure D 1 on page D 3 2 Place DIP switch 1 the left most DIP switch in the closed down position Place DIP switch 2 in the open up position Leave all other DIP switches in their original positions D 19 Appendix D Loading System Software 3 Power on the terminal Power on the mainframe wait for the prompt BOOT gt and then insert the INSTALL floppy disk 4 Inresponse to the BOOT gt prompt type f install and press the Return key The following menu is displayed
79. the 92496 or 92C96 Modules F 13 Appendix F User Service F 14 m If you are installing a 92A60 90 Module in your mainframe you must install the 92A60 90 Controller board and connect the Buffer Probe cables before installing the 92A460 90 Memory board m A 92S32 cannot be placed in a slot adjacent to above a 92A96 or 92C96 Module m If you are installing both a 92HS8 Master interface card and a 92HS8 Expander interface card in adjacent slots in your mainframe you must first install the Expander interface card and then the Master interface card There are two different ways to install modules in the mainframe the horizontal installation method and the vertical installation method If your mainframe is not installed in a rackmount or if your mainframe is situated such that you can turn the mainframe on its side perform the Vertical Installation Procedure Otherwise perform the Horizontal Installation Procedure Vertical Installation Procedure To install a module in the vertical position perform the following steps 1 With the front panel power switch in the OFF position and the power cord disconnected remove the top cover and card cage door CAUTION Observe antistatic precautions before handling any module otherwise damage can occur The antistatic precautions are listed in the DAS 9200 Technician s Reference Manual 2 Place the mainframe on its side such that the power supply is on the bottom and the card
80. the DAS and a workstation through ftp file transfer protocol and other protocols An optional 92LANP application software product allows you to remotely control the DAS through the LAN interface The 92C02 GPIB Expansion Module provides an optional GPIB interface as well as an interface to the DAS 92E9 Expansion mainframe Since Direct Memory Access DMA capability is provided only in the Master mainframe not in an Expansion mainframe these I O boards must reside in slot 8 of the Master mainframe card cage DAS System User Manual Getting Started A 37 pin connector allows you to monitor or drive external devices with the optional 92PORT application software Power Supply The power supply module supplies the power for all mainframe components This supply is capable of delivering up to 500 watts from a 115 VAC single phase power source using the 15 A power cord Option 1A 400 watts with the standard 12 A power cord If you use a 230 VAC power source with power cord Options A1 A5 the supply delivers up to 575 watts When you use the three phase power source Option 1B power cord the supply is capable of delivering approximately 700 watts External Event The optional 92C02 GPIB Expansion module has a set of pins that provide Connections external event I O signals The External Event In pin accepts a TTL level signal from an external source The received event can be monitored by or can control other instrument modules according to
81. the name of the trigger library selection appears in the Title field at the top of the Trigger menu Using trigger libraries you can set up the Trigger menu to be very simple or very complex You can also edit the menu by adding Trigger states starting and stopping timers or counters and looking for specific data on specific channels For detailed information on all of the Trigger capabilities refer to the user manual for your data acquisition module 2 27 Operating Basics Acquiring Data 2 28 After defining the Trigger setups you are ready to acquire data From any of the Setup menus you can begin acquiring data by selecting the F1 START function key 31 Select function key F1 START to start acquiring data The system starts acquiring data according to the conditions specified in the Setup menus Trigger and Clocking When the conditions are satisfied the system switches to the last selected display menu In most cases this will be the State menu If the display menu does not appear within a few seconds the system will switch to the Monitor menu Because you have not defined any specific Trigger conditions the display menu should appear If not go back to the Clock menu and verify that the Clock is set to Internal 32 If the State menu is not displayed move the mouse to the button labeled STATE at the bottom of the menu and press the left button The State menu should appear and look similar to Figure 2 14
82. the optional system software disks you can install any other application Software disks However you can wait and install the application software disks using the Disk Services menu 10 After you have installed the last disk type c to complete the software installation procedure the system will then power off 11 After the system has completed the power off sequence place DIP switch 1 in the open up position and power on the mainframe Use this part of the File System Install utility to add or replace Tektronix supplied files only The program will not disturb user generated files such as reference memories and system setups If the BOOT gt prompt is already displayed proceed to step 4 If not begin with step 1 1 Power off the mainframe Face the rear of the mainframe and locate the DIP switches mounted on the Controller board refer to Figure D 1 on page D 3 2 Place DIP switch 1 the left most DIP switch in the closed down position Place DIP switch 2 in the open up position Leave all other DIP switches in their original positions 3 Poweron the terminal Power on the mainframe wait for the prompt BOOT gt and then insert the INSTALL floppy disk 4 Inresponse to the BOOT gt prompt type f install and press the Return key The following menu is displayed File System Installation Procedure Insert next DAS system floppy disk and press Return When rebuild is complete press c gt 5 Whe
83. the swap space size of a previously formatted hard disk You can also change the swap space size option this option will be used the next time you request the swap space size via the Make Change selection in this menu or the next time that you use the Initiate Format option in the Format Setup menu NOTE Changing the size of the swap partition space on your hard disk does not require reformatting the hard disk unless the disk has never been formatted but does require you to rebuild the file system using the Make utility Running the Make utility will destroy the data saved on the disk Be sure to save all of the user files using one of the methods described earlier in this section Swap space is the area reserved on the hard disk for temporarily storing program information during operation The swap space is only used when there is not enough memory available on the system The swap partition space is normally used when very large symbol table files are used When the system runs out of swap partition space normal operation cannot continue and an error message will be displayed If this happens you should use the Change Swap Size option to increase the size of the swap partition However increasing the size of the swap partition also decreases the amount of hard disk space available for storing other files such as reference memories setups and autorun definitions DAS System User Manual Appendix D Loading System Software
84. three times the frequency may flow into the neutral conductor A switch or circuit breaker at the installation site is required by some international standards Table 1 2 Power for Expansion Mainframes Watts Voltage Option Source 475 W 105V 127V Std 115V 12A 575 W 105V 127V1 Opt 1A 115V 15A 650 W 200 V 250 V Opt A1 Opt A5 230 V 10A 750 W 2 200 V 250 V Opt 1B 120 208 V 8A phase to phase three phase 3 1 Operation at a low line of 90 V is possible if the card cage load is reduced to 425 W or less 2 The 3 phase 750 W power supply option 1B was discontinued SN B061162 and above 3 Thethree phase load is Y connected A maximum of 15 A at three times the frequency may flow into the neutral conductor A switch or circuit breaker at the installation site is required by some international standards Susceptibility to Dropped Cycles in Power Source The mainframe power supply will maintain the DC voltage levels within the specified limits when the AC power is removed for 16 ms or less However the mainframe will perform a shutdown anytime the AC power is removed longer than 20 ms Getting Started 1 10 If the intended installation site is susceptible to dropped cycles in the power source it is strongly recommended that a line conditioning device be installed to help prevent dropped cycles The line conditioning device should be specified to handle line currents being drawn by the mainframe for line curre
85. up additional space on your hard disk by installing or retaining software that is required for your system Each optional software disk label tells the approximate size consumed by the software to help you decide which optional software to install Note that it is possible for this number to be larger than the capacity of the floppy disks DAS System User Manual Appendix D Loading System Software DAS System User Manual The Base System Software and all optional system software are already installed on all instruments shipped from the factory You can remove unnecessary optional system software or application software by using the remove option of the Install utility You can install or exclude optional system software and application software at your discretion when you upgrade your system to new software versions Be sure to remove any optional system software that you do not intend to replace with a newer version when you upgrade the Operating System Software version if you are unsure run the Verify function to be sure that all of the software on the hard disk is the current version There are different optional software packages for the DAS The optional software packages are briefly described below m 92A16 Support This package provides the necessary software to operate the 92A16 E Data Acquisition Modules You can remove or exclude this software in DAS systems that do not contain 92A16 E Modules m 92A60 Support This package p
86. value in the format XXX XXX XXX XXX where each XXX represents a decimal number in the range of 0 to 255 and press the Return key To retain the current address press the Return key without entering any numbers Selecting item M from the Main menu lets you set the subnet mask for your system The subnet mask specifies the portion of an Internet address that is common to all node addresses on a particular subnet The subnet mask deter mines which other network devices the instrument may address directly and which ones it must access through a gateway A value of 0 0 0 0 turns off subnet support The subnet mask is normally assigned by your system administrator Enter the new value in the format XXX XXX XXX XXX where each XXX represents a decimal number in the range of 0 to 255 and press the Return key To retain the current value press the Return key without entering any numbers Selecting item G from the Main menu lets you set the gateway Internet address This is the IEEE802 gateway address for the local network The value must be set to an address other than 0 0 0 0 to permit communication between the instrument and other devices not on the same subnet This number is normally assigned by your system administrator Enter the new value in the format XXX XXX XXX XXX where each XXX represents a decimal number in the range of 0 to 255 and press the Return key To retain the current value press the Return key without entering any numbers
87. verifying components boards and systems The 92516 Module 16 channels plus two strobe data channels features algorithmic pattern generation with a 1 K memory depth the 928532 Module 32 channels plus 4 strobe data channels features stored pattern generation with an 8 K memory depth These modules can be used separately or together to create the type of output pattern control that suits your application A single 928516 Module can control up to seven 928532 Modules without a 928516 Module up to eight 928532 Modules can operate together Both modules provide pattern generation with the ability to vary the placement of each edge in increments of 1 ns The P6463A Pattern Generation probes deliver the output pattern to the probe tip providing drive equivalent to TTL or CMOS series components The P6464 Pattern Generation probes deliver the output pattern to the probe tip providing drive equivalent to AS TTL and 10 KH ECL series components 1 21 Getting Started 92SX109 118 Pattern Generator Modules These modules also provide high speed 100 MHz pattern generation The 928 X109 Module is based on an enhanced 92816 Pattern Generator Module It is a 9 channel stimulus system that features algorithmic pattern generation This system can operate to a maximum of 100 MHz across nine channels Total memory is 2 K for each channel for vector patterns and 1 K for instructions The 928X118 Module is based on an enhanced 92832 Pattern Generat
88. y in response to this DAS System User Manual message Run the file system Check procedure again after completion D 11 Appendix D Loading System Software Table D 1 Phase 1 File System Check Error Messages Cont Message B DUP l EXCESSIVE DUP BLKS l CONTINUE Explanation The procedure identified a duplicate block B in inode I The procedure detected too many duplicate blocks in inode I Type y to continue when finished run the file system Check procedure again DUP TABLE OVERFLOW CONTINUE There has been an internal table overflow Type y to continue when finished run the file system Check procedure again POSSIBLE FILE SIZE ERROR l A possible error in file size has been detected After completing the file system Check procedure run the system software Install utility Verify option to ensure that no files are corrupted DIRECTORY MISALIGNED I4 PARTIALLY ALLOCATED INODE I l CLEAR A possible directory error has been detected After completing the file system Check routine run the system software Install utility Verify option to ensure that no files are corrupted A partially allocated inode has been detected Respond with y After completing the file system Check procedure run the system software Install utility Verify option to ensure that no files are corrupted PHASE 1B RESCAN FOR MORE DUPS This message may be displayed if the procedure is rescanning for additional dup
89. 0 displays the version numbers of all installed modules system software and application software If there are more entries than can be displayed you can scroll through the remaining entries SZASEID 1 Utiittios LETT Idia F5 WERIFY SOFTWARE PT ic d e S EC EXON D hn uas Dada korig Dem E M BM Bn BM D Figure 3 30 Version Menu The version number of each module and application software is listed on the right side of the menu The digit to the left of the period specifies the major version number of the hardware the digit to the right specifies the minor version number The major version number determines hardware and software compati bility The minor version number signifies hardware changes that do not affect hardware and software compatibility If you installed a module but not its corresponding software support you will see an error message in the version column This is not a select field it is for information purposes only The System Software field indicates the version number of the system software The Optional System Software field lists the optional system software support currently available on the hard disk 3 59 Reference Function key F5 VERIFY SOFTWARE verifies all installed software The Verify Software function ensures that all installed software files are not corrupted or missing Multimodule General Use Variable Width Modules 3 60 Multimodule involves operating two module
90. 1 and CSA C22 2 No 231 The terminal is listed by a nationally recognized testing laboratory NRTL and CSA Safety Certification Compliance Electromagnetic Compatibility EMC Emissions Radiated Conducted FCC Immunity Electrostatic Discharge ESD IEC 801 2 DAS System User Manual Safety Class Installation Category Il Pollution Degree 2 As per EC Council Directive 89 336 EEC EC92 and EN 50081 1 emissions EN50082 1 immunity Emissions shall be within the following limits Class A limits EN 55011 Class A limits EN 55011 Emissions are below FCC CFR Title 47 Part 15 SubpartB Class A specification limits for radiated and conducted emissions with test cables removed The system unit shall withstand discharge through a 330 Q series resistor of a 150 pF capacitor charged with up to 8 kV with no component failure or corruption of the system software 2 Appendix A Specifications Table A 1 DAS Mainframe Environmental and Safety Cont Characteristic Description Radio Frequency Electromagnetic Field The system unit shall withstand 3 volts meter electromagnetic field over the frequency range of 27 MHz to 500 MHz with no component failure or corruption of the system software IEC 801 3 Fast Transients Common The system unit shall withstand fast transients on AC power lines of 1 kV 5 50 ns at 5 kHz Mode IEC 801 4 and on signal and control lines of 0 5 kV 5 50 ns at 5 kHz with no com
91. 1 DAS XP Standard Accessories Accessory Part Number DAS System User Manual 1 070 8485 XX System Software Release Notes 1 DAS 9200 Programmatic Command Language User Manual 070 5960 XX DAS 9200 P rogrammatic Command Language Reference 070 5958 XX Guide Acquisition amp Pattern Generation Files User Manual 1 070 7483 XX Binder 016 0855 XX Backup System S oftware Backup Terminal S oftware Mainframe Power Cord Voltage range and plug type varies 1 Refer to according to country Table F 7 on page F 24 Terminal Power Cord Voltage range amp plug type varies Refer to according to country Table F 7 on page F 24 Passive Probe used as Sync Out cable SMB to BNC P6041 Circuit board ejectors 2 105 0985 XX RS 232 cable mainframe to terminal connection 1 012 1445 XX Terminator coaxial BNC 2 011 0168 XX Cable Interconnect 50 O coaxial 10 ft 3 05 m 012 0205 XX Adapter connector BNC T 103 0030 XX Terminal with keyboard 1 B 1 Appendix B Accessories Table B 2 lists the standard accessories for the DAS NT mainframe Table B 2 DAS NT Standard Accessories Accessory Quantity Part Number DAS System User Manual 070 8485 XX System Software Release Notes 070 5960 XX 070 5958 XX DAS 9200 P rogrammatic Command Language User Manual DAS 9200 Programmatic Command Language Reference Guide Acquisition amp Pattern Generation Files User Manual 070 7483 XX 92XTERM User Manual 070 8653 XX Binder 016 0855 XX
92. 2 Module A 4 mainframe A 3 A 5 Encapsulated PostScript 3 70 environmental specifications A 1 error messages B 1 B 12 file system check phase 1 D 11 phase 2 D 12 phase 3 D 13 phase 4 D 13 phase 5 D 14 Ethernet address 3 49 event See also Compound Event bus defined Glossary 8 filter defined Glossary 8 simple defined Glossary 14 expansion mainframe 1 5 2 1 card configurations F 8 F 10 connections 1 14 1 15 power requirements 1 8 1 9 site considerations 1 12 slot usage F 8 Expansion Slave board F 4 external clock defined Glossary 8 event signals connections 1 5 triggering 3 66 external event I O signals 3 11 pin locations 3 12 F fault isolation F 19 F 23 incorrect data F 21 no data F 21 printing problems F 22 F 24 terminal F 20 field color conventions 2 15 cursor defined Glossary 8 defined Glossary 8 fill in field 2 15 note defined Glossary 8 select field 2 14 File Functions overlay 3 43 3 44 edit status field 3 44 file name field 3 44 function field 3 44 Index 3 Index function keys 3 44 file system check and repair D 9 D 14 creating D 9 D 14 install See Install utility rebuilding See Install utility File System Check D 10 bypassing 3 57 phase 1 error messages D 11 phase 2 error messages D 12 phase 3 error messages D 13 phase 4 e
93. 206XT terminals It also provides additional software to service the terminal D 21 Appendix D Loading System Software Application Software Application software disks contain special purpose software that provides additional capability not present in the Base System Software or optional system software Application software available as separate products includes microprocessor support and performance analysis packages You can install or remove application software using the Disk Services menu However for convenience you can install or remove the application software using the Install utility when you install the Base System Software or optional system software D 22 DAS System User Manual a a id Appendix E Configuration Utility Use the Configuration utility to check or set the various parameters for operating the system In most cases you will use this tool to check or set the network addresses used to enable communications between the instrument and the host or color terminal Use the utility to set the operating mode and to save restore or delete system software images You can also use the utility to check the results of the power on diagnostics The utility loads onto the hard disk when you initially install the system software To start the utility power on the instrument with DIP switch 1 in the down position and type config at the BOOT gt prompt User Interface The Configuration utility is mainly inten
94. 6 Module However when using more than two 92A16s in a single module the additional cards must be 92A16Es m The Master card in a module must be a 92A16 not a 92A16E a 92A16E cannot operate without a 92A16 m Only one 92A16 can be used as an Expander card all other expanders must be 92A16Es m Due to power supply limitations you cannot use more than four 92A16 cards in a single mainframe regardless of whether or not you are using them in a single module m You can have a maximum of 384 channels in a system with 92A16 Modules four mainframes each with six card modules DAS System User Manual Appendix F User Service DAS System User Manual m When using a 92A16 Module with other modules except for the 92A96 for example 92816 32 92A60 90 92HS8 E the 92A16 Module should be placed in the lower numbered slots of a mainframe m Due to cooling considerations you should not place a 92A16 in slot 8 of any mainframe 92A60 90 Data Acquisition Modules The 92460 90 Data Acquisition Modules are composed of two boards per module a Controller board and a Memory board The Controller board has three Buffer Probe connections and an SMB connector for the P6041 Sync Out Probe The Controller board and Memory board must be placed in adjacent slots with the Controller board in the higher numbered slot Other 92A60 90 configuration guidelines are listed below For more specific information on the 92A60 90 Modules refer to the 92
95. 63 Hz The maximum continuous current that each Master or Expansion mainframe can draw is 15 A the one cycle surge current is 25 A nominal Total line current for a mainframe with three Expansion mainframes can be up to 60 A 115 V line selection 40A 230 V For a system using the maximum of four mainframes the power source must be capable of supplying the maximum amount of line current When the system is connected to a 230 V power source the 230 V power cord must be used The DAS is specified to draw no more than 10 A when set for 230 V operation When the DAS is connected to a three phase power source the mainframe is specified to draw no more than 8 A on any phase the three phase power cord is permanently attached to the power supply If it becomes necessary to upgrade your power supply contact your nearest Tektronix field service center DAS System User Manual Getting Started DAS System User Manual Table 1 1 Power for Master Mainframes Watts Voltage Option Source 400 W 105V 127V Std 115 V 12A 500 W 105 v 127 V Opt 1A 115 V 15A 515W 200 V 250V Opt A1 Opt A5 230 V 10A 700 W 2 200 V 250 V Opt 1B 120 208 V 8 A phase to phase three phase 3 Operation at a low line of 90 V is possible if the card cage load is reduced to 425 W or less The 3 phase 700 W power supply option 1B was discontinued effective SN B061162 and above The three phase load is Y connected A maximum of 15 A at
96. A60 90 Data Acquisition Module User Manual m A maximum of three 92A60 90 Modules can be placed in a single main frame unless the mainframe is the last Expansion mainframe Four 92A60 90 Modules can be placed in the last Expansion mainframe m A maximum of six 92A60 90 Modules can be placed in a system 360 channels for the 92A60 and 540 channels for the 92A90 m Multiple 92A60 90 Modules cannot be combined to create a single module with greater channel width 92A96 and 92C96 Data Acquisition Modules The 92A96 and 92C96 Data Acquisition Modules can operate in modules by themselves or together as a single module To provide proper air flow around the 92A96 Module in high ambient temperature conditions you should place the module in the lower numbered slots Some of the basic guidelines are listed below All restrictions for the 92A96 Module apply to the 92C96 Module For further information refer to the 92496 amp 92C96 Data Acquisition Module User Manual W You can have a maximum of 1536 channels in a system with 92A96 Modules four mainframes each with four 92A96 cards m Due to cooling considerations you should not place a 92A96 in slot 8 of any mainframe m Due to power supply limitations you cannot have more than four 92A96 cards in a single mainframe m When using a 92A96 Module with other modules the 92A96 Module should be placed in the lower numbered slots of a mainframe m 92A96 and 92C96 Modules are fully compatib
97. AIL XXXX or the power up diagnostics detect a problem with a module The XXXX is a hexadecimal value that corresponds to a specific problem Sometimes reseating the module cures the problem Fan Failure The last system shutdown occurred as a result of either a mainframe fan failure a power supply fan failure or an over temperature condition The disk file system is not corrupted Field accepts alphanumerics or only The only valid entries in this field are alphabetic characters numerals plus minus and period Field maximum exceeded field set to maximum legal value Entry is larger than maximum allowable value for this field the field is set to maximum value DAS System User Manual Appendix C Error Messages Table C 1 Error Messages Cont Error Message Field requires at least one valid character File already exists Fill in value press Close to accept value Esc to cancel operation Explanation Enter an alphanumeric value in this field You must use a unique name for the file you are trying to add Use the keyboard to type in a value once you ve completed your entry press the Open Close key to verify your choice Formatting graph please wait The system is processing data to create the graph display Formatting the display please stand by The system is processing data to create the display Formatting timing please stand by The system is processing
98. AN local area network using the Programmatic Command Language The 92LANP product comes with manuals and software You can also use PCL with your DAS over the General Purpose Interface Bus GPIB if you have an optional 92C02 GPIB Expansion Module installed in your mainframe You can use several different GPIB communications software packages For detailed information on the Programmatic Command Language refer to the DAS 9200 Programmatic Command Language User Manual Although PCL comes standard with the instrument and can be used with RS 232 it is recommended that you use PCL with the 92LANP product or over GPIB Discrete I O Port The 92PORT product allows you to monitor and send signals to a system under test using the 37 pin D connector on the rear of the mainframe DAS System User Manual SSS C ud Functional Overview This chapter provides brief introductory information on the Digital Analysis System It provides a brief description of the product an overview of its menus and includes a tutorial for first time users The Digital Analysis System uses a common mainframe for the DAS NT and DAS XP systems the main difference is that the DAS NT system is the networked version of the DAS XP system The DAS NT system comes standard with network software while the DAS XP system is available as a stand alone system with a color terminal You can tell the difference between the two system
99. AS System User Manual Getting Started DAS System User Manual The 92A96 Module is currently available in the following versions m The 92A96D Module with a 32 K memory depth m The 92A96XD with a 128 K memory depth m The 92A96SD with a 512 K memory depth m The 92A96UD with a 2 M memory depth In addition to stand alone operation the 92A96 Module can be time correlated with the 92A16 92A60 90 or other 92A96 Modules to provide multiple time base capabilities 92HS8 E High Speed Acquisition Modules The 92HS8 Module allows designers of high speed digital systems clocks of 100 MHz and faster to use digital analysis techniques to locate timing problems where signal differences are as little as 1 ns Eight channels each with glitch detection can acquire data using an internal clock Both data and glitch information can be stored and can also be used as a trigger source The internal time base provides sampling intervals from 5 ms to 500 ps memory depth is 8k words per channel A specialized form of external clocking synchronous acquisition called External Asynchronous clocking is available The 92HS8 Module channels can be expanded to a maximum of 32 channels by adding a 92HS8E cabinet and two 92HS8C cabinets 92916 32 Pattern Generation Modules These modules provide pattern generation capabilities that can be used as a stand alone stimulation source or can be linked with data acquisition to provide a test system for debugging and
100. Base or Base Added In mode This selection controls whether the upper and lower bound values are displayed with the base address added in true address location or relative to the base relative address In Relative to Base mode the lower and upper bound values are displayed as offsets from the table base as if the base were 0 m Lower and Upper Bounds This area of the menu lets you enter the lower and upper bound values that correspond to the symbol name The upper bound must always be greater than or equal to the lower bound DAS System User Manual Reference File Functions Overlay You can use the File Functions overlay see Figure 3 20 to create new symbol tables open existing symbol tables for editing sort symbols within a file rename an output file and merge two symbol tables together Use the Delete File utility Disk Services menu to remove unwanted symbol tables To create a new symbol table follow these instructions 1 2 3 4 Select Open File in the Function field Select New File in the Edit Status field Enter a unique file name in the New File Name field Select either Pattern or Range in the Table Type field Range symbol tables let you assign a single symbol name to a range of data values these symbol tables display both upper and lower bound data value fields for each symbol name Pattern symbol tables display only a single data value field for each symbol name You cannot mix range and pattern
101. CT PAGE SCROLL ee La gt gt Figure 2 9 On Screen Buttons DAS System User Manual Operating Basics DAS System User Manual Table 2 2 On Screen Menu Buttons On screen Button Button Name J oydisk NEXT Select Next PREV Select Previous Page Up DOWN Page Down Description Use this button to scroll through acquired data Point to one of the arrows on the J oydisk to scroll data in the direction of the arrow Use this button to cycle through items ina Select field Pointing at this button displays the next item in the list Use this button to cycle through items ina Select field Pointing at this button displays the previous item in the list Scrolls up one half a window of data Scrolls down one half a window of data Shift Scroll Left U p Scroll Left Up Scroll Right Down Scrolls to the left one half a window ata time in Timing or Graph menus and up one half a window ata time in State or Disassembly menus Scrolls to the left in Timing or Graph menus and up in State or Disassembly menus Scrolls to the rightin Timing or Graph menus and down in State or Disassembly menus Shift Scroll Right Down PRINT Print NOTES Notes Menu ag EEE SWC a BC 3 Scrolls to the right one half a window ata time in Timing menus and down one half a window ata time in State or Disassembly menus Calls the Print overlay allowing you to print the data in a Display or Setup menu to
102. Caution statements identify conditions or practices that could result in damage to this product or other property These terms may appear on the product DANGER indicates an injury hazard immediately accessible as you read the marking WARNING indicates an injury hazard not immediately accessible as you read the marking CAUTION indicates a hazard to property including the product The following symbols may appear on the product 4 A m DANGER Protective Ground ATTENTION Double High Voltage Earth Terminal Refer to Insulated Manual DAS System User Manual General Safety Summary Certifications and Compliances CSA Certified Power CSA Certification includes the products and power cords appropriate for use in Cords the North America power network All other power cords supplied are approved for the country of use Compliances Consult the product specifications for IEC Installation Category Pollution Degree and Safety Class DAS System User Manual xiii General Safety Summary xiv DAS System User Manual Preface The DAS System User Manual is the main reference manual for the Digital Analysis System DAS It includes an overview of the system basic installation information a tutorial for new users and reference information for system level menus The manual is part of the Digital Analysis System DAS documentation set In addition to the DAS System User Manual you should consult the following docum
103. DAS System User Manual Appendix A Specifications Table A 4 Standard Electrical Interfaces Cont Characteristic Auxiliary Ethernet LAN Interface Description 38400 19200 9600 default 4800 2400 1200 600 300 110 The interface conforms to the ANSI IEEE 802 3 3rd Edition 1992 also known as ISO IEC 8802 3 1992 exceptthat Control O ut functionality is not supported Referto the standard for details about this interface Table A 5 Discrete I O Signals Characteristic Description Output Signals SO 1 8 Outputs can be momentary or level Signal pins 2 9 with respective ground pins 21 28 Drive typical Driven from standard 74ALS 996 with 10 O series resistors and protection diodes Negative going pulse width typical Recommended maximum load typical Read Strobe pin 10 Write Strobe pin 1 Drive typical Negative going pulse width typical Read Strobe 2 ms or greater under momentary operation 1 standard STTL load with up to 250 pF capacitance for edge integrity With respective ground pin 29 With respective ground pin 30 Driven from standard 74F 14 With active positive edge 225 ns Write Strobe 150 ns Recommended maximum load typical 5 V pin 19 Ground pins 20 37 1 standard STTL load with up to 60 pF capacitance for edge integrity Fused at0 75 A Fused at1 5A Input Signals S1 1 8 Load typical DAS System User Manual Inputs are level only
104. DAS System User Manual CHANGE SWAP SIZE MENU Current Active Options Swap Size 6 Meg Recommended Selections Available a Make change b Swap Size 6 Meg Recommended C Swap Size 8 Meg d Go to Main Menu Enter choice default d The four selections in the Change Swap Size menu let you initiate the change for the swap size for the hard disk change the swap size option to 6 megabytes change the swap size option to 8 megabytes or return to the main menu To make a selection enter the letter preceding the selection description If you press Return only the default action inside the square brackets will be selected If you select options b or c the swap space size option will change accordingly Although selecting these options will not change the hard disk the option that you select will be used when you select Make Change in this menu or when you select Initiate Format in the Format Setup menu If you select option a the SCSI hard disk swap space size will change The current active swap size option will be used The following warning message will be displayed WARNING About to change swap space size for hard disk This will destroy any data currently stored on Swap size 6 Meg Recommended Are you sure you want to continue y n default n CAUTION Reformatting the hard disk or running the file system Make utility destroys all files on the hard disk Use one of the methods described o
105. Default Boot Parameters Parameter Default Value Parameter Default Value IADDR 10 0 0 2 DNODE 0 0 IHOST 10 0 0 1 BMETHOD ROM IMASK 255 0 0 0 BDISPLAY DISABLED IGATE 0 0 0 0 BAFROM NVRAM BPATH XP 300 os Use XP300 os for 9204XT 9205XT or 9206XT terminals and XP10 os for the 9202XT and 9203XT terminals 1 Resetthe terminal by simultaneously pressing the Control Alt and Delete keys 2 When the Boot Monitor displays on the screen press the Space Bar to stop the boot process This is necessary to prevent the terminal from booting before the parameters are set 3 Enter the terminal s Internet parameters from the table for example IADDR 10 0 0 2 4 Enter the Internet address for the DAS from the table for example IHOST 10 0 0 1 5 Enter the Network Subnet Mask from the table for example IMASK 255 0 0 0 DAS System User Manual Appendix F User Service Incorrect Data Acquired No Data Acquired DAS System User Manual Enter the Gateway Internet address from the table for example IGATE 0 0 0 0 Enter the boot path name for the boot file from the table for example if you have a 9204XT 9205XT or 9206XT terminal enter BPATH XP300 os If you have a 9202XT or 9203XT terminal enter BPATH XP10 os Enter the boot method parameter that the terminal will use after the Flash ROM update is complete by typing BMETHOD ROM Save the entries in the terminal s nonvolatile ROM by typing NVSAVE
106. E CONFIG reconfigures the system as shown in the upper right corner of the menu and returns to this menu Selecting this key has no effect if the configuration has not been changed Creating Clusters A cluster is a user defined group of modules usually including more than one module type intended to handle a specific application Clusters are started and stopped as a unit This lets you tightly link modules of different types for more efficient interaction Clustered modules allow the following interactions m Time correlation m Interactive triggering between acquisition modules W Acquisition pattern generation After you select a module formation for each module you can combine modules of different types into clusters Only clustered modules can be time correlated or pass signals described later in this section Figure 3 2 offers a visual representation of the entire multimodule operation DAS System User Manual 3 3 Reference HARDWARE Modules Installed In Mainframe Select Module Formation 1 Module formations established at DAS 9200 power up Maintrame 2 Select desired formation s in System Configuration menu SOFTWARE Create Cluster Monitor C luster View status of all modules in cluster in Cluster Monitor menu 1 Create cluster in Cluster Definition overlay Start Cluster View contents of all clusters in Cluster Setup menu Clusters groups of modules of different types ar
107. File System Check Error Messages D 14 System Software vs Operating Modes E 6 Card Placement Guidelines Master Mainframe F 8 Card Placement Guidelines Expansion Mainframe F 8 System Unit Fuse Replacement F 18 Terminal Default Boot Parameters F 20 DAS XP System Options eere F 23 DAS NT System Options eere F 24 Power Cord Identification F 24 Screen Colors vs Switch Word G 8 Valid Color Characters for DASdisk G 9 Examples of DASdisk Commands G 10 Table of Contents X DAS System User Manual fcm General Safety Summary Injury Precautions Use Proper Power Cord Ground the Product Do Not Operate Without Covers Use Proper Fuse Do Not Operate in Wet Damp Conditions Do Not Operate in Explosive Atmosphere Avoid Exposed Circuitry Review the following safety precautions to avoid injury and prevent damage to this product or any products connected to it Only qualified personnel should perform service procedures To avoid fire hazard use only the power cord specified for this product This product is grounded through the grounding conductor of the power cord To avoid electric shock the grounding conductor must be connected to earth ground Before making connections to the input
108. Mainframe Top Cover 4 Unfasten the two fasteners top right and bottom right that hold the card cage door to the card cage remove the door refer to Figure F 4 F 12 DAS System User Manual Appendix F User Service EET TATOO TOMT TATA ITAA YT UHI Ejector Tools Fastener lt Fastener Card C age Door Figure F 4 Locations of Card Cage Door and Fasteners A Installing a Module A DAS System User Manual CAUTION Always replace the top cover before powering on the mainframe When operated without the top cover air is not evenly distributed through the mainframe and overheating can occur Some modules contain several large and complex electronic components To avoid damaging these components you should observe the following guidelines when installing the modules Although the following procedures can be used to install most modules in the mainframes some modules such as the 92A96 92A60 90 and 92HS8 require a few extra steps For more information refer to the individual module user manual CAUTION Some modules contain several large components To avoid damaging these components install the 92A96 and 92 C96 modules after you have installed any other modules in the mainframe m If your mainframe configuration consists of modules other than 92A96 or 92C96 Modules install those modules before installing
109. Message A Seq Flow instruction cannot be pro grammed at n Active clocks cannot be used as qualifiers ADD key is only valid in a sequence line Key ignored ADD key is only valid in the conversion table Key ignored Explanation A sequence flow instruction cannot be placed on the first sequence of an IRQ routine A 92A96 clock channel cannot be used both as a clock edge and as a qualifier through the entire clock equation Move the cursor to the sequence line area and selectthe function key again Move the cursor to the conversion table area and select the function key again All added clock lines are deleted You cannot delete the only line in a clock equation All clock lines are being used You cannot assign any more clock lines All groups have been deleted You cannot delete a group there are no groups left to delete Asterisks are not allowed in label fields Entries in label fields cannot contain asterisks Enter a label name using alphanumeric characters Binary input radix use 0 1 or X Input radix is binary enter a value using 0 1 or X Building the display please stand by Data is being processed to create the display Can t add maximum number of Library Items already defined Can t delete Tek defined Library Items Can t delete the only remaining Action in a Clause Can t delete the only remaining Action in a Macro Can t delete the only remain
110. Monitor menu 2 8 printing 3 72 3 74 Program menu 2 8 Save Restore menu 2 10 3 21 3 30 Setup menus 2 5 State Display menu 2 9 Symbol Editor menu 2 10 3 38 3 45 System Configuration menu 2 6 3 1 3 6 DAS System User Manual System Monitor menu 2 6 3 20 3 21 Timing Display menu 2 9 Trigger menu 2 8 Utility menus 2 10 Version menu 2 10 3 59 3 60 Workspace 2 4 3 73 Menu Selection overlay 2 11 2 19 defined Glossary 10 microprocessor support defined Glossary 10 mnemonic disassembly defined Glossary 10 module compatibility F 3 configuration guidelines F 4 configurations 1 19 1 23 F 3 F 10 creating clusters 3 3 defined Glossary 10 defining clusters 3 4 formation defined Glossary 10 formation number 3 2 formations 3 1 installation F 11 F 18 multiple module general use 3 60 3 67 power requirements 1 10 1 11 removal F 16 removing F 11 F 18 selecting module formations 3 61 setup menus 2 6 2 10 starting modules or clusters 3 6 variable width modules 3 60 Monitor menu 2 8 mouse buttons 2 11 multiple modules general use 3 60 3 67 N network files 3 50 name E 6 printer 3 50 notes 2 20 2 21 field notes 2 20 key notes 2 20 Notes System defined Glossary 11 O on line help See notes operating mode 9202XT mode E 6 92XTerm Autos
111. NLUS MA Bags Shs RS S F 3 Module Configurations 0 cece en F 3 Compatibility of Modules 0 0 eee cee ee eee F 3 Conh stration o6 vets basses sees ee MET CURE RIA s F 4 iv DAS System User Manual Table of Contents Glossary Index DAS System User Manual Module Installation and Removal Tools Required Removing the Top Cover and Card Cage Door Installing a Module Removing a Module Installing the GPIB Connector Installing Remote On Off Options Replacing the Line Fuse Power On Diagnostics Mainframe Diagnostics Terminal Diagnostics Fault Isolation 00 Color Terminal Problems Incorrect Data Acquired No Data Acquired No Data from Pattern Generator No Data Printed To Printer Connected to Auxiliary Port No Data Sent to a Network File No Data Printed to Network Printer 0 0 0 0c cc cc eee eee eee Instrument Options Power Cords 24 Appendix G DASdisk Utility eeeeeeeeeee PC System Requirements Installing DASdisk Using DASdisk 0 Fil Sets ses RUEDAS Change Operation Init Operation List Operation Dir Operation Unpack Operation
112. Press i to install Base System Software Optional System Software or Application Software Press r to remove Optional System Software or Application Software Press v to verify currently installed software Selection 5 Type v to start the software verification procedure Each Base System Software optional system software and application software disk has a separate checksum list corresponding to the name of the floppy disk containing the files Each list contains the name and the expected checksum value for each file on the associated disk The verification program displays the name of each checksum list as it verifies the checksums for the files This process takes several minutes to complete If any files in a checksum list do not exist or do not match the expected checksum an error message displays the name of the disk and the faulty file After the checksums for all disks have been tested one of two messages will be printed If no failures are found the program displays Verify Procedure Complete NO ERRORS However if one or more failures occur the program displays Verify Procedure Complete ERRORS OCCURRED In this case identify the disks where the errors occurred reinstall the disks and repeat the verify procedure Optional System Software D 20 Optional system software disks contain parts of the system software which are not required for all operations This software is optional so that you can free
113. ROM DAS System User Manual Appendix E Configuration Utility DAS System User Manual 11 Save the entries in the terminal s nonvolatile memory by typing NVSAVE 12 Enter the BOOT command to use for the Flash ROM update process by typing BOOT TFTP NOTE Do not continue with the following steps until the terminal has rebooted The boot process is complete when the Serial window appears the word Connected is displayed in the window 13 After the Serial window appears press the Return key Disregard the following messages that appear on the screen and continue to step 14 Answering NO to this question will return you to STEP 1 Terminate the Flash procedure and return to the DAS boot prompt Yes No 14 Press the Return key until the following text appears Are you ready to continue to STEP 2 15 Enter y in response to the prompt The text for Step 2 will appear on the screen When you start the Flash Update process the X terminal will write the parameters to the Flash ROM The process will take approximately 10 minutes When the terminal boots the Flash ROM monitor displays the following message FLASH UPDATE IN PROGRESS If the message does not appear the Flash Update process failed Follow the suggestions displayed on the screen to identify any problems 16 When you are ready to start the Flash Update process enter y in response to the prompt on the screen Verify that the Flash Update in Progres
114. Return key You can also enter the line number and press the Return key For example to view the diagnostic results enter a 1 or c and press the Return key Values of previously defined parameters will appear in the menu Undefined parameters will be blank Display Hardware C onfiguration and Diagnostic Results S ave image of current system software Available 9202XT R estore saved image of system software Available None D elete saved image of system software Show Fac t ory Default Network Configuration Set O perating Mode Current 9202XT Set DAS Network N ame Current dasl Set DAS Internet A ddress Current 123 123 125 2 Set Network Subnet M ask Current 255 255 255 0 Set G ateway Internet Address Current 123 123 125 14 Set De f ault X server Name Current eldar 0 0 Set Default X server Internet Address Current 123 21 1 0 Set L ANPCL Port Number Current 10999 Set GPIB P ort Number Current 2 Save changes and E xit to BOOT prompt U pdate 9202XT Flash ROM and Exit to BOOT prompt Discard changes and Q uit to BOOT prompt H elp Please make a selection Figure E 1 Configuration Utility Main Menu Display Hardware Configuration and Diagnostic Results E 2 The Configuration utility allows you to check the results of the power on diagnostics for each module installed in the instrument It also lets you view the contents of each slot and the configurations of the modules
115. T to place the line in a new location Edit mode F8 ADD This key adds a new blank symbol below the cursor The following function keys apply when in the Search mode F6 DEFINE SEARCH This key displays the Search Definition overlay You can then specify search parameters by value or by symbol name The Search Definition overlay is discussed later in this section F7 SEARCH BACKWARD This key searches the symbol table from the symbol preceding the cursor location back to the beginning of the file F8 SEARCH FORWARD This key searches the symbol table from the symbol following the cursor location to the end of the file Figure 3 19 shows a range type symbol table 3 41 Reference 3 42 F2 r3 F F FILE PUT DELETE FUNCTIONS i 7 I n n E Lit Palit HOTRR ie Dm ua i t S iad Era Gar Figure 3 19 Symbol Editor Menu Range Symbol Table Displayed The range symbol table menu is similar to the pattern symbol table with the addition of the following fields m Base field This field specifies a base address it lets you specify the base address that will be added to all symbolic addresses Compilers and assemblers typically produce symbol tables with the assumption that the program will be loaded starting at location zero If the program is actually moved to a different location for example 1000 then all symbols would be off by this amount m Mode field This field specifies the Relative to
116. TE apa GROUPING TERESH LD CHANNELS ars LLLI Eug pe xS EO ES Ded ah ems Dar l 8 E M M BM BM BM D Figure 2 11 Channel Menu After you have defined your channel setup you should set up your clocking requirements 23 24 25 Point the mouse at the button labeled CLOCK at the bottom of the menu and press the left button the Clock menu displays The menu should look similar to Figure 2 12 Point the mouse at the Clock field and press the right button A pop up window appears You have basically three clocking choices Internal External and Custom Custom clocking is used with the microprocessor support packages and provides additional clocking choices for the particular package If you have not selected one of the software support packages the Custom selection field is grayed out indicating that it is nonselectable Internal clocking allows you to use asynchronous clocking you can select the clock period in the clock rate field External clocking allows you to use synchronous clocking from the system under test You can further define your external clocking choices by setting up clock equations Select Internal Clocking and close the clocking selection 2 25 Operating Basics Set Up the Trigger Menu 2 26 PIA Emm Ei 5 5 E I E E E BM Figure 2 12 Clock Menu The Trigger menu is probably the most important menu when setting up the system to acquire data You can use the Trigger
117. User Manual Tektronix Digital Analysis System 070 8485 09 This document supports software release 3 version 1 60 and above ce Copyright Tektronix Inc All rights reserved Licensed software products are owned by Tektronix or its suppliers and are protected by United States copyright laws and international treaty provisions Use duplication or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph c 1 ii of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at DFARS 252 227 7013 or subparagraphs c 1 and 2 of the Commercial Computer Software Restricted Rights clause at FAR 52 227 19 as applicable Tektronix products are covered by U S and foreign patents issued and pending Information in this publication supercedes that in all previously published material Specifications and price change privileges reserved Printed in the U S A Tektronix Inc P O Box 1000 Wilsonville OR 97070 1000 TEKTRONIX and TEK are registered trademarks of Tektronix Inc DASNT and DASXP are trademarks of Tektronix Inc WARRANTY Tektronix warrants that this product will be free from defects in materials and workmanship for a period of one 1 year from the date of shipment If any such product proves defective during this warranty period Tektronix at its option either will repair the defective product without charge for parts and labor or will provide a replacement in exchange for the de
118. While still in the Timing menu select function key F2 SPLIT DISPLAY A new overlay appears giving you the choice of how to split the data 2 Verify that Timing is highlighted for the Window 1 data and State is highlighted for the Window 2 data Change the selections if they are different 3 Select function key F6 SPLIT VERT you have the choice of splitting the screens horizontally or vertically Some new information and new function keys appear letting you define the ratio of the window widths You can use function keys F3 or F4 to change the ratio You can also lock the cursors to track between the two windows 4 Select function key F2 LOCK CURSORS to lock the cursors together locking the cursors allows the cursors in each window to track each other over the same data sequence 2 31 Operating Basics Conclusion 2 32 5 A pop up window appears Verify that the selection lock cursors at the same sequence is highlighted and press the right button The pop up window closes and the cursors are locked together 6 Select function key F8 EXIT amp SAVE The overlay closes and the split screen menu appears The menu should look similar to Figure 2 16 STAD Display Timing adasi Display State trol 8t Central iil Fa F4 F5 FE E FB E Hu HARE DEFINE DEFINE s H SEARDH Lib us DATA FORMAT SEARCH BACXWARD F RWARD LE Pace near Ln I peas ELEME Le Lee Palit I SIT mu l 3 8 M E BH M E D ee war
119. With the mouse point at the NEXT or PREV buttons at the bottom of the window and press the left button to cycle through the list of choices You can also use the plus or minus keys on the terminal keypad to cycle through the list of choices Type in a string of characters that match one of the selections the character string that you enter is not case sensitive Type in the first few characters of the string until the selection appears Press the right mouse button or the Return key to finalize the selection Try each of the three methods by changing the information in the Set Date Time overlay as follows 3 Point the mouse at the field to the right of the word Date and press the right button A pop up menu appears on the right side of the window with the current selection highlighted Point the mouse at the selection you want If your selection is outside of the numbers displayed in the pop menu you can scroll to the correct selection Note the small arrows near the top or bottom of the pop up menu These arrows show that there are more selections outside of the range of selections displayed in the pop up menu You can scroll through the numbers near the top of the pop up menu by pointing the mouse just outside and towards the top of the pop up menu and pressing the left mouse button Alternately you can scroll through the numbers near the bottom of the pop up menu by pointing the mouse just outside and to the bottom of t
120. a No valid signal available in current context Octal input radix use 0 7 or X Only one Signal can be asserted or unas serted Partial Install Unable to locate all custom clock files Perform match choice press Close to accept value Esc to cancel operation The system does not contain optional software required for the module listed with this error The last system shutdown occurred as a result of pushing the front panel power Switch to the OFF position This is the correct way to power off the logic analyzer All open files and inter process communication channels will be closed The maximum number of clusters or modules are running The width ofthe conversion destination must be equal to or greater than the source width Search operation failed The module was started butthe current acquisition was in valid This condition can occur after you reconfigure the module No valid data has been acquired The module never started The requested Signal Action pulse assert or unassert cannot be accepted because of conflicts with other existing Signal Actions Input radix for this field is octal enter value using 0 7 or X Only one of the possible output signals can be asserted or unasserted All others can only be pulsed One or more but not all of the custom clock files are missing from custom clocking application Verify you have properly installed all of the application files Type in the selection unti
121. ackplane board 1 3 Bad Block List Display D 8 bad blocks D 8 baud rates 1 4 1 17 3 45 3 46 board ejector tool F 11 Boot Option Overlay 3 57 C card defined Glossary 5 card field 3 14 card installation module configurations F 4 Change Swap Size Menu D 6 Channel menu 2 7 2 8 channel width varying 3 60 checking the file system D 10 clause defined Glossary 5 cleaning exterior F 2 Index 1 Index clock cycle defined Glossary 5 equation defined Glossary 6 external defined Glossary 8 internal defined Glossary 9 qualification defined Glossary 6 qualifier defined Glossary 6 setting 3 56 Clock menu 2 7 clock latch correlation 3 16 cluster communication within 3 6 creating clusters 3 3 defined Glossary 6 starting modules or clusters 3 6 Cluster Definition overlay 3 4 function keys 3 5 3 6 cluster name 3 6 Cluster Setup menu 2 6 3 6 3 20 default parameters 3 8 function keys 3 8 input signals 3 7 module correlation field 3 7 output signals 3 7 Run Mode field 3 7 Start Mode field 3 8 Stop Mode field 3 8 clusters defining a signal event 3 8 color conventions 2 15 communication parameters LAN overlay 3 48 3 49 Communications menu 2 10 3 45 3 54 auxiliary port flow control field 3 46 baud rate fields 3 46 file type field 3 54 function keys
122. akes about two minutes The Available field at the right of the Restore entry in the Main menu shows the type of system software that is currently saved and available to restore if any The value None signifies that there are no saved images present on the hard disk You will be prompted to verify your actions before the restore operation occurs If the restore operation cannot be carried out you will be returned to the Main menu Delete Saved Image of Selecting item D deletes saved images of the system software that you no longer System Software need The Available field at the right of the Restore entry in the Main menu shows which saved images are present on the hard disk Each image occupies approximately 14 Mbytes of hard disk space You will be prompted to verify your actions before the delete operation occurs If the delete operation cannot be carried out you will be returned to the Main menu Show Factory Default Selecting item T lets you see or change the factory default network configuration Network Configuration in a single step The proper network settings guarantee the proper configuration for stand alone operation when no other network devices are attached to the network cable that connects the instrument and the terminal A menu similar to Figure E 3 will be displayed Items in the Current column are the current settings shown in the Main menu Items listed in the Factory column show the settings that allow the instrument to o
123. al Host and Auxiliary Port Baud Rate Selections on page 1 17 For information on the mainframe RS 232 pin outs refer to Host Computer or Serial Printer Connections on page 1 16 For more information on installing the networked operation refer to the 92XTerm User Manual Stand Alone Operation For stand alone operation DAS XP the X terminal connects to the logic analyzer mainframe with an RS 232 serial cable provided as a standard accessory and a Thinnet cable Refer to the terminal installation manual that came with your terminal while performing the following steps DAS System User Manual Getting Started DAS System User Manual 1 Connect the RS 232 serial cable from Terminal Port 0 to the Terminal port on the rear panel of the mainframe 2 Connect a BNC T connector to the Thin Ethernet BNC connector on the logic module of the terminal Connect a second BNC T connector to the BNC connector on the back of the mainframe 3 Connect a 50 O terminator to one side of the BNC T connector on the logic module and another terminator to the BNC T connector on the mainframe 4 Connect the 50 O BNC cable from the unused side of the BNC T connector on the logic module to the unused side of the BNC T connector on the mainframe Connect the keyboard and the mouse to the logic module Connect the monitor cable from the monitor to the logic module Connect the power cord or power supply to the logic module Connect the powe
124. an be restored to a DAS mainframe with two or more 92C96 Data Acquisition Modules Trace Mode A feature of the 92S16 32 Pattern Generation Module s Monitor menu that causes the pattern generator to run at a clock rate slow enough to allow you to spot developing trends and to detect program flow changes due to test and branch instructions Trigger An event or condition that leads to the end of the acquisition cycle When started a logic analyzer continuously acquires data from a system under test until the trigger occurs After triggering the logic analyzer continues to load data until the post fill requirement is met See Pre fill and Post fill Trigger Event The last or only event in the sequence of events that causes a data acquisition module to trigger Trigger Position Where the trigger resides in acquisition memory Electing to place the trigger in the center of memory means that half of the acquisition consists of data that occurred after the trigger Trigger Specification Program The highest level of triggering control A trigger specification program is composed of one or more States Unassert To cause a signal or line to change from its logic true state to its logic false state Utility Menu A general class of menus that serve as system level tools These menus are accessible from anywhere in the menu structure The list of available utilities remains constant regardless of installed module s Word Recognition The
125. and your remote display workstation is named huey you would execute the following command rsh dasl doprint X huey 0 Aborting Screen Captures To abort a screen capture before the data is sent to the print spooler you can send on a Networked System the following command from a networked system rsh DAS name gt doprint k where lt DAS name gt is the name of the DAS system Deleting Print Jobs You can delete a print job using the Workspace menu selections as shown in Figure 3 33 To delete all print jobs sent to the local RS 232C Auxiliary port select Print Screen Delete Print Jobs Local Aux Port Jobs Use the other selections to delete screen print or menu print jobs sent to a remote network printer 74 Workspace Local Clients Tek LA 92 port d Print Screen Start Screen Capture Abort Screen Capture C Delete Print Jobs Local Aux Port Jobs Remote Print Screen Jobs Exit WM Remote Print Menu Jobs Exit Refresh Restart WM Reread Menu File Figure 3 33 Print Screen Tool of the Workspace Menu DAS System User Manual 3 73 Reference You can also delete print jobs from a networked workstation using the rsh Ilprm command For example to delete a print job from the local RS 232C Auxiliary port send the following command substituting the name of your system for DAS name gt rsh DAS name lprm To delete remote print screen jo
126. and by performing any other performance checks and adjustment procedures as described in the DAS 9200 Technician s Reference Manual and the Verification and Adjustment Procedures document Preventive maintenance mainly consists of periodic cleaning Periodic cleaning reduces instrument breakdown and increases reliability You should clean the mainframe and terminal as needed based on the operating environment Dirty conditions may require more frequent cleaning than computer room conditions Clean the exterior surfaces of the mainframe with a dry lint free cloth or a soft bristle brush If dirt remains use a cloth or swab dampened with a 75 isopropyl alcohol solution A swab is useful for cleaning in narrow spaces around the controls and connectors Do not use abrasive compounds on any part of the mainframe CAUTION Avoid getting moisture inside the mainframe during external cleaning and use only enough solution to dampen the cloth or swab Do not wash the front panel DC switch Cover the switch while washing the mainframe Use only deionized water when cleaning Use a 75 isopropyl alcohol solution as a cleanser and rinse with deionized water Do not use chemical cleaning agents they may damage the instrument Avoid chemicals that contain benzene toluene xylene acetone or similar solvents The floppy disk drive requires routine maintenance to operate at maximum efficiency The disks can be damaged if dirt and dust accumulat
127. and one 92HS8 cabinet or two 92HSS cabinets When the Master mainframe is to be connected to more than one Expansion mainframe all mainframes must be mounted in a rack The rack must provide sufficient air flow to keep the mainframes maximum operating temperature from exceeding 40 C 104 F Complete instructions for installing rackmount hardware are included in the Option 05 Rackmount Installation Instructions Terminal Site Considerations The color terminal is intended for use in normal or semi harsh environments The terminal will operate in a temperature environ ment between 4 10 C and 4 40 C 4 50 F and 4104 F The maximum heat dissipation is 613 BTUs per hour The terminal connections differ depending on whether your DAS will be used in a networked or stand alone operation Networked Operation For networked operation DAS NT a console RS 232 terminal is required for selected operations such as displaying error or status messages setting network parameters using the Configuration utility or installing software The terminal connects to the Terminal port on the mainframe Any RS 232 terminal with VT100 or ANSI compatibility or terminal emulation is acceptable The terminal should be capable of displaying 24 lines of 80 characters The terminal baud rate should be set to 38400 You should change the terminal baud rate to match that of the mainframe If necessary you can change the baud rate of the mainframe refer to Termin
128. anual 3 57 Reference 3 58 The overlay has two main fields the Diagnostics field and the File System Check field The default selection for both fields is Execute Each Power Up Both fields also have an Execute Custom selection where you can specify how often the DAS will run the diagnostics and file system checks When you select Execute Custom you can specify the number of days up to 14 to skip before executing the diagnostics or file system check You can also specify the number of power up cycles that the DAS can bypass up to five before executing the diagnostics or file system check The DAS will execute the diagnostics and file system check depending on which criteria is fulfilled first that is the number of days or the number of power up cycles The File System Check field has a third selection that allows the DAS to execute the file system check only after an abnormal system shut down Information under the BOOT ACTIVITY summarizes the most recent diagnos tics and file system check activity It indicates the last time that diagnostics were checked and the last time that the file system was checked Changes to the overlay take effect at the next power on cycle Use function key F4 DEFAULT CHECKS to return the Diagnostics field and the File System Check field to the default settings Execute Each Power Up DAS System User Manual Reference Version Menu DAS System User Manual The Version menu Figure 3 3
129. ary to duplicate the contents of a floppy disk format and verify floppy disks backup and restore user files with floppy disks and copy and delete specific files A directory of all existing file names on floppy or hard disks is provided accompanying information specifies the number of kilobytes the file occupies and the creation or revision date and time of the file Symbol Editor Menu This menu allows you to create and edit symbol tables that you can use to specify trigger word patterns and evaluate acquired data You can create and edit either range or pattern type symbol tables Communications Menu This menu specifies RS 232 port settings and view network settings You can specify baud rates and flow control for each RS 232 port Diagnostics Menu This menu provides a list of major system components a diagnostic report indicating operational status at power on a summary and brief description of the modules installed in the instrument the system software version date and time and some general user instructions Version Menu This menu displays the version numbers of all installed modules the current system software and all installed application software Application Menus Application menus control the operation of application software packages Most software supporting the application packages resides on floppy disks and must be loaded onto the system hard disk before being used Microprocessor Support packages provide mnemonic
130. ation The following warning message and prompt will be displayed IH IWARNING About to format hard disk This will destroy Swap size 6 Meg Recommended Are you sure you want to continue y n default n CAUTION Reformatting the hard disk or running the file system Make utility destroys all files on the hard disk Before running one of these utilities use one of the methods described on page D 2 to save the user files from the hard disk D 5 Appendix D Loading System Software Change Swap Size Menu At this point if you want to continue press y If you do not want to format your hard disk press n or press the Return key default is n do not continue After formatting the hard disk the utility verifies that all blocks on the hard disk can be read During the verification process a series of periods and plus characters are printed on the screen to show the progress of the disk verification If any errors are found the utility stops and displays the errors The bad block handling is done automatically by the SCSI formatting process After successfully formatting the hard disk the partitioning information will be written to the hard disk If you select options b or c in the Format Setup menu the swap space size option will be changed accordingly for more information on changing the swap space size refer to the discussion under Change Swap Size Menu Use the Change Swap Size menu to change
131. ation beginning on page 3 36 You can also copy files to and from 720 Kbyte floppy disks that have been previously formatted on a 720 Kbyte machine However you cannot copy the contents of a 720 Kbyte floppy disk to a 1 44 Mbyte floppy disk or vice versa Ptas Disk Gere Idie Fi F F5 Fa START CHOHGE IDENTIF EXECUTE MIC TTD CURSOR FLOPPY OPERATION FPEF Ar Se a EOS DD DO at emen Dar l 8 e 59 BM BM E D zer Figure 3 16 Disk Services Menu Copy File Operation The Disk Services menu has the following features and fields m Disk Free Space field This field displays the available storage space for the hard disk and floppy disk This information can be used to determine when it is necessary to create additional space on the hard disk To create additional space copy files to a floppy disk or to a host computer and then delete the files from the hard disk 3 33 Reference Delete File Operation Format Floppy Operation 3 34 Operation field This field specifies the operation to be performed on the files residing on floppy or hard disk The selection made here determines what fields appear in the display Source Disk and Destination Disk fields These fields specify the disk that contains the source file to be copied and the destination disk where the file will be stored The floppy disk cannot be selected as both the source and destination disks Source File Type Field This field specifies the file type to
132. be copied from the source disk The destination will always be the same file type Use the scroll keys to view all available files Source and Destination File Name fields These fields specify the source file and destination file for the Copy File operation The default destination file name will be the same as the source file name Disk Information These areas on the screen list information about each file on the selected source and destination disk Source file information is displayed on the left side of the menu and destination file information is displayed on the right side Displayed information includes the file type file name file size in kilobytes and the time and date the file was created If the selected file is divided between two or more floppy disks the message Diskette Volume n of m will be display Function key F5 IDENTIFY FLOPPY displays updated information on the floppy disk Use this function key when you install another floppy disk and want to know the contents of the disk Using the Delete File operation Figure 3 17 you can delete individual files from hard disk and floppy disk Deletions made with this operation only affect the contents of a specified file other files on the disk are not affected When you select the Delete File operation a directory listing is displayed that contains the file names file sizes in kilobytes and creation revision dates and times for all files on the specified disk To dele
133. between modules Two clusters can run simultaneously but cannot interact See also Module Compound Action Two or more Simple Actions executed simultaneously Compound Event A Boolean combination of two or more Simple Events Control Bus Provides buffered address data and control lines to support the transfer of setup status and data information between the Controller board and the modules Controller Board A circuit board permanently resident in the mainframe The Controller board provides all computing resources Correlation The tracking of independent events captured by different acquisition modules and indicating how they relate to each other in time Specifically the chronolog ical interleaving of data from different acquisition modules into a single display Shows real time interactions between independently clocked circuits Correlation Bus Passes signals for time correlation between acquisition modules Counter A circuit or device that records occurrences of some specified input DAS System User Manual Glossary DAS System User Manual Cursor A marker representing a specific location on the terminal screen There are two types of cursors a Data Cursor and a Field Cursor DAS NT A networked DAS system The DAS is controlled over a network rather than by a single terminal DAS XP The stand alone DAS system The system comes standard with a color terminal Data Cursor A cursor used to temporarily ma
134. bs use the following command substituting the name of your system for DAS name gt rsh DAS name lprm Plp wd To delete remote print menu jobs use the following command substituting the name of your system for DAS name gt rsh DAS name lprm Plp menu 3 74 DAS System User Manual a Appendix A Specifications This appendix describes the electrical mechanical and environmental character istics of the DAS mainframe excluding the acquisition or pattern generation modules Specifications are also included for the 92C02 GPIB Expansion Module For information on the specifications for the acquisition or pattern generation modules refer to the module user manuals Table A 1 DAS Mainframe Environmental and Safety Characteristic Atmospherics Temperature Maximum Operating Minimum O perating Description As per Tektronix Standard 062 2847 00 40 C 104 F 10 C 450 F limited by media Nonoperating 40 C to 450 C 40 F to 4122 F Humidity As per Tektronix Standard 062 2847 00 Operating lt 80 two hours before operating Nonoperating 10 90 relative humidity Altitude As per Tektronix Standard 062 2847 00 exceeds MIL T 28800D tested for altitude 4 5 5 2 Operating 3 km 10 000 ft maximum limited by hard disk drive Nonoperating 12 km 40 000 ft maximum limited by hard disk drive Safety The Master and Expansion mainframes comply with the requirements of UL 1244 HD4015
135. ce if you press the Return key all default channel names will be restored You must confirm your choice if you press the Return key all default channels will be restored You must confirm your choice if you press the Return key all default group ordering will be restored You must confirm your choice if you press the Return key all default inhibit masks will be restored The PostScript prolog output file is missing from the system To recover the file you must reinstall the Base System Software uv rint unable to read prolog file The PostScript prolog output file has been corrupted To recover the file you must reinstall the Base System S oftware Probe disconnect forces default deskew values Rubout invalid in this field use backspace Whenever you change probes or disconnect then reconnect a probe default deskew values are assigned to that probe The rubout key is invalid when the cursor is on a group value field of a word glitch or edge recognizer Use the backspace key Sample rate will be changed to 10 ns when screen is exited When you select to store glitches you cannot use a 5 ns clock rate DAS System User Manual Appendix C Error Messages Table C 1 Error Messages Cont Error Message Sample rates faster than 5 ns invalid when glitches enabled Explanation You cannot use sample rates faster than 5 ns when glitches are enabled
136. changes as you select different module formation numbers As you cycle through the module formation numbers notice that the configuration list in the center box changes to show the arrangement of modules for that formation Each module formation contains a different arrangement of installed modules The number of possible formations depends on the modules installed in the mainframe To time correlate data between two or more acquisition modules that are not combined as a variable width module follow these steps 1 Forma cluster of two modules appropriate to your application in the Cluster Definition overlay of the System Configuration menu 2 Define what modules should be correlated in the Define Correlation overlay of the Cluster Setup menu Data from the correlated modules will be time aligned in the display menu when you acquire data NOTE Modules that are combined together as variable width modules such as two 92C96 Modules in adjacent slots are automatically time correlated DAS System User Manual Reference Trigger One Module from Another or Cross Trigger Two Acquisition Modules DAS System User Manual Configuration slot 0 Controller slot 1 slot 2 922416 92A16 1 92A16 slot 3 92A16 Formation 9 slot 4 92A16E slot 5 928 16 92S 6 1 925 16 32 slot 6 92532 Formation slot 7 925 32T slot 8 Configuration Slot 0 Controller s
137. cifications 0 ccc cee cece cece eee eecees A 1 Appendix B Accessories 00 ccc cece cece cece ehh nnn B 1 Appendix C Error Messages eee een nnn C 1 DAS System User Manual iii Table of Contents Appendix D Loading System Software D 1 SCSI Hard Disk Format Utility lesse D 2 Running the SCSI Hard Disk Format Utility 000 D 2 SCSI Hard Disk Utility Main Menu sseeeee eese D 3 Format Setup Menu ille RR RR Ee E eR es D 5 Change Swap Size Menu ssseeeeeeee ee D 6 Bad Block List Display seseeeeeeee IR D 8 Fil System Make Utility sis ee RR RR ER RR pes D 9 Running the File System Make Utility 0 0004 D 9 File System Check Procedure 0 0 0 cece eee ee eee D 10 File System Install Utility incide eie i a eee eee ees D 15 Installing Base System Software 0 0 eee eee D 15 Installing Optional System Software sleleeleeee less D 17 Installing Application Software 0 0c eee leen D 17 Removing Optional System Software or Application Software D 18 Verifying Base Optional and Application Software D 19 Optional System Software 0 00 eee eee ce eee eee D 20 Application Software i lli dc See ies IR E eee eee es D 22 Appendix E Configuration Utility eee E 1 User Interface sie RO abn tne ba
138. cuting the print operation DAS System User Manual Appendix F User Service No Data Printed to Network Printer Instrument Options DAS System User Manual The Network Print Queue information in the Print Screen Setup overlay shows that data has been sent to the printer but no output appears at the printer m Verify that the printer is on line and has paper m Verify that the output format specified in the overlay is compatible with the output format of the printer An output image is generated and placed in the Network Print Queue one or more print jobs are in the queue However the Status line in the Print Screen Setup overlay indicates that the DAS cannot communicate with the host m Verify that the printer is on line and has paper m Verify that other hosts on the network can communicate with the printer m Verify that the network printer has a TCP IP compatible interface with lpr support m Verify that the internet address and printer name settings in the overlay are correct for the remote printer W Check the network connections between the DAS and the printer try executing the etc ping command from the terminal or workstation to the printer This section lists some of the options available for the DAS XP and DAS NT systems Table F 5 lists the basic options for the DAS XP mainframe and Table F 6 lists the basic options for the DAS NT mainframe Power cord options for both mainframes are listed separately
139. d Refer to the steps given earlier in this appendix to remove the card in slot 7 2 Refer to Figure F 5 and thread the multiwire cable through the slot 8 rear panel opening and under the 92C02 module 3 Use the POZIDRIV screwdriver and screws to attach and tighten the GPIB connector assembly to the backplane Refer to Figure F 5 to locate the mounting position DAS System User Manual Appendix F User Service Installing Remote On Off Options DAS System User Manual 4 Plug the cable s female harmonica connector onto the 92C02 Module s male square pin connector located in the corner of the module closest to the GPIB connector Ensure that you connect pin 1 of the female connector to pin 1 of the male square pin connector 5 If you removed a card from slot 7 replace it now Ensure that the cable to the GPIB port connector is clear of the card s slot Any contact between the cable and the card can damage the cable The mainframe can be remotely powered on and off using two pins 75000 also labeled REMOTE on the Controller board These pins are located at the rear of the Controller board and are accessible through the card cage Shorting the two pins together will power up the mainframe to power down the mainframe remove the short This remote power on function can be used when you have a mainframe rackmounted with other instruments and you want to power down all instruments at the same time You can also remotely pow
140. d 92A90 D Data Acquisition Modules The large number of acquisition channels 60 maximum allows the 92A60 Module to serve as the basis for a variety of DAS features including microprocessor support general purpose state analysis and software performance analysis The 92A90 Module 90 channels maximum provides increased width The 92A60 and 92A90 Modules are available in two versions the standard 92A60 90 Module versions provide 32 k memory depth the 92A60D 90D Module versions offer 128 k memory depth Both the 92A60 and 92A90 Modules use a retargetable buffer probe that can be quickly changed to fit the application The 92A60 90 Modules cannot be combined for applications requiring more channels however acquired data can be time correlated with other acquisition modules 92A96 and 92C96 Data Acquisition Modules The 92A96 Module is a 100 MHz 100 channel data acquisition module suited for general purpose medium speed hardware analysis 32 bit microprocessor support and up to 400 MHz high speed timing analysis The 92A96 Module can be expanded to provide up to 288 channels of acquisition at speeds of 100 MHz synchronous and 72 channels at speeds of up to 400 MHz asynchronous The module comes with 8 channel probes and single channel clock probes The 92C96 Module is a subset of the 92A96 Module that can easily be upgraded for deeper acquisition memory Unless stated otherwise the terms 92C96 and 92A96 are used interchangeably D
141. de is selected in the Cluster Setup menu This message also appears if other cards in the module have not stopped running Waiting for Stop Store The Trigger word has been found but memory has not yet been filled Waiting for Trigger Trigger conditions have not been satisfied DAS System User Manual C 11 Appendix C Error Messages C 12 DAS System User Manual a a a Appendix D Loading System Software System software is loaded onto the hard disk at the factory It is only necessary to load the system software using the supplied floppy disks under the following conditions m When you upgrade the software version m When a major system software failure damages one or more system files m When you replace the hard disk You can load the system software onto the hard disk using a series of steps described in this section These steps differ from those used to make copies of floppy disks and to load application software using the Disk Services menus The System Software consists of the following floppy disks m The SYSTEM UTILITIES disk FORMAT amp MAKE This disk contains the SCSI Hard Disk Format utility and the file system Make utility Use the SCSI Hard Disk Format utility to format the hard disk or modify the swap partition size and the file system Make utility to create a new file system on a newly formatted hard disk The Make utility also includes the file system Check procedure to check or repair the fil
142. ded for use with network systems or with systems with X terminals However a console terminal is required to display status or error messages while using the utility You can also use the Serial window of an X terminal for this purpose if you do not have an external console terminal The utility does not make use of any special characteristics of any terminal The utility assumes that the terminal can display 80 characters per line and at least 24 lines per screen No special character positioning or highlighting is used The Configuration utility is required under the following conditions m When you change networking parameters m When you change the operating mode m When you need to update the terminal Flash ROM m When you need to check the results of the power on diagnostics and configuration if the system menus do not display The basic utility consists of a main menu and several submenus Each menu has a list of selections to choose from and lists the current values of the parameters A Help selection is also available for each menu item DAS System User Manual E 1 Appendix E Configuration Utility Main Menu Configuration Utility 1l 2 d 4 5 6 7 8 9 The Main menu displays as soon as you start the utility Figure E 1 shows an example of the main menu To select an item in the main menu enter the character enclosed in parenthesis following the line number of the item you are interested in and press the
143. disassembly formats All nonresident application software and corresponding menus are described in separate manuals supporting each application software package 2 10 DAS System User Manual Tutorial Selecting Menus DAS System User Manual This tutorial is intended to familiarize you with the menus operator controls and the display conventions of the Digital Analysis System This section is intended for beginning users or for experienced users who want to review individual controls or display functions The tutorial begins by explaining the mouse driven interface and the use of fields and function keys within the menus It then briefly explains how to set up menus to acquire and display data with the acquisition module It is recommended that you perform the steps in sequence throughout this tutorial While this section describes the use of the Digital Analysis System with basic menus and fields it does not contain an exhaustive list of all possible combina tion of menus keystrokes mouse selections and display contexts When you power on the system an initial menu displays the product logo copyright information and system software version The menu continues to display while the system software completes the initialization process After a few seconds the Menu Selection overlay appears The Menu Selection overlay lists all available menus that you need to operate the system You can move through the menus using the mouse or key
144. disk to a floppy disk and vice versa or make a copy of a hard disk file on the hard disk For floppy to floppy disk copies you must first make a copy in a temporary hard disk file Once made you can complete the copy operation using the desired destination floppy disk Refer to Duplicate Floppy Operation on page 3 35 for information on copying the entire contents of a floppy disk When you select the Copy File operation a directory listing displays the files available for the specified source disk and source file type a directory for the destination disk is also displayed Using the scroll keys buttons or joydisk you can move through the files in the directory this operation automatically updates the source and destination file names If more file names are listed than can be displayed you can scroll through the file names The copy file operation is performed after you select function key F8 EXECUTE OPERATION DAS System User Manual Reference DAS System User Manual You can also rename files during the Copy File operation To rename a file position the cursor on the Destination File Name field and enter the desired file name You then must delete the original file name In cases where an existing file would be overwritten you are asked to confirm the choice To copy a large number of files from one system to another using floppy disks you should consider using the Backup User Files operation and the Restore User Files oper
145. dual selection in the case of an opened select field where the cursor currently resides A note is available for each menu field and selection but only displays when you select the Notes button The note disappears when you press the Esc key or press the left mouse button while pointing inside the thin message window displayed directly above the function key legends If you press any other key except function keys the note disappears and the key works as usual A Key note describes what happens when you press any currently active function key If a function key legend does not give you enough information a Key note is available to provide more detail A Key note appears when you select the Notes button and then select a function key the note disappears when you press the Esc key If you press the function key a second time its function will be activated If you press any other key except another function key the note disappears and the key works as usual Try using the on line notes with the Diagnostic menu and the fields in the Set Date Time overlay DAS System User Manual Operating Basics 1 Before continuing with this tutorial make sure that the Diagnostics menu is displayed 2 Select the Notes key and then select function key F5 SET TIME A brief description of the function key and the Set Date Time overlay appears 3 Select function key F1 START A description of the purpose of the function key appears 4 No
146. e instrument At initial power on the default groupings of modules are displayed you can select different module formations groups of modules of the same type A typical example of when you might want to change a module formation is when your application requires more channels in a module than are currently defined For example by selecting different groupings of 92C96 cards in a module you can add needed acquisition channels The System Configuration menu also displays the current collection of modules in a cluster you can change the clusters with the Cluster Definition overlay m The System Monitor menu This menu displays the status of the modules installed in the system as well as the clusters It lets you see at a glance which modules and clusters are running which are waiting for their trigger condition which have acquired data and stopped and which are autorunning If you acquire data for the selected module or cluster using Autorun the number of times that module or cluster has been started is shown in the upper right corner of the status line The System Monitor menu is especially valuable when you have defined several different clusters and have them running simultaneously m The Cluster Setup menu This menu is only selectable after you create a cluster using the Sys Configuration menu It lets you define how modules assigned to the same cluster interact Specifically it allows you to define signals passed between modules t
147. e 3 8 Correlation Definition Overlay 3 15 Reference 3 16 Autorun Definition Overlay When using clock latch correlation features available with the 92A16 Modules one 92A16 must be specifically paired with another module Therefore if you select a 92A16 in one of the correlation fields a second field appears allowing you to designate which module you want to pair it with Press the Select Next key or the Select Prev key to select a second module Available selections are all other acquisition modules in the cluster Refer to the 922A 6 I6E Module User Manual for information on how to ensure the greatest accuracy in 92A16 correlation Function key F4 DEFAULT CORR resets module correlation to the default value that is no modules correlated This overlay will then consist of a single blank field If you exit the overlay at this point the Correlation column in the Cluster Setup menu shows no modules correlated Function key F6 DELETE CORR deletes or blanks the field the cursor is on If there are no lines to delete this function key will not appear on the menu Function key F7 ADD CORR adds a new blank field below the last module currently listed and places the cursor on it If all modules of a cluster have been defined this function key will not appear Use the Autorun Definition overlay to set up automatic comparisons between acquired data and reference memory data files that you have established in the Save Restore me
148. e created by the user in order to perform certain tasks When the application changes the user selects a different cluster and effectively reconfigures the system without changing the physical arrangements of acquisition and pattern generation modules Define Signal Define signals passed between modules in a cluster in Signal Definition overlay Define Correlation Define correlation between modules in a cluster in Define Correlation overlay Define Autorun 1 Create a refmen 2 Define Autorun Figure 3 2 Multimodule Operation Sequence Cluster Definition Overlay 3 4 You can use the Cluster Definition overlay to create and define the contents of the clusters You can access the overlay from the System Configuration menu by selecting function key F6 DEFINE CLUSTER If you have defined a cluster and want to change or clear it you should first stop all modules or clusters before making any changes The Cluster Definition overlay is shown in Figure 3 3 DAS System User Manual Reference CLUSTER GEFIMITIDH Cluster Contents Modi ee Clus tar Cl r 1 uL tar 2 E PTS BSZAHBU E ETustur i 925156 1 Chuste Fi F2 ESCAPE CLUSTER amp LAHLEL ALL PRAT Hotta PEHU HUNE m Figure 3 3 Cluster Definition Overlay The Cluster Definition overlay displays a list of all modules under the Modules column and a list of all clusters under the Clusters column The contents of the clusters a
149. e electromagnetic interference Mechanical Chassis The chassis provides mechanical connection and cooling for all mainframe components and options The internal acquisition and pattern generation modules reside in a card cage associated probes connect to installed modules through openings in the rear of the chassis Controller Board The Controller board provides the DAS with computing resources and the means for setting up hardware for the system and individual modules The Controller board also provides access to mass storage and communication interfaces The Controller board resides in slot 0 of the mainframe Backplane Board This board provides the mechanical and electrical connection between the Controller board and the slots that accept DAS acquisition and pattern generation modules Signals are carried on bus structures some of which extend beyond this mainframe to expansion mainframes DAS System User Manual 1 3 Getting Started 14 Hard and Floppy Disk Drives AN RS 232 Ports LAN Interface 1 0 Port The mass storage device in the mainframe is a hard disk drive You can order your mainframe equipped with a removable hard disk drive so that setup and data files can be secured in a vault overnight The system software is installed on the hard disk and all other files are eventually stored here such as setups and reference memories CAUTION Do not disconnect or remove the removable hard disk drive while the sy
150. e fixed on the first pass through the file system Check procedure you may have to rerun the procedure several times If all checks are successfully completed the number of files blocks and the amount of free space are printed and the following prompt is displayed Do you want to rerun the File System Check Procedure y n n Enter y to the prompt only if all checks did not complete successfully If you enter n the BOOT prompt is displayed Phase 1 Check Blocks and Sizes This phase checks the inode section of the file system errors uncovered here usually indicate serious corruption of the file system Table D 1 summarizes the error messages that can be generated during Phase 1 testing In the table a word in parentheses following an error message indicates the actual prompt message that appears on the screen Table D 1 Phase 1 File System Check Error Messages Message UNKNOWN FILE TYPE I2l CLEAR Explanation This message indicates thatthe procedure found an unknown type of file Type y in response to this message LINK COUNT TABLE OVERFLOW CON An internal error has been found Repeat the steps for the file system Check TINUE B BAD l procedure after completing the current pass Type y in response to this message May require several y responses The procedure detected an illegal block number B in inode EXCESSIVE BAD BLOCKS I I CONTINUE The procedure detected 10 or more bad block numbers Type
151. e for the data pattern appearing on this line Enter a symbol name using any alphanumeric string up to 32 characters long trailing blanks are discarded Pattern This area of the menu lets you enter the bit pattern for each symbol Your entry must be a valid digit for display radix or an X don t care Patterns that contain partial Xs for example 0X1 in binary radix but are then changed to another display radix will be displayed as The following function keys are available for this menu F2 FILE FUNCTIONS This key displays the File Functions overlay Use this overlay to create new symbol tables or to display existing symbol tables F3 EDIT SEARCH MODE This key toggles the definition of function keys F5 through F8 between edit mode and search mode F4 UNDO This key restores the menu to the state before the last edit operation The last ten changes are remembered so selecting function key F4 three times will undo the last three changes Edit mode F5 YANK This key copies the symbol under the cursor into a temporary buffer You can then move the cursor to a new location and select function key F6 to put the line back into the symbol table Edit mode F6 PUT This key puts the symbol in the temporary buffer in the location below the cursor Edit mode F7 DELETE This key deletes the symbol under the cursor and stores a copy in the temporary buffer you can move the cursor to a new location and select function key F6 PU
152. e full diagnostic menu displays Fill in Fields A fill in field is essentially a box that lets you enter information such as a file name To use a fill in field move the cursor to the field type in a value and press the Return or Enter key or move the cursor to another field Using the mouse press the left mouse button to select the field and then type in a value then press the right button to accept your value To blank or clear an entire field press the Return or Enter key or press the right mouse button twice There are limitations to some fill in fields For example you cannot end a file name with the underscore character _ Some fill in fields do not allow spaces while others only allow certain letters or digits Also some fill in fields do not allow editing you must reenter the whole message or name You will use a fill in field later in this tutorial Field Color Conventions Different colors identify the type and status of menu fields The following conventions apply to all fields in all menus m White text on blue background indicates a closed field m Black text on yellow background indicates a closed field cursor present DAS System User Manual 2 15 Operating Basics Exiting Overlays On Screen Buttons 2 16 m White text on orange background is an open field you can enter characters for fill in field or match choice selections W Gray text on orange background indicates a select field matched
153. e global compare mask and the individual sequence masks as indicated in the Mask file The system determines if the compare conditions are met for each module It combines this information with the information from the other module using the Autorun Stop condition to determine whether or not to restart the cluster 3 17 Reference Liust r i SZASBID 1 AUTORUN DEFTNTTIUM Modules Sz4sED 1 Fo fma t1 I inr Gal imition Fairs Mech LE Lad tili Hrita Figure 3 9 Autorun Definition Overlay The Autorun Definition overlay has the following key fields and features W Autorun Stop field This field specifies the conditions for two module comparisons Select Any True to tell Autorun to stop when any of the module comparison conditions are met Select All True to tell Autorun to stop when all module comparison conditions are met The default value is Any True If you compare only one module this field will not appear m Module field This field specifies the acquisition module within the cluster By specifying a corresponding reference memory you can define a compare condition for the module selected in this field The Module field selection also determines the correlation for comparing correlated modules m Refmem field This field specifies the reference memory to compare with the selected module A blank Refmem field indicates that the selected module will not be compared with reference memory data Selecting a correlated r
154. e interval between data transitions on a single acquisi tion channel or between data transitions on any two acquisition channels RZ Return to Zero data format A channel selected to be an RZ channel always returns a logic 0 after a specified delay and pulse width RZ and R1 data formats are complements See also R and DNRZ Sample Clock A timing signal that establishes the rate of data sampling Sampling Rate The frequency at which data is logged into the logic analyzer Scrolling A method of positioning a portion of a data display too lengthy to be contained on the screen in its entirety Select Field A screen field that allows you to make a selection from a predefined set of choices Self Contained Network An Ethernet network consisting of a logic analyzer X terminal and printer This network does not include a host computer Sequential Pattern Generator A programmable pattern generator such as the 92832 that features a very deep vector memory and sequential operation Data vectors entered into the top of memory will be output first followed sequentially by each successive vector to the end of memory See also 92832 Setup File A file stored on the logic analyzer s hard disk containing setups for acquisition or pattern generation modules These setup files can be used to restore setups from the hard disk drive Setup Menu A general class of menus concerned with pre acquisition details Available setup menus depend
155. e mouse 2 Callthe Set Date Time overlay by pointing the mouse at the F5 SET TIME function key legend and pressing the left button You can also press the F5 function key on the keyboard The Set Date Time overlay appears over over lays the diagnostics menu it should look similar to Figure 2 8 Utilities Diagnostic SET DATE TIME Dates FIF j rece FER amp uF 3 Li L bh Pelt IL ul T mi Ini NO AN n JM BM BM BM zw Figure 2 8 Set Date Time Overlay DAS System User Manual 2 13 Operating Basics Fields 2 14 Select Fields Most overlays have areas of information called fields that you can modify or select data You change or modify operating parameters in fields There are two kinds of fields Select fields and Fill in fields A Select field contains a number of predefined choices from which you can select While this type of field may contain several choices it only displays the current selection until it is opened You must open a select field to display all the choices There are three basic ways of selecting the contents in a Select field View the entire list of choices and make a selection With the mouse pointing at the field press the right button to display a list of selections Point the mouse at the selection you want and press the right button the specified selection is highlighted and the pop up list closes Cycle through the entire list of choices one at a time and make a selection
156. e on the recording surfaces To prevent damage the disks should be properly stored in their protective containers where they will not be exposed to dust or dirt In addition the head should be cleaned periodically You will need a 3 5 inch floppy disk head cleaning kit for routine maintenance Perform the routine maintenance as follows m Clean the face of the floppy disk drive monthly with a dampened cloth CAUTION Do not allow moisture to enter the disk drive When power is applied the internal components may be damaged DAS System User Manual Appendix F User Service Terminal AN Module Configurations Compatibility of Modules DAS System User Manual m Clean the head monthly Follow the instructions provided with the head cleaning kit Clean the exterior surfaces of the terminal keyboard and mouse with a dry lint free cloth or a soft bristle brush A swab is useful for cleaning in narrow spaces around the controls and connectors Do not use abrasive compounds on any part of the instrument CAUTION Avoid getting moisture inside the terminal during external cleaning and use only enough solution to dampen the cloth or swab Use only deionized water when cleaning Use a 7596 isopropyl alcohol solution as a cleanser and rinse with deionized water Do not use chemical cleaning agents they may damage the instrument Avoid chemicals that contain benzene toluene xylene acetone or similar solvents
157. e system m The SYSTEM UTILITIES disk INSTALL This disk contains the Install Utility Use the Install utility to install and verify the Base System Software the optional system software and the application software You can also use the Install utility to remove the optional system software and application software The file system Verify function is an option to the Install utility m Base System Software volume 1 through volume n These disks contain the essential software for the system You must install all the files from these floppy disks m Optional System Software These disks contain module specific portions of the system software that are not required for all configurations of the system m Applications Software These disks contain special purpose software that is not available with the base system software or the optional system software disks DAS System User Manual D 1 Appendix D Loading System Software SCSI Hard Disk Format Utility Running the SCSI Hard Disk Format Utility D 2 You need to reformat your hard disk under the following conditions Wm When you replace the hard disk with an unformatted hard disk m When a serious system failure corrupts the hard disk format m When the system reports that it cannot read block 0 of the hard disk CAUTION Reformatting the hard disk or running the file system Make utility destroys all files on the hard disk Use one of the methods described below to save files
158. e the last packet of data to be retransmitted press the Return key Reference memories comparison masks and trigger libraries are sent and received as a UNIX V7 tar archive When you select function key F8 SEND FILE the system displays a Building Archive message at the top of the screen You must wait until the status line changes to Sending File before starting the host Kermit This may take several minutes depending on the size of the file to send If you do not wait the host Kermit may time out before the system sends the file 3 53 Reference The Operation field provides two selections Receive From Host and Send To Host When you select receive the system is set to receive data packets from the host via the mainframe Host port Selecting function key F8 RECV FILE starts the file transfer When you select receive the File Name field is no longer a selectable field the name of the file to be received from the host is predeter mined When you select send the system is set to send data to the host Select function key F8 SEND FILE to start the file transfer The File Type field specifies the type of field to send or receive Two main types of files exist binary and ASCII A variety of file formats are supported ranging from binary setups and refmems to ASCII printer and symbol table files Function key F7 DELETE FILE deletes the file indicated in the File Name field and pointed to in the directory by the cursor from t
159. e with a word processor on a host computer or workstation perform the following steps 1 Save the data to a file as described in the individual module user manuals under the discussions of the print overlays Transfer the file to the host computer or workstation using one of the file transfer utilities Edit the file as an ASCH file Verify that the file contains only a single page of output data Look for a line towards the end of the file containing the following information Pages 1 If there is any other value than 1 the file cannot be a valid EPS file You will need to readjust the print parameters for only one page of output data on the system in the print overlay Change the first line in the file to the following PS Adobe 3 0 EPSF 3 0 Note that the character must be the first character in the file Save the file and rename it if necessary for your application some files require EPS files to have specific extensions By following the above procedure you can treat the output file like any other EPS file You can use the Setup Print overlays to print data to HP Laserjet printers The following steps describe how to print data to an HP Laserjet printer 1 Display the menu or data you want to print on your terminal With the mouse point at the PRINT button at the bottom of the menu click on the left mouse button to call the appropriate print overlay Set the Lines per Page field to 59 Enter the r
160. echanically and electrically before shipment It should be free of mars or scratches and should meet or exceed all electrical specifications To confirm this inspect the system unit and terminal for physical damage incurred during transit Always retain the product packaging in case shipment for repair is necessary If there is damage or deficiency contact your Tektronix representative Electrical performance verification procedures are available in the optional Verification and Adjustment Procedures document You can also refer to the optional DAS 9200 Technician s Reference Manual for module level service procedures Repacking for Shipment DAS System User Manual If the instrument is to be shipped to a Tektronix field service center for repair attach a tag to the instrument showing the owner s name and address the serial number the software version number displayed in the Diagnostics menu and a description of the problem s encountered and or service required Always return any probes and cabling so that the entire system can be tested When packing the instrument for shipment use the original packaging If it is unavailable or not fit for use contact your local Tektronix representative to obtain new packaging Appendix F User Service Preventive Maintenance Exterior Mainframe AN Floppy Disk Drive The electrical performance should be checked approximately once a year Do this by running the power on diagnostics
161. ecify a file name in the File Name field Define the remaining print parameters in the overlay Enter either the internet address of the host in the Internet Addrs field or the name of the host in the Name field Enter the user name in the User field and the path in the Host Path field Select the appropriate function key legend to print the data to a network file 3 69 Reference Hardcopy of a Timing Menu PostScript Applications 3 70 You can use a serial interface printer to print acquired data or reference memory data in the Timing menu The traces are printed down the long axis of the paper running from the top of the paper to the bottom To print Timing data to an RS 232 serial printer perform these steps 1 Select a printer with a serial interface that is compatible with one of the supported graphics character formats For information on the supported graphics character formats refer to the description of the Timing Print overlay in your module user manual 2 Connect an appropriate RS 232 cable between the serial port on the printer and the Auxiliary port on the rear panel of the mainframe Be sure to select a cable compatible with the configuration of the serial interface port on your printer Refer to your printer manual for information on the characteristics of its serial interface 3 Setthe parameters of the serial communications port on the printer and the system These parameters must match Refer to
162. ecutable program m dasdisk doc DASdisk documentation W ftinit initialization data file G 1 Appendix G DASdisk Utility The executable program is dasdisk exe You may want to add Masdisk to your path variable in your autoexec bat file to make this program executable from any directory You could also place dasdisk exe in another directory of executables If you do not have a hard disk you should make a working copy of the DASdisk floppy disk and store the original in a safe place Using DASdisk Type dasdisk and press the Return key to begin the program If Masdisk is not the working directory or you have not declared it as part of your path variable you need to specify the path and drive if necessary The Start up menu displays When you execute DASdisk it expects to find the initialization data file ftinit in the directory containing dasdisk exe If DASdisk fails to find this file it displays an error message and ends the program To override the default location of ftinit follow the instructions described in Optional Command Line Switches Insert the floppy disk that you intend to use to transfer data between the DAS and the PC into one of the PC drives The Start up menu prompts you to enter the name of the disk drive holding the floppy disk After entering the letter of the drive and pressing the Return key the Main menu appears Enter the number of the desired operation and press the Return key You can also ty
163. ee inodes does not match the number stored in the superblock Type y in response Phase 5 Check Free List This phase checks for errors in the free block list Table D 5 summarizes the error messages that can be generated during Phase 5 testing Table D 5 Phase 5 File System Check Error Messages Message Explanation EXCESSIVE BAD BLKS IN FREE LIST More than 10 bad block numbers in the free block list have been detected type y in CONTINUE response EXCESSIVE DUP BLKS IN FREE LIST More than 10 duplicate block numbers in the free block list have been detected type y CONTINUE in response BAD FREEBLK COUNT This message indicates thatthe free block countis incorrect No action is required X BAD BLKS IN FREE LIST This message indicates that there are X bad blocks in the free list No action is required X DUP BLKS IN FREE LIST This message indicates that there are X duplicate blocks in the free list No action is required X BLK S MISSING This message indicates thatthere were X blocks unused by the file system that were not in the free list No action is required FREE BLK COUNT WRONG IN SUPER An inconsistency in the free block count has been detected The free block count in BLOCK FIX the superblock is incorrect type y in response BAD FREE LIST SALVAGE The free block list must be repaired type y in response Phase 6 Salvage Free List This phase rebuilds the file system free block list There are no
164. eference memory adds a stop condition for each module 3 18 DAS System User Manual Reference DAS System User Manual Mask File field This field specifies the mask file to be used in the compare A blank field indicates that the comparison between the selected module and reference memory will not use a mask file This field will not be present if the Refmem field is blank Mask files are created on a host computer and downloaded to the system Upper Bound Sequence Range field This field defines the upper bound of a range of inclusive sequence numbers to be used in the comparison The system displays an error message if you try to set this number less than the lower bound sequence range or more than the maximum sequence range This field is not present unless the reference memory and module or the correlated set defined by the module match The reference memory and module are considered a match if they have the same type data width and channel grouping The upper bound field applies only to the selected module To apply an upper bound to another module you must select that module in the Module field and then enter the upper bound sequence number Lower Bound Sequence Range field Defines the lower bound of a range of inclusive sequence numbers to be used in the comparison An error message will be displayed if this number exceeds that of the upper bound sequence range This field will not be present unless the reference memory and
165. efore the trigger See also Trigger Position Probe An input acquisition or output pattern generation device constructed as a separate unit As an input device it transmits the input signal from the circuit under test to the logic analyzer As an output device it transmits the output signal from the logic analyzer to the circuit under test Probe Adapter A microprocessor specific lead set that connects the acquisition module s probe to a system under test For example the 80286 Probe Adapter Program controlled Function Key Each program controlled function key there are eight F1 F8 accesses a series of specially assigned functions These functions are display depen dent in other words they vary from menu to menu Program Flow Control The process of branching or jumping to from subroutines or other sections of code Programmatic Command Language The entire set of DAS programmatic commands is called the Programmatic Command Language or PCL R1 Return to One data format A channel selected to be an R1 channel always returns a logic 1 after a specified delay and pulse width R1 and RZ data formats are complements See also RZ and DNRZ Refmem An abbreviation for Reference Memory DAS System User Manual Glossary DAS System User Manual Reference Memory Acquired data that has been stored in a file for use as a reference base for instance to compare with future acquisitions Resolution The minimum detectabl
166. em will restore this file when you power on the system m Comments field This field displays the comments you enter to describe the contents of the selected file This field becomes a fill in field when a save operation is selected blank characters are allowed During other operations this field contains comments from the currently selected file m Display field Selects the type of display shown in the lower half of this menu 3 24 DAS System User Manual Reference m File information This area of the menu displays information about the file selected in the File field above Information includes file name size in kilobytes date and time originally saved and any entered comments Save System Setup This operation stores setup information for each existing cluster and unclustered module as well as any existing display formats for acquisition memories Save Cluster Setup This operation stores the following setup information for the cluster specified in the Save Cluster field m Clustering information which modules m Intermodule signal definitions m Time correlation definitions m Individual module setups The Save Cluster field appears only when you select the Save Cluster Setup operation Save Module Setup This operation stores setup information for the module specified in the Save Module field The Save Module field appears only when you select the Save Module Setup operation Saving the Power Up You can save a set
167. emaining printer parameters Select the appropriate function key legend to print the data Printing begins with a blank page Data is printed on the remaining pages 3 71 Reference Capturing and Printing Menus Capturing Menus from a 3 72 Stand alone System This section provides information on capturing menus using the Print Screen tool of the pull down Workspace menu or from the command line interface with the settings specified in the Print Screen Setup overlay to the Communications menu refer to Print Screen Setup Overlay beginning on page 3 50 To capture a menu from a stand alone system DAS XP perform the follow ing steps 1 Use the Print Screen Setup overlay to specify the output destination of the image and the format of the image if necessary refer to Print Screen Setup Overlay on page 3 50 If you intend to save the image to a local file specify a local file name If you intend to send the image to a local printer verify that the printer is correctly connected to the Auxiliary Port and is ready to receive data If you intend to save the image to a remote network file specify the file name internet address or the name of the remote host user name and the remote path name if any If you intend to send the image to a remote printer specify the internet address of the printer user name and the printer name Save the changes to the overlay by selecting function key F8 EXIT amp SAVE D
168. en Buttons 2 0 ee ccc ene eee 2 16 Function Keys 6 bebo UEBER UR E eae ath E Nh utres 2 19 On Line Notes bebo ep ei be poh ee et Iden uter qu 2 20 Field Notes 4 eR RU ER BM RE each oth recat C uU 2 20 Key Notes zc a bg ub OPI DR I Peur 2 20 Defining Setup Menus 0 0 cece cece n 2 22 Set Up the Config Menu 0 0 0 0 0 eee eee eee eee 2 22 Set Up the Channel Menu 0 00 0 eee 2 23 Set Up the Clock Menu 0 0 0 0 eee eee eee eee 2 25 Set Up the Trigger Menu 02 0 0 cece eee eee 2 26 Acquiring Data cust et eb ect hte ee ae eee ee 2 28 Scrolling State Data e e T E eee nee 2 29 Scrolling Timing Data 1 0 0 ee cee eee 2 30 Split Screen Display lees 2 31 Conclusion ere eb b Pe he eae Lhe ho 2 32 Reference Referente p o on En Rars ees oo eh mee ON ee Se eee eS 3 1 System Configuration Menu 00 cee eee cee ee 3 1 Mo d l Formation oenen oone Tn eb ET oe eee RE Ba SE a Bees 3 1 Creating Clusters coeur E OLNECHNES Wh As PS ES S 3 3 Cluster Definition Overlay 0 0 eee ee eee 3 4 Cl ster setup Men cL uresbuRneENOrE vc Se ee WES Be Ses Se CERO 3 6 Signal Definition Overlay 2 0 0 cece eect eens 3 8 Using the External Event I O Pins 00 0 0 0 002 e eee 3 11 Correlation Definition Overlay 0 0 cee eee eee 3 14 Autorun Definition Overlay 2 0 0 cece eect eee 3 16 System Monitor Menu
169. ent time for the hard disk heads to lock in a safe position To install or remove a card you must first remove both the top cover and its inner card cage door WARNING To avoid injury observe the following safety precautions High currents inside the mainframe can be exposed when the cover is removed Be sure the front panel switch is OFF and the power cord is disconnected before removing the cover After the instrument is off wait five seconds before removing the cover Observe the following safety guidelines before removing the cover of the mainframe m DO NOT attempt any disassembly procedure with the power cord attached m DO NOT operate the mainframe with the cover removed m DO NOT place the mainframe on its front face F 11 Appendix F User Service To install or remove a module from the mainframe perform the following steps 1 Power down the mainframe by using the front panel power switch 2 Wait 60 seconds Remove the power cord and the attached probes except the 92A60 90 Buffer Probe If your mainframe has the three phase power supply option disconnect the power cord at the wall outlet 3 Locate the two square plastic latches near the back of the mainframe on its lower sides see Figure F 3 push in both buttons lift the mainframe cover from the back tilt it away from the front of the mainframe and remove it Press Figure F 3 Removing the
170. entation to get the most out of your logic analysis system m The 92A96 amp 92C96 Module User Manual provides detailed information on the 92A96 and 92C96 Data Acquisition Modules Consult this manual for information on the Setup and Display menus for the acquisition modules and for information on connecting the probes to the system under test W A series of other module user manuals that provide detailed information on the data acquisition and pattern generation modules available for use with DAS systems Consult the individual manuals for information on the Setup and Display menus for each module and for information on connecting the probes to the system under test W A series of microprocessor disassembler instruction manuals that describe the various microprocessor support packages available with the DAS systems W A technician s reference manual provides service information for qualified service technicians to isolate problems to the module level W A series of application software user manuals that accompany the various software support packages How to Use This Manual DAS System User Manual The DAS System User Manual consists of the following m Getting Started This chapter briefly describes the DAS and provides installation instructions and information for first time users m Operating Basics This chapter provides a functional overview of the DAS It also provides a tutorial for new users who are unfamiliar with the ope
171. ents are assigned to and monitor an acquisition at the cluster level The first of these tasks signal event assignments is accomplished with the overlays described in the following paragraphs the second monitoring an acquisition is accomplished with the System Monitor menu The Signal Definition overlay lets you define signal events for the current cluster A signal event might be one module waiting for a signal from another module in order to trigger for example You can specify the following parameters m Signal name m Signal type speed m Event line the signal will be assigned to m Direction the signal will travel input or output for a given module To define a signal event call the Signal Definition overlay select function key F2 DEFINE SIGNAL in the Cluster Setup menu Then select function key F7 ADD SIGNAL The Signal Name field will change to fill in mode allowing you to type in the name of the signal event you want to define After you enter the name press the Return key You can then use the other fields in the overlay to specify the various parameters you desire for that signal event DAS System User Manual Reference Note that you can only designate a specific line for your signal event if you ve selected Normal in the Type field if you select High Speed the Line field disappears Note also that you can only specify a Boolean operator in the Combination field if you have defined two or more output signal
172. er on and off the mainframe via the terminal by installing a jumper wire between J6110 1 labeled REM and J8101 3 labeled RTS on the Controller board With the jumper connected when the terminal is turned on power will be applied to the mainframe after a few moments this allows the terminal time to complete its power on diagnostics The mainframe is shipped without the jumper installed NOTE If the terminal fails to pass its power on diagnostics and the jumper wire is installed information sent to the terminal from the mainframe might not be displayed F 17 Appendix F User Service Red Striped ma 4 Figure F 5 Installing the GPIB Connector Replacing the Line Fuse The following procedure describes how to change the line fuse for the main frame To change the fuse perform the following steps 1 Power off the system unit 2 Wait 60 seconds and disconnect the power cord from the system unit This allows time for the power down sequence to complete 3 Remove the line fuse and replace it with the appropriate fuse Table F 3 lists the fuses and the Tektronix part number Table F 3 System Unit Fuse Replacement Line Operation Fue Tektronix Part Number 115 VAC 15 A 250 V Fast blow 159 0256 00 230 VAC 10 A 250 V 3AG 159 0057 00 F 18 DAS System User Manual Appendix F User Service Power On Diagnostics Normally the mainframe and the terminal run their respective diag
173. er than current module hard disk space or memory This type of power off may corrupt the hard disk file system but it is usually fixed at the next power on You have restored a Deskew Values file to a module that has different probes than those in place when the deskew values were saved Some restored values have therefore been changed Enter the name of the label contained in the sequence line where you want the breakpoint to occur Enter the name of the label contained in the sequence line where you want the pattern generator to start Enter the name of the label contained in the first sequence line of the interrupt request Subroutine This State already contains the maximum allowable number of clauses The function key is ignored The file you have restored was saved to a module with more channels than your current module The file you have restored was saved to a module with fewer channels than your current module Symbol value too large for group You entered a symbol value that is too large for the current group Enter a smaller value That key has no function The key you pressed has no function in the current context no action taken The filename must have at least one charac ter Enter a minimum of one alphanumeric character as a file name The first character in this field cannot be a dollar sign Use any alphanumeric character as the first character in this field except the dollar Sign
174. er the rising edge of the BTSYNC signal The synchronous external event out signal is guaranteed to be valid for at least one TSYNC cycle 3 13 Reference Correlation Definition Overlay 3 14 To define external signal events use the Signal Definition overlay If you select External in the Components field the following new fields appear that allow you to establish the logic convention for signal events on the external event lines m Slot field Lists the location slot number of all expansion modules in your mainframe s This field is for information purposes only you cannot make selections here m Card field Lists the expansion modules in your mainframe s these modules contain external event lines This field is for information purposes only you cannot make selections here m Event Out and Event In fields Each expansion module in your mainframe s contains an external event input line and an external event output line Use this field to define the logic conventions of signals being sent from the output line to an external device Selections are Unused Hi True and Lo True If the event output line is being used by another signal event Unavail will appear indicating that you cannot make a selection The Correlation Definition overlay lets you specify correlation from two acquisition modules in the current cluster To call this overlay select function key F4 DEFINE CORRELATN in the Cluster Setup menu Data acquired
175. erformance analysis and microprocessor support Glossary 1 Glossary Glossary 2 92A96D The 96 channel 32 K memory 100 MHz data acquisition module it is used for software performance analysis microprocessor support and high speed timing analysis up to 400 megasample asynchronous acquisition 92A96XD The 96 channel 128 K memory 100 MHz data acquisition module it is used for software performance analysis microprocessor support and high speed timing analysis up to 400 megasample asynchronous acquisition 92A96SD The 96 channel 512 K memory 100 MHz data acquisition module it is used for software performance analysis microprocessor support and high speed timing analysis up to 400 megasample asynchronous acquisition 92A96UD The 96 channel 2 M memory 100 MHz data acquisition module it is used for software performance analysis microprocessor support and high speed timing analysis up to 400 megasample asynchronous acquisition 92C02 An I O Interface Module This module adds a GPIB port as well as External Event In Out and expansion capability to the DAS 92C96D The 96 channel 32 K memory 100 MHz data acquisition module it is used for software performance analysis microprocessor support and high speed timing analysis up to 400 megasample asynchronous acquisition Using Powerflex options you can upgrade the memory depth to 128K or 512K 92C96XD The 96 channel 128 K memory 100 MHz data acquisit
176. ering Off To power off a non networked DAS simply turn off the DC ON OFF switch on the mainframe and then power off the terminal On a DAS NT 92XTerm system you can quit the application by clicking on the title bar and selecting quit from the pull down menu on the workstation Menu Overview The Digital Analysis System is controlled by interactive menus that appear on the terminal screen A menu is a screen display that offers selectable or scrollable choices Some menus are associated with overlays submenus that provide additional menu selections or information The menu set can be divided into four separate groups W Setup menus m Display menus m Utility menus m Application menus Setup Menus Setup menus define the conditions under which modules will operate and communicate with other modules There are two classes of Setup menus those that control system wide operating parameters and those that pertain specifically to one module type DAS System User Manual 2 5 Operating Basics 2 6 System Setup Menus These menus will always appear on the Menu Selection overlay Cluster Setup can only be entered after you have defined a cluster using the System Config menu The System Configuration Cluster Setup and System Monitor menus are described in more detail in the Reference section of this manual The following System Setup menus are available W The System Configuration menu This menu lists the modules installed in th
177. es You can install several different instrument modules inside the mainframe depending on your needs An Expansion mainframe DAS 92E9 which provides extra slots for additional modules is also available The DAS NT can be identified by the NT sticker on the front panel Similarly the DAS XP has a XP sticker Earlier versions of the DAS have an SE sticker The standard display device for the DAS XP is a color X window terminal with a mouse driven interface A set of nested interactive menus let you define the contents of the system you need enter parameters and data and control the system outputs The DAS mainframe consists of the following major internal components m Mechanical chassis m Hard and floppy disk drives m 40 MHz 68EC030 CPU m RS 232 ports m Power supply 100 watts per slot average W Local Area Network LAN interface m External input and output connection An option to the DAS mainframe Option 04 allows the mainframe to satisfy the German electromagnetic interference EMI requirements DAS Systems Prior to January 1 1996 DAS mainframes equipped with Option 04 that were sold prior to January 1 1996 satisfied the German electromagnetic interference EMI requirements VDE 0871 Class B This VDE option applied to mainframes set for 230 V operation only operation at 115 V exceeds component ratings A mainframe with Option 04 included the following items m Conductive elastic between the front facade and the
178. es and transfer files via modem or local area network These instructions describe the system requirements necessary to use DASdisk how to install DASdisk on your PC and how to use DASdisk PC System Requirements Installing DASdisk DAS System User Manual The DASdisk program runs on IBM PC XT and AT compatible computers using DOS Version 3 0 or higher DASdisk requires at least 640 Kbytes of memory and two 3 5 inch floppy disk drives or one 3 5 inch floppy disk and a hard disk The floppy disk must be compatible with your DAS floppy disk drive A hard disk is highly recommended The floppy disk drive is a high density 1 44 Mbyte drive 512 byte sectors 18 sectors track The floppy disk density used on the PC must match that of the DAS on which the disk is to be used The DASdisk program reads floppy disks that were created using the Disk Services menus or the DASdisk program on a PC with a compatible disk drive NOTE You cannot read floppy disks used with the Backup User Files operation in the Disk Services menu To install DASdisk on the hard disk of the PC create a directory named dasdisk at the root level of your disk For example if your hard disk is drive C make a directory C dasdisk Then copy the files from the DASdisk installation floppy disk to the new directory using the following command copy a c Mdasdisk The directory dasdisk should contain the following files m dasdisk exe the DASdisk ex
179. example you can do the following m Combine 92A16 and 92A16E acquisition modules to achieve a maximum of 96 channels in one mainframe m Combine 92A96 or 92C96 acquisition modules to achieve a maximum of 288 channels in one mainframe m Combine 92HS8 and 92HS8E high speed acquisition modules to provide up to 32 channels DAS System User Manual Reference DAS System User Manual m Combine 92516 pattern generation modules with up to seven 92832 modules m Combine up to eight 92532 modules There are some limitations when working with variable width modules For example 92A60 and 92A90 modules cannot be combined Also modules can only be combined with other modules in the same mainframe and must reside in adjacent slots you cannot combine modules that reside in different mainframes Combined modules function in parallel they are started and stopped as a unit For example when a 92A16 and five 92A16Es are combined they function together as a single acquisition module that is 96 channels wide When eight 92832s are combined they function together as one 256 channel wide pattern generation module These functional groupings of similar modules called module formations are automatically created based on the card slot configuration of your mainframe A module formation is a functional grouping of variable width modules of similar types that reside in adjacent mainframe slots Based on the card slot configuration of your mainframe
180. f your system contains one or more Expansion mainframes slot 8 of the Master mainframe must contain a 92C02 GPIB Expansion Module The 92C02 GPIB Expansion Modules connect to the Expansion Slave board slot 0 of the DAS 92E9 Expansion mainframe In the DAS 92E9 Expansion mainframes Slots 1 through 8 are available for the various DAS modules The following paragraphs contain guidelines for configuring your DAS system These guidelines are valid for all DAS modules The guidelines for individual modules are discussed separately m All cards in a module must be installed in adjacent slots and in the same Master mainframe or Expansion mainframe modules cannot stretch across mainframe boundaries but you can have more than one module in a mainframe m If you have more than one single card module in a mainframe for cooling purposes leave one or more slots between modules 92A16 E Data Acquisition Modules Although the 92A16 Data Acquisition Module can be placed in any slot of a DAS mainframe it is recommended to place the 92A 16 in the lower numbered slots This provides proper air flow around the 92A 16 in high ambient temperature conditions If a 92A16E Expansion Module is installed with a 92A16 the 92A16E should be placed in the slot directly above the Master 92A16 Some of the basic guidelines are listed below For further information refer to the 92A 6 E Data Acquisition Module User Manual m You can include up to six cards in a 92A1
181. fective and should be replaced Disk HARD ERROR n m DAS System User Manual A fatal hard disk operation occurred The SCSI hard disk returned a Sense Key n and extended sense value m in hexadecimal describing the failure The disk probably is defective and should be replaced C 3 Appendix C Error Messages Table C 1 Error Messages Cont Error Message Disk rezero failed Explanation An attempt was made to rezero the hard disk The disk probably is defective and should be replaced Duplicate channel name encountered Channel name must be unique enter a unique name Duplicate entry n Entries in this field must be unique enter a unique value Duplicate label n Each label must be unique enter a unique name Duplicate Macro names are invalid Each Macro must have a unique name Rename the Macro Duplicate State names are invalid Each State must have a unique name Rename the State Embedded spaces are invalid Entry cannot contain blank spaces use alphanumeric characters only Embedded spaces not allowed in this field Entry cannot contain any blank spaces Use alphanumeric characters only Enter a binary number 0 1 Z X Return or Esc Only binary numbers are valid entries in this field You can also enter Z or X or press the Retum key orthe Esc key Enter a decimal number 0 9 Z X Return or Esc Enter a hexadecimal number 0 F
182. fective product In order to obtain service under this warranty Customer must notify Tektronix of the defect before the expiration of the warranty period and make suitable arrangements for the performance of service Tektronix will provide such service at Customer s site without charge during the warranty period if the service is performed within the normal on site service area Tektronix will provide on site service outside the normal on site service area only upon prior agreement and subject to payment of all travel expenses by Customer When or where on site service is not available Customer shall be responsible for packaging and shipping the defective product to the service center designated by Tektronix with shipping charges prepaid Tektronix shall pay for the return of the product to Customer if the shipment is to a location within the country in which the Tektronix service center is located Customer shall be responsible for paying all shipping charges duties taxes and any other charges for products returned to any other locations This warranty shall not apply to any defect failure or damage caused by improper use or improper or inadequate maintenance and care Tektronix shall not be obligated to furnish service under this warranty a to repair damage resulting from attempts by personnel other than Tektronix representatives to install repair or service the product b to repair damage resulting from improper use or connection to incompatible
183. finea signal in the Signal Definition overlay of the Cluster Setup menu The signal should be an output signal from the acquisition module and an input signal to the pattern generator module 3 Setup the event in the Trigger menu for the acquisition module to identify a word event counter value or any other event appropriate for your applica tion This event will cause the pattern generator to change its output 4 Setup the action in the Trigger menu for the acquisition module to assert or pulse the signal defined in step 2 5 Enter the External Control overlay of the Configuration menu for the pattern generator Set the IRQ Jump or Ext Jump to be enabled when the signal defined in step 2 occurs 6 Program the algorithmic actions of the pattern generator Program menu using the If IRQ Jump or If Ext Jump commands to cause the pattern to change at an appropriate point in the output data You can set up the system to send or receive a TTL level signal to or from external equipment such as an oscilloscope You can use the Sync Out signal from the SMB connector on the back edge of the acquisition module You can access these connectors through the slots in the rear panel of the mainframe For a description of how to use the Sync Out signal refer to your module user manual Another way is to use a 92C02 Module in slot 8 of the lowest numbered mainframe To send or receive a signal using the 92C02 Module follow these first two steps 1 F
184. following Display menus are available for the acquisition module there are no display menus for the pattern generation modules m State Menu The State menu displays acquired data as a table of logical states of the input channels Channels are organized as defined in the Channel menu and data is displayed in the radix you select m Timing Menu The Timing menu provides a graphic display with each input channel represented as a digital two state waveform It also shows the bus value of all channel groups defined in the channel menu m Graph Menu The Graph menu displays a graph of data from any two of the selected channel groups plotted against their locations in the acquisition memory m Disassembly Menu The Disassembly menu is a table display that translates the logic input for specific channel groups into microprocessor specific mnemonics DAS System User Manual 2 9 Operating Basics Utility Menus Utility menus provide system level tools They allow you to control data transfers to and from the hard and floppy disks and they allow you to define the parameters that control the communication ports The following Utility menus are available Save Restore Menu This menu allows you to save instrument setups and acquisition memory data restore instrument setups from previously saved files and delete instrument setup and reference memory files from the hard disk Disk Services Menu This set of menus provides the tools necess
185. for file and floppy disk manipulation the menu has no overlays The Disk Services menu cannot be used for rebuilding the hard disk with the operating system software for rebuild information refer to Appendix D Loading System Software However the Disk Services Install Application operation is used when loading application software to the mainframe hard disk There are a few guidelines that you should be aware of when you use the Disk Services menu m Do not use file transfer or removal programs with a host computer while the files are being used by the system m Do not use a host computer to remove a file currently being used by the system For example do not remove a reference memory while it is being displayed or symbol tables while they are being displayed or used for triggering m Do not use a host computer to access files that are being written to by the system for example reference memories and setup files The following list briefly describes some of the file types that can be selected in the Disk Services menu These files and directories are also used with other file transfer operations such as Kermit DASdisk ftp and PCL m A16 Deskew Selects files containing saved 92A16 deskew values m A16 Trigger Selects files containing saved 92A16 user defined trigger setups Refer to the description of the Trigger Library in the 92A76 I6E User Manual Wm A60 90 Deskew Selects files containing saved 92A60 90 deskew values
186. fter it was shipped from the factory The bad blocks will be listed by head cylinder and sector The partition or file system block the defects are associated with is not given It is not necessary nor possible to add blocks to these lists BAD BLOCK LIST DISPLAY LIST NAME defect count head cyl sector Manufacturer Defects 3 X X X X X X X X X Grown defects 0 None Press any key to return to the Main Menu If the system software detects bad blocks while the system is running the blocks are automatically added to the bad block list by the SCSI hard disk drive DAS System User Manual Appendix D Loading System Software File System Make Utility Running the File System Make Utility DAS System User Manual The file system Make utility either creates a new empty file system and destroys all previously stored files on the hard disk or it checks and repairs the existing file system The utility prompts you to select one of the two options Use the file system Check option to repair file system damage which can result from an abnormal power off of the mainframe Before running the Make procedure of this utility use the system software Disk Services menu to save all user created files on floppy disks NOTE If the hard disk drive has been seriously corrupted it may not be possible to save files on floppy disks It is a good idea to perform regular backups of your user generated files If the BOOT
187. ftware is available on floppy disks For information on installing or reinstalling the system software refer to Appen dix D Loading System Software If you connect your system to a LAN network you must set the network parameters for your system as assigned by your system administrator Details on setting the network parameters are provided in Appendix E Configuration Utility DAS System User Manual Getting Started Configuration Hardware You can configure the DAS with acquisition and pattern generation modules to address various needs DAS modules consist of printed circuit cards that must be installed in a mainframe A card cage within the mainframe holds all DAS modules The modules are the building blocks of the DAS These modules are installed in the mainframe according to configuration guidelines given in the user manual that accompanies each module a summary of the guidelines are also included later in Appendix F User Service See Table 1 8 for a list of available modules Table 1 8 Acquisition and Pattern Generation Modules 92A16 acquisition 16 4K 200 MHz 92A16E acquisition expander 16 4K 200 MHz 92A901 90 32K 20 MHz 92A90D1 acquisition 90 128 K 20 MHz 92A96 92C962 96 8K 100 MHz 92A96XD 92C 96XD 96 128K 100 MHz 92A96SD 92C 96S D2 acquisition 96 512 K 100 MHz 92H58 2 GHz 92HS8E3 acquisition expander 8 8K 2 GHz 92516 16 1K 50 MHz 92532 32 8K 50 MHz 925X109 100 MHz 925X118 18 16K 100 MHz
188. g from the host to the system m Internet Address This address is assigned by your system administrator The Internet address is used by other machines that use TCP IP to communicate with the system This address must be entered before the LAN subsystem will function properly The field is non selectable to change the address you must use the Configuration utility described in Appendix E m Gateway Address This address is assigned by your system administrator The LAN system can communicate with machines outside of its own local network 3 48 DAS System User Manual Reference DAS System User Manual This field is where the address of the gateway machine is recorded The system cannot be designated as a gateway This field does not have to be filled in to boot the 92LANSE system The address 0 0 0 0 disables the gateway function To change the gateway address you must use the Configuration utility as described in the appendices Subnet Mask The Subnet mask is assigned by your system administrator This field specifies the value of the mask used to determine the subnet address component of an Internet address The subnet address specifies a local network but is not included as part of the Internet address Instead the routing software derives the subnet address from the subnet mask and a bitwise AND operation on the Internet address A subnet mask of 0 0 0 0 disables the subnet addressing function To change the Subnet mask you
189. g written to by the system for example reference memories and setup files m Do not use a host computer to place inappropriate files in application specific directories m When working with 92516 Modules the contents of the IRQ and Ext Jump fields cannot be saved and restored these fields will contain the default selections after a restore operation m Do not restore 92A60 Module setups to 92490 Module setups or vice versa m When restoring 92A16 92S16 32 or 92HS8 Module setups the contents of the Probe Pod field in the Channel menu reflect the pod and slot number of the original setup the pod and slot number do not change when you move the module to a different slot Save setup operations let you save setups for acquisition and pattern generation modules Figure 3 11 shows a menu with the Save System Setup operation selected Menu descriptions for other save setup operations follow this figure these menus look similar to Figure 3 11 The save setup operations follow m Save System Setup m Save Cluster Setup m Save Module Setup Save refmem operations allow you to save copies of the acquisition memory data Once the data has been acquired and saved on hard disk it becomes a reference memory Figure 3 12 shows a menu with the Save Correlated Refmem operation selected The save refmem operations follow W Save Correlated Refmem m Save Module Refmem Restore setup operations allow you to restore setups for acquisition and pat
190. have started the file system Check procedure it proceeds automatically The check procedure goes through six phases which are described beginning on page D 11 Tables list typical messages that can be displayed during each phase of the file system Check procedure and give an explanation of each message The tables also contain recommended responses to the error messages NOTE Where a message in these tables is followed by a word in parentheses the word indicates the actual prompt message you will see on the screen DAS System User Manual Appendix D Loading System Software When the file system Check procedure finds an inconsistency in the file system it prompts you to take corrective action There are several approaches to correcting file system problems depending on the situation Usually answering y to a CLEAR prompt or n to a RECONNECT prompt corrects the problem without damaging any files on the hard disk If a file has a size of 0 it can always be cleared After clearing any files you should run the Verify option of the Install utility to make sure that no system files were deleted If the message EXCESSIVE BAD BLOCKS CONTINUE appears you should enter y to continue A file system bad block is not the same as a bad block on the hard disk NOTE If you receive the Excessive Bad Blocks message you must repeat the file system Check procedure until you get through it with no errors reported All problems may not b
191. he signal defined in step 2 or to trigger 92A96 1 and assert or pulse the signal defined in step 2 In the Event field of the Trigger menu for 92A96 2 select If Signal user defined signal name is Asserted Set up the action in the Trigger menu for 92A96 2 to Trigger The 92A96 2 will trigger when the signal from 92A96 1 is pulsed or asserted To cross trigger two modules repeat steps 3 through 6 and set up the Trigger menu for both modules as follows State One If Event Module Trigger event here gt or Signal signal from other module is Asserted then Trigger and Assert Signal signal to other module To perform stimulus response testing with a pattern generator module and acquisition module starting and stopping as a unit follow these steps 1 Form a cluster containing a pattern generator and acquisition module in the Cluster Definition overlay of the System Configuration menu Choose either Normal or ATE Start mode in the Cluster Setup menu ATE starts the acquisition module before the pattern generator module to ensure that the acquisition can capture the first output data from the pattern generator Program the acquisition and pattern generator modules according to your application If the pattern generator will either directly or indirectly supply the clock to the acquisition module be sure to program the pattern generator Run Control algorithmic steps and output vector depth to provide a sufficient
192. he Cluster Setup menu 6 Select the appropriate acquisition module and reference memory saved in step 4 in the Autorun Definition overlay Make other selections appropriate for your application and exit the overlay Refer to the Autorun Definition Overlay on page 3 16 for a list of selections NOTE The System Monitor menu shows the status and Autorun count of all modules and clusters The status line in any menu shows how often the selected Autorun cluster has started 7 Start the cluster When the Autorun stop conditions are met data is displayed for analysis You may want to use the Memory Differences field in the format definition overlay of the various display menus to help you analyze acquired data Another helpful way to view data is to use the split screen display with reference memory data displayed in one half of the screen and acquired data in the other half Change the Pattern of the If you have a 92S16 Pattern Generator Module you can change the output pattern 92S16 Pattern Generator when an event occurs on the acquisition module by following these steps 1 Form a cluster containing a 92S16 pattern generator and the acquisition module in the Cluster Definition overlay of the System Configuration menu Only a 92S16 pattern generator can change its pattern output as described in this procedure DAS System User Manual 3 65 Reference Send an Output Trigger Signal to External Test 3 66 Equipment 2 De
193. he list of files To confirm the delete operation press the Return key To abort the delete operation press the Escape key The label on function key F8 changes based on whether the Operation field is set to receive or send files When set to send files selecting function key F8 SEND FILE causes the system to transfer the specified file to the host When set to receive files selecting function key F8 RECV FILE prepares the system to receive a file from the host utsTttlog Comunicat Idis Fi F3 F F5 F F7 FB START PREVIOUS DEFAULT LAH PRINT DELETE SEH Cum tur WALES PUTATE SETUP FILE FILE Pia ww Ey pus Du E B8 BM BH zer Figure 3 26 Communications Menu with the Kermit File Transfer Protocol 3 54 DAS System User Manual Reference Diagnostics Menu The Diagnostics menu Figure 3 27 lists the major system components including media drives Associated with each of the system components is a diagnostic report that indicates the operational status of that component at power on This menu also provides a summary and brief description of the modules installed the software version currently installed the date and time and some general user information The menu has two overlays the Set Date Time overlay to set the system date and time and the Boot Option overlay where you can specify the boot options for power on Ciustar 2 SZASEI 1 UtiTttion Diagnostic Igis F5 F SET BOOT TIME CHECKS hh i iki l
194. he pop up menu and pressing the left mouse button You can also scroll through the data by pointing the mouse at the NEXT and PREV buttons on the bottom of the window and pressing the left button DAS System User Manual Operating Basics 5 Confirm your selection by pressing the right mouse button The pop up menu closes and the new value will display in the select field 6 With the cursor in the Day select field point the mouse at either the NEXT or PREV buttons near the bottom of the window Press the left button to cycle through the choices in the select field 7 Pointthe mouse at the Month field and press the left button to move the cursor to the field You can cycle through the data using the methods described earlier However another way to enter data is to type in characters until the desired selection appears 8 Type the letter J The contents of the field changes to one of the words beginning with the letter J for example January 9 Type the letter u The contents of the field changes to one of selections containing the letters Ju for example June 10 Type the letter 1 The field contents change to July Once the correct selection appears press the right mouse button to close the field If you type an invalid letter an error message will display 11 If you have not already done so enter the current date and time and select the F8 EXIT amp Save function key to exit the overlay The overlay closes and th
195. he purpose of the function key changes as the display changes For example function key F6 in the Channel menu calls the Channel Definition overlay however in the Trigger menu function key F6 calls the Trigger library All active function keys for the current menu are shown The numbers on the function key legends F1 F8 correspond to the numbered function keys on the keyboard see Figure 2 10 DAS System User Manual 2 19 Operating Basics On Line Notes 2 20 Field Notes Key Notes F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 MOVE TO MOVE TO MOVE TO MOVE TO EXIT SETUP DISPLAY UTILITY APPLICTN amp SAVE SEROLL 1 ESI ER rores we C MEETS NE Figure 2 10 Function Keys Map to the Function Key Legends Occasionally there are situations when you want to learn information about a function key or field without having to take the time to look up the information in the manual Other times you want to know the purpose of a function key when the name of the function key legend is not obvious The on line notes system is designed to address these problems The on line notes system provides information in the form of brief quick access notes Two types of notes are available Field notes and Key notes The Notes text appears on the menu in a small window You call the notes by selecting the Notes button at the bottom of the menu or by pressing the Help key on the keyboard A Field note gives you a brief on line description of the field or indivi
196. hen shut down Information provided here describes the environment in which the mainframe terminal and modules should be operated the intended site must meet the stated conditions Mainframe Site Considerations The mainframe will operate in a temperature environment between 4 10 C and 40 C 4 50 F and 4104 F The maximum heat dissipation is 3 750 BTUS per hour When the mainframe is to be operated on a bench or cart it should be placed in a normal upright position For proper cooling allow at least four inches 10 2 cm of clearance in front of and behind the mainframe allow at least two inches 5 1 cm of clearance on both sides of the mainframe If the need arises the mainframe can also be operated while on its right side media drives down If positioned on its side the mainframe must be raised off the working surface a minimum of two inches 5 1 cm This permits proper air flow for cooling purposes 1 11 Getting Started 1 12 A Terminal Connections CAUTION Overheating can occur if the mainframe is operated without the cover or when positioned on its side without being raised off the work surface Place two equal height lifts at the front and back of the mainframe The lifts must not cover or block the air vents at the front side of the top cover the front or rear of the mainframe The Master mainframe can support the weight of one Expansion mainframe placed on top or one Expansion mainframe
197. ial printer the Host port connects to a host computer Auxiliary Port Flow Control field This field defines the type of flow control the Auxiliary port uses when sending data to an attached printer For XON XOFF selection the printer sends XOFF ASCII DC3 to stop the system from sending more data and XON ASCII DC1 to resume data transmission For DTR CTS the printer sets the DTR control line to a logic low to stop the system from sending data and sets the same line high to resume transmission Avoid changing the settings of this field while printing data doing so can cause unpredictable results in the output data DAS System User Manual Reference LAN Overlay DAS System User Manual Host Port Flow Control field This field defines the type of flow control the system uses when transferring data to and from a host computer flow control applies to data sent in either direction For XON XOFF selection the host sends XOFF ASCII DC3 to stop the system from sending more data and XON ASCII DC1 to resume transmission Similarly the system sends XOFF ON to stop and start the host For DTR CTS the host sets the DTR control line low to stop the system from sending data and sets the same line high to resume Similarly the system sets the CTS control lead low to stop the host from sending data and to high to resume transmission Protocol field This field specifies either the DAS 9200 PCL or Kermit file transfer protocols for the Ho
198. ible Ipr spooler If the etc host file on the DAS has an entry for the remote host or remote printer you can enter the name of the host in the Name field in the overlay Otherwise you can enter the internet address of the host in the Internet Addr field When printing to a network printer you must specify either the internet address of the printer in the Internet Addr field or the host name in the Name field you should also enter the printer name in the Printer Name field If your DAS is part of a self contained network for example a DAS XP with a single TCP IP compatible printer you need to specify the internet address of the printer in the Internet Addr field Depending on your printer the printer name may be required refer to your printer documentation for details Figure 324 shows an example of the Print Screen Setup overlay The field selections depend on settings of the output destination Send Output To field and the output format For example if you specify the output format as PostScript you can specify the size of the output image large medium or small include the time and date with the output image and add a description of the image However these fields may not be available if you select other output formats Table 3 4 lists the output formats available with the current system software DAS System User Manual Reference DAS System User Manual Table 3 4 Print Screen Output Formats Output Format PostScri
199. idea to restore files over existing files with the same name Doing so can cause inconsistencies in file sets During the restore process the system displays the following status information m The current volume number m The estimated number of volumes for the restore process m The percentage of the files restored from the current volume m The estimated percentage of the total files restored m The current file name The system checks that the disk you inserted is volume 1 if it is not it will display the current volume number and prompt you to insert volume 1 If there is insufficient free space on the hard disk the system displays the amount of free space required and then stops the restore operation To restore all of your user files you must create additional free space this may mean deleting other user files application software or some of the optional system software 3 37 Reference Symbol Editor Menu 3 38 NOTE Do not interrupt a restore operation before it is complete Doing so can cause the system to stop or produce other unexpected results The system will prompt you to insert additional disk volumes to complete the restore operation After reading the final disk volume the system will update the user files to the current format if necessary When the restore operation is complete and no errors occurred the system displays the message Restore operation complete with no errors The Symbol Editor me
200. ime correlate data acquired by two different modules and specify Autorun conditions where a module acquires data compares it to a reference memory file and based upon the compari son stops or automatically repeats the acquisition Module Setup Menus Module Setup menus that appear below the System Setup menus correspond specifically to the module currently selected For example if 92C96 1 is the active module the Config Channel Clock Trigger and Monitor menus pertain only to this one module other Setup menus will appear when you select a different module for example 92S16 1 or 92S32 1 Refer to your module user manual for complete details on all the menus overlays and fields of the Module Setup menus Figure 2 5 shows the Setup menus for each module DAS System User Manual Operating Basics DAS System User Manual MODULE SETUP 92A16 16E System Configuration 92A 60 90 Cluster Setup 92A96 System Monitor 92C96 Configuration Clock Channel Trigger Monitor 92HS8 8E System Configuration Cluster Setup System Monitor Configuration Channel Trigger 92516 32 System Configuration Cluster Setup System Monitor Configuration Channel Program Monitor All modules in a cluster share a Cluster Setup menu Modules notin a cluster have no Cluster Setup menu Figure 2 5 Setup Menus for Each Module The following Setup menus are available for the acquisition module m Configuration Menu The Config menu
201. ime you press the button While still pointing at the Joydisk button hold down the Shift key on the keyboard and press the left button The data will move several one half page of sequences each time you press the button Point the mouse to an area on the menu just above the function key legends and press the left button The line cursor will move to the approximate location of the mouse pointer Each time after that the data will scroll one sequence each time you press the mouse button Point the mouse at approximately three sequence lines from the top of the data in the menu and press the left button The line cursor will move to the approximate location of the mouse pointer Each time after that the data will scroll one sequence each time you press the button Enter a number for example 500 in the Cursor field and press the right button The line cursor will be positioned at the indicated sequence location In addition to scrolling to specific data you can also define search parameters to search for data using the Search Definition overlays However describing these operations is beyond the scope of this tutorial Refer to your module user manual for specific information on Search Definition overlay 2 29 Operating Basics Scrolling Timing Data 2 30 You can use the Timing menu to graphically display digital data as a two state waveform Data can be displayed in groups known as busforms or as individual channels You ca
202. in the top 1 0 Pins slot of an Expansion mainframe you can use the external event I O signals by connecting to a set of square pins These square pins are accessible through an opening on the rear panel as shown in Figure 3 6 If you do not plan to use the external event I O signals on the 92C02 Module do not define any external signals in the Signal Definition overlay The external event in and out signals pins 2 and 4 shown in Figure 3 6 are TTL compatible the differential BTSYNC signals pins 5 and 6 are ECL compatible When you connect to an external event in or event out pin use pins 1 and 3 as ground references for these signals The BTSYNC signals are differential unterminated positive voltage ECL signals if you use these signals terminate them through 100 Q resistors connected to a 3 V sinking supply Typical voltage swings for these signals when terminated are approximately 13 2 V to 4 2 V ground referenced DAS System User Manual 3 11 Reference External Event GPIB Bus Indicators 92C02 Slot 8 I O Pins 92C 02 Only AUXILIARY eleale 4 External E
203. ing Clause in a State Can t delete the only remaining E vent in a Clause Can t delete the only remaining Event in a Macro Can t delete the only remaining State Can tfilter an Event containing a Counter or Timer Event DAS System User Manual The maximum allowable number of Library Items has already been defined The function key is ignored You cannot delete or modify any of the pre defined Library Items you can only delete or modify user defined Library Items A Clause must contain at least one Action A Macro must contain at least one Action A State must contain at least one Clause A Clause must contain at least one Event A Macro must contain at least one Event The Trigger menu must contain at least one State Event filters conflict with the operation of counter timers C 1 Appendix C Error Messages Table C 1 Error Messages Cont Error Message Can tfind selected symbol table file Explanation Symbol table file does not exist on the hard disk verify you are using correct file name or install the symbol table file Can t save to Tek defined Library Items You cannot save to any ofthe predefined Library Items you can only save to Library Items that you have defined Cannot delete first line of clock equation You cannot delete the first line you may add or delete a second line Cannot deskew if the module is running or hardware is otherwise busy Deskew requ
204. ion Mainframe Connections When you add one Expansion mainframe to your system you can place it on top of the Master mainframe If you connect multiple mainframes place them in a rackmount configuration using the instructions provided in the Option 05 Rackmount Installation Instructions A set of sticky back labels supplied with each Expansion mainframe should be affixed to the rear panel of each Expansion mainframe to identify slot numbers You can use blank labels to cover the Terminal Host and Auxiliary lettering printed on the rear panel The procedure for connecting one Expansion mainframe is basically the same as for three Expansion mainframes Refer to Power Requirements on page 1 8 for details on power cord supply requirements When fully connected the Master mainframe controls the power on sequence of the attached Expansion mainframes If for example a diagnostic test at power on encounters a serious problem in a mainframe in the chain the diagnostics do not allow any mainframe to power up Refer to Figure 1 3 while performing the connection procedure You will need both a 1 and a 2 Phillips screwdriver to perform the connection To Ground Lug on DAS 92E9 N Master Mainframe To Expansion Slave Board in DAS 92E9 NZI NN Expansion Cable Board Housing Ground Lug m C 4 0 O NN wO 4 Figure 1 3 Master and Expansion Mainframe Connections DAS System User Manual
205. ion module it is used for software performance analysis microprocessor support and high speed timing analysis up to 400 megasample asynchronous acquisi tion Using Powerflex options you can upgrade the memory depth to 512K 92C96SD The 96 channel 512 K memory 100 MHz data acquisition module it is used for software performance analysis microprocessor support and high speed timing analysis up to 400 megasample asynchronous acquisi tion 92HS8 The 8 channel 8 K memory 2 GHz data acquisition module intended to aid designers of high speed digital systems in locating subtle timing problems DAS System User Manual Glossary 92HS8C The 92HS8 cabinet The 92HS8C is used with a 92HS8 and 92HS8E to expand the channel width of high speed configurations 92HS8E The 92HS8 Expander card A 92HS8E can be combined with a 92HS8 and two 92HS8Cs to provide up to 32 channels of acquisition 92LANSE The Local Area Network module that allows you to connect the mainframe to a local area network for LAN operations The 92LANSE Module is standard with each mainframe 92816 The 16 channel 50 MHz algorithmic pattern generator module The 92816 can be used as a stand alone stimulation source or linked with a data acquisition module to provide a test system for debugging and verifying components boards and systems See also Algorithmic Pattern Generator 92832 The 32 channel 50 MHz RAM based sequential pattern generator module The
206. ion software which consists of multiple files and directories Messages displayed on the screen instruct you on how to proceed with the Remove Application operation The Backup User Files operation allows you to back up all user files stored in the directories of the Disk Services menus to a set of floppy disks Select function key F8 EXECUTE OPERATION to begin the backup process The system estimates the number of disks that you will need to complete the operation The estimate can be high or low so it is a good idea to have at least one more disk on hand After determining the number of disks required you will be prompted to continue or abort the operation Press the Return key to continue the operation you will be prompted to insert the first blank floppy disk Insert the floppy disk and press the Return key to continue the process The system will format if necessary and verify the floppy disk before backing up any files During the backup process the system will display the following status information on the screen m The current volume number m The estimated number of volumes for the backup process m The percentage of the files backed up to the current volume W The estimated percentage of the total files backed up m The current file name If any errors occur during the process the system will display the error messages on the screen and prompt you to either continue or abort the operation Press the Return key to continue the ope
207. ires thatthe module not be busy with other activities Wait until the module is available Cannot use external components with High S peed signals You cannot use high speed signals for external input or output Only normal signals can be used Caution Signal signal name High Speed Signal line cannot be allocated Line cannot be allocated an empty slot exists between the modules or they do not support high speed signals Channel channel number already being used in the group group name The selected channel number is already being used in another group Channel names must be unique No two channel names can be the same The old channel name will be restored Characters per line value too large for PostScript setto maximum Choose another name Default is reserved Clock edge is never active a ock edge is always active Cluster cluster name will be destroyed Press Return to confirm Esc to abort Clusters must contain at least one module No changes will be saved Press Return to confirm Esc to abort Compound Event cannot contain 2 Counters or Timers Conflict with Event in last State Conversion destination is not wide enough PostScript allows a maximum of 80 characters per line Enter a name other than Default The 92A96 clock qualifiers have been logically ANDed together such that the clock edge is never active The 92A96 clock qualifiers have been logically ORed t
208. isplay the menu that you want to capture Start the Print Screen tool by selecting Print Screen Start Screen Capture from the pull down Workspace menu Point the mouse anywhere within the menu you want to capture Wait until the cursor changes to a cross hatch cursor To capture the entire menu press and release any of the mouse buttons being careful not to move the mouse The terminal bell sounds once as the capture process starts and twice when the process is done To capture a portion of the menu hold the mouse button down while dragging the cursor diagonally across the area you want to capture and then release the mouse The terminal bell sounds once as the capture process starts and twice when the process is done The image will be sent to the output destination specified in the Print Screen Setup overlay To abort a print job before the data is sent to the print spooler use the Workspace menu to select Print Screen gt Abort Screen Capture DAS System User Manual Reference Capturing Menus from a To start a screen capture of a menu from a networked system DAS NT perform Networked System steps 1 though 8 of the previous procedure except in place of step 4 execute the following command in one of the shell windows rsh DAS name doprint X host display gt 0 where DAS name is the name of the DAS system and host display is the name of the remote display For example if your DAS system is named das1
209. ist by using the Add operation Appendix G DASdisk Utility Write Operation 4 Enter Y to confirm the operation DASdisk searches the floppy disk directory for a file that matches the Disk File Name of the specified file type If there is a match the file will be copied to the PC If you do not confirm the operation or there is no matching file the Read operation aborts 5 Press any key to return to the Main menu If you enter or in the Disk File Name field and confirm the operation DASdisk reads and copies all the files on the disk DASdisk displays both the original file name and the new file name If the file name is not a valid PC file name DASdisk will construct a new file name based on the original To insure that two similar file names are not converted to the same PC file name make sure that the first eight characters of the file name are unique and valid If the file you are reading is a multiple volume file each time a new floppy disk is needed DASdisk prompts you to continue with the Read operation If the file is an ASCII file as opposed to a binary file a file conversion operation is performed on the PC after the transfer This conversion requires that there be enough free space on the destination drive before the transfer begins to temporarily hold two copies of the file The Write operation lets you copy a file or file set from the PC to the floppy disk To write a file select the Write operation and pe
210. itch tells the program to run in batch mode rather than in the default interactive mode Here is an example of a command to run dasdisk in batch mode dasdisk b infile outfile In this example infile contains whatever would be typed to perform the desired operations while running interactively Outfile will contain whatever would normally be written to the screen Comments are allowed within a batch file They should have the following format Comment text DAS System User Manual G 9 Appendix G DASdisk Utility Table G3 shows examples of some DASdisk commands Table G 3 Examples of DASdisk Commands Command Action dasdisk db Runs DASdisk from drive B dasdisk DA Runs DASdisk from drive A dasdisk h usr sharon Makes usr sharon the home directory dasdisk Hc DAS 9200 files Makes DAS 9200 files on drive C the home directory dasdisk cblue Selects the blue color scheme dasdisk cgray Selects the gray color scheme dasdisk cCC The command is ignored because the same color is specified for text and background dasdisk cP Sets the text to magenta leaves the background unchanged dasdisk da h das ccyan Selects drive A as the active disk drive makes das on the current drive the home directory and selects the cyan color scheme dasdisk b infile outfile Runs DASdisk in batch mode taking input from infile and writing output to outfile G 10 DAS System User Manual Glossary
211. l system displays match press the Open Close key to verify choice Please enter a channel number 0 7 RETURN or ESC Enter a legal channel number press the Return key or press the Esc key Please enter a unique digit You cannot enter the same digit more than once in the same field Pod 12A 7 0 Ch 76543210 removed from Group P g12 1 Confirms that specified channels were removed by a delete channel operation C 8 DAS System User Manual Appendix C Error Messages Table C 1 Error Messages Cont Error Message Pod already assigned to group n Press Return to accept Esc to cancel or a select key to continue Power Failure Explanation This pod has been assigned press the Return key to remove pod from previous location and add itto a new location The lastsystem shutdown occurred due to loss of ac power such as when the power Cord is disconnected from the power source Files are left open resulting in a loss of disk space Press function keys for Key Notes Esc to erase or any other key to continue To display a Key Note press Notes key and then immediately press a function key Press the Esc key to erase a note press any other key to continue Press Return to confirm Esc to abort You must confirm your choice if you press the Esc key selections will be cancelled Press Return to delete all empty groups and pods or press Esc to cancel Press Return to remove H
212. le and can be mixed in a multicard module F 5 Appendix F User Service F 6 92C02 GPIB Expansion Modules The 92C02 GPIB Expansion Module provides a GPIB interface to a host computer and or connects a Master mainframe to an Expansion mainframe The module must reside in slot 8 of the mainframes 92HS8 E Data Acquisition Modules The 92HS8 Modules are composed of one or two 92HSS8 interface cards installed in a DAS mainframe and one to four probe cabinets supplying between 8 and 32 channels of acquisition More than one 92HS8 module can share the same DAS mainframe There are two types of 92HSS interface cards available the 92HS8 Master interface card and the 92HS8E Expansion interface card A 92HS8 Master card can support one or two 8 channel probe cabinets or can be combined with an Expander card to support up to four 8 channel probe cabinets 32 channels maximum per module An Expander card can support one 8 channel probe cabinet in a stand alone configuration Some of the basic 92HS8 configuration guidelines are listed below For more detailed information about configuring 92HS8 Modules refer to the 92HS8 SE High Speed Acquisition Module User Manual m When using a 92HS8 Master interface card a heatsink on top of the card prevents you from installing it in slot 8 of any mainframe This same heatsink also prevents you from installing a card other than a 92HS8E Expansion interface card in the slot directly above the Master card
213. le to specify whether or not data is stored Acquisition Clock The clock internal to the logic analyzer that loads acquired data into the acquisition memory This clock can be derived from an internal source asynchronous to the system under test or from an external source synchro nous to the system under test Acquisition Cycle A complete data acquisition sequence including start search capture and stop phases Acquisition Memory The RAM located on each acquisition card where data from an acquisition is stored Acquisition Memory Sequence A single sample of acquired data to which a unique identification number is assigned As data is acquired each sample is assigned a consecutive sequence number Active Module The module highlighted by the cursor in the Menu Selection overlay Address A number or expression that designates a specific location in a storage or memory device Algorithmic Pattern Generator A programmable pattern generator like the 92816 that provides storage for data vectors and control flow instructions Algorithmic pattern generators can be programmed to branch loop and perform subroutine calls By using internal registers and control flow instructions algorithmic pattern genera tors can use a relatively small vector memory and still provide an unlimited number of vectors The 92516 algorithmic pattern generator can also perform conditional branches based on signals received from the circuit under test
214. legend will read START Cluster name if any of the modules in the cluster are running this legend will read STOP Cluster name The function key toggles the same way for an unclustered module The function key is not present if you have selected a reference memory 3 20 DAS System User Manual Reference Save Restore Menu DAS System User Manual Ciustar 2 SZASEID 1 Sya IECIT FLETI wem ek igi rens n n M E M BM mM M Figure 3 10 System Monitor Menu The Save Restore menu lets you save setups and acquisition memory data restore setups from previously saved files and delete setups or reference memory files from the hard disk Once in the Save Restore menu you can access any of the save restore or delete operations the Save Restore menu has one overlay Restore Formation overlay To move a copy of a stored setup or reference memory file from the hard disk to a floppy disk use the Disk Services menu described later in this section There are things that you should be aware of when you use the Save Restore menu m Do not use any remote file transfer or file removal commands while the files are being used by the system m Do not use a host computer to remove a file currently being used by the system For example do not remove a reference memory file being displayed or symbol tables used for triggering or display 3 21 Reference 3 22 m Do not use a host computer to access files that are bein
215. licate block entries in the inode structures Phase 2 Check Path Names This phase removes files with corrupted inodes detected in the Phase 1 check Table D 2 summarizes the error messages that can be generated during Phase 2 testing Table D 2 Phase 2 File System Check Error Messages Message ROOT INODE UNALLOCATED TERMINAT ING ROOT INODE NOT DIRECTORY FIX Action You must rebuild the file system First run the file system Make procedure Then use the file system Install utility to reload the system software Try typing y in response to this message If this generates a large number of errors you will have to rebuild the system Do this by running the file system Make procedure followed by the file system Install utility to reload the system software DUPS BAD IN ROOT INODE CONTINUE Try typing y in response If this generates a large number of errors you will have to rebuild the system Do this by running the file system Make procedure followed by the file system Install utility to reload the system software I OUT OF RANGE Izl NAME F REMOVE The procedure detected a directory entry with an out of range inode number I type y in response Run the file system Install utility Verify option to ensure that no files are corrupted UNALLOCATED I OWNER 0 MODE M SIZE S MTIME T NAME F REMOVE DUP BAD l OWNER 0 MODE M SIZE S MTIME T DIR F REMOVE D 12 The procedure detected a directo
216. ll logic analyzer operations require this software Threshold A voltage to which input signals are compared Time Base Source of the acquisition clock The time base can be selected to be an internal source a single external source or a Boolean combination of several external signals See also Acquisition Clock External Clock and Internal Clock Time Base Bus Provides four programmatic time bases useable by any modules for asynchronous acquisition and timestamp operations See also Timestamp Timer A device that lets you make time measurements during a data acquisition Timestamp A separate clock value stored with each acquisition cycle Provides performance analysis features and time correlation for multiple acquisition memories and timing measurements Timing Display Graphic representation of data states and timing relationships as digital two state waveforms TLA 510 Logic Analyzer A self contained 100 MHz Logic Analyzer The TLA 510 Logic Analyzer operates similar to a DAS mainframe with a single 92C96 Data Acquisition Module Setups from the TLA 510 Logic Analyzer can be restored to a DAS mainframe with one or more 92C96 Data Acquisition Modules DAS System User Manual Glossary 15 Glossary Glossary 16 TLA 520 Logic Analyzer A self contained 100 MHz Logic Analyzer The TLA 520 Logic Analyzer operates similar to a DAS mainframe with two 92C96 Data Acquisition Modules Setups from the TLA 520 Logic Analyzer c
217. lot 1 slot 2 922416 92A16 1 92A16 slot 3 932416 Formation slot 4 92A16E slot 5 92516 92S16 1 925 16 32 slot 6 92532 Formation slot 7 925 32T slot 8 Configuration slot 0 Controller slot 1 slot 2 92416 92A16 slot 3 922416 Formation slot 4 92A16E slot5 92516 92S 16 32 slot 6 92532 Formation slot 7 925327 slot 8 Figure 3 32 Selecting Module Formations Mainframe Mainframe 92A16 1 92516 1 To trigger one module when an event occurs on another module or to cross trig ger two acquisition modules follow these steps 1 Forma cluster of two modules appropriate to your application in the Cluster Definition overlay of the System Configuration menu 2 Definea signal in the Signal Definition overlay of the Cluster Setup menu The signal should be an output signal from one module 92A96 1 and an input signal to the other module 92A96 2 To cross trigger two modules you need to define two signals Define one signal as an output from 92A96 1 and as an input to 92A96 2 Define a second signal as an output from 92A96 2 as and an input to 92A96 1 3 63 Reference Stimulus and Response Testing 3 64 Set up the trigger event in the Trigger menu for 92A96 1 such as a word event counter value or any other event appropriate for your application Set up the actions in the Trigger menu for 92A96 1 to assert or pulse t
218. m Manual operating mode or an A to enter the 92X Term Autostart operating mode To retain the current operating mode press the Return key without entering any characters Set DAS Network Name Selecting item N from the Main menu lets you set the system network name for your system Some applications refer to network devices by a name The Internet address and name of the system must be entered in the appropriate tables on your host so that the system name of the system can be converted to the correct Internet address The name can be up to eight alphanumeric characters long E 6 DAS System User Manual Appendix E Configuration Utility Set DAS Internet Address Set Network Subnet Mask Set Gateway Internet Address Set Default X Server Name DAS System User Manual To set or change the name enter a new name and press the Return key To retain the current name press the Return key without entering any other characters You will be returned to the Main menu Selecting item A from the Main menu lets you set the Internet address for your system The Internet address is the IEEE802 network address for your system the Internet address is not the same thing as the Ethernet address which is set at the factory This Internet address must be set to an address other than 0 0 0 0 to permit communication between the DAS system and other network devices The Internet address is normally assigned by your system administrator Enter the new
219. mbol Table Displayed ceeeeee een Figure 3 19 Symbol Editor Menu Range Symbol Table Displayed eeeeeeeeeee nnn Figure 3 20 File Functions Overlay Symbol Editor Menu Figure 3 21 Search Definition Overlay Symbol Editor Menu Figure 3 22 Communications Menu eee Figure 3223 LAN Overlay cece cece cece cece nnn Figure 3 24 Print Screen Setup Overlay Figure 3 25 Print Screen Setup Overlay with Network Printer Selected 1 ovis 6 eecr err ee rti ave ine Figure 3 26 Communications Menu with the Kermit File Transfer Protocol ccc cece cece cece eee eees Figure 3 27 The Diagnostics Menu eee Figure 3 28 Set Date Time Overlay eese Figure 3 29 Boot Option Overlay eee Figure 3 30 Version Menu cece cece cece cece nnn Figure 3 31 Creating Variable Width Modules Figure 3 32 Selecting Module Formations Figure 3 33 Print Screen Tool of the Workspace Menu Figure A 1 Mainframe Unit Dimensions eese Figure D 1 DIP Switch Location 0 cece cece cere eee Figure D 2 SCSI Hard Disk Format Utility Main Menu Figure E 1 Configuration Utility Main Menu Figure E 2 Configuration Utility Hardware Configuration and Diagnostic Results
220. module or the correlated set defined by the module match The lower bound field applies only to the selected module To apply a lower bound to another module you must select that module in the Module field and then enter the lower bound sequence number Compare field This field specifies the general method of comparison for the module or the correlated set There are two selections Until Equal and Until Not Equal This field will not be present unless the reference memory and module or the correlated set defined by the module match Refmem Module column This column lists the modules within the reference memory For a non correlated reference memory the column lists only one module For a correlated reference memory the list consists of the modules in the reference memory The one associated directly with the selected module is highlighted in yellow Group Name column This column lists the group names defined by informa tion in the current selected reference memory For a multiple module reference memory the names for the current selected module are highlighted in yellow Radix column This column specifies the radix used by the Compare Mask column display 3 19 Reference m Compare Mask column This column specifies a global mask for that portion of the data indicated by the group name to the left Values translating to a binary 1 mean use this bit in the comparison and those translating to a binary 0 mea
221. mpt Select item E to save any changes and exit to the BOOT gt prompt This is the normal way to leave the utility All changes are saved and in effect when the instrument returns to normal operation Select item Q to discard the parameter modifications except the operating mode changes Major operating mode changes remain in effect System changes resulting from the save restore or delete options also remain If you performed the restore operation you should use the Exit option to save the current parameter values in place of the values that were part of the restored image After quitting the Configuration utility you will return to the BOOT gt prompt from which you can type install to install new software or you can reset the DIP switch and return to normal operation DAS System User Manual Pape J Ti Appendix F User Service Initial Inspection This appendix describes user service procedures self test diagnostic procedures brief fault isolation procedures and a list of instrument options The user service information is limited to fuse replacement preventative maintenance and module removal and installation Other than individual modules there are no user serviceable parts available inside the mainframe Replacement of internal components should be left to qualified service person nel For service assistance contact your local Tektronix service center The instrument is inspected both m
222. n The active yellow cursor automatically moves to the selection and displays the selected menu You can also access the menus in one of the following ways W Point the mouse at the menu selection and press the right button the yellow cursor will move to the selection but will not display the menu Press the left mouse button to display the menu m Move the yellow cursor to the menu that you want and press the Return Key The menu highlighted by the yellow cursor will display m Point the mouse at one of the function key legends and press the left button The menu highlighted by the white cursor will display DAS System User Manual Operating Basics W Press the appropriate function key on the keyboard corresponding to the function key legend in the window The menu highlighted by the white cursor will display The following steps show how to move between menus using the mouse 1 Point the mouse at the Diagnostics menu selection under the Utilities column and press the left button The Diagnostics menu will display The diagnostics menu provides a brief overview of the system It shows the contents of the system unit and the results of the power on diagnostics It also shows the current system software version type of floppy and hard disk drives and the current date and time You can change the date and time by calling the Set Date Time overlay You will use this overlay to become familiar with the use of the fields and th
223. n ignore this bit Select function key F3 DEFAULT MASK to reset this field to the default value compare all bits Function key F3 DEFAULT MASK resets the comparison mask for the current acquisition memory to the default condition all binary ones If the mask fields are not present this function key will not be present Function key F5 RESTORE AUTORUN displays a list of saved definitions the one you select will be restored Function key F6 DELETE AUTORUN displays a list of saved definitions the one you select will be deleted The fields will not be present if there are no saved definitions Function key F7 SAVE AUTORUN displays a field where you can enter the file name to save the definition under System Monitor Menu The System Monitor menu displays the current status of the modules in the system The current selected cluster and modules are highlighted in yellow The System Monitor menu shown in Figure 3 10 is not interactive The display is for information purposes only The status column displays a status message for each module or cluster Possible messages are Idle Waiting For Enable Waiting For Trigger Waiting For Stop Store Waiting For Stop and Running Possible Autorun messages are Idle or Running followed by an Autorun count The Modules column lists all modules and clusters in the system Function key F1 starts or stops the selected module or cluster If none of the modules in the cluster are running this
224. n by pressing the Esc key on the keyboard Alternately you can go ahead and delete Section D1 and then add it back in by using function key F8 ADD 10 Delete Section D1 Then select function key F8 ADD A pop up window appears 11 Verify that the cursor in the pop up window shows Add Section To Group and press the right button Section D3 will be added to the group Section D3 is not the section that you wanted and it may not have been added in the position where you wanted As long as the channels you need are unused by the system you can edit the necessary channels into the menu 2 23 Operating Basics 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 Point the mouse at Section DO which should be at the top of the Data Group and press the right button A new pop up window appears The new pop up window lists the status of all channel groups which channels are used and which are unused Point the mouse at the selection D1 unused 76543210 and press the right button to select Section D1 and close the pop up window Section D1 should now appear in the field Repeat the previous step to change Section D3 to Section DO Point the mouse at the Control group and delete sections C3 C2 and C1 Point the mouse at the Channels field of Section CO and press the right button The Channels field goes blank Type the numbers 1 and 0 and press the right button You have just changed the Section CO gro
225. n can also be viewed in the Menu Selection overlay The file containing the refmem is saved on the hard disk To specify a save refmem operation make the desired selection in the Operation field and select a destination file You can add notes in the Comments field that describe the file contents To complete the save process select function key F8 EXECUTE OPERATION The system will estimate the size of the refmem and ask you to confirm your choice press the Return key to save the refmem If there is not enough space on the hard disk you can select function key F1 ESCAPE amp CANCEL to cancel the process You can then delete files from the hard disk to create room for the refmem utzittlon GaverAasto Idie IERI BET E Es F Fa CHANGE EXECUTE CURSOR OPERATION Leia sex Figure 3 12 Save Restore Menu Save Refmem Operations DAS System User Manual Reference When you select the save refmem operations in the Save Restore menu the following features are displayed m Master Module field This field specifies the master module of the correlated set of modules This is the only module in the correlated set that should be defined data acquired from the other modules in the set are automatically stored m Display field This field specifies the type of display shown in the lower half of this menu m Display Information This part of the menu contains a combination of information The left side shows the File Contents di
226. n of the output channel transitions of the pattern generator Edge sensitive A trigger specification term An event recognizer is said to be edge sensitive when the event is only true in an acquisition cycle in which a transition occurs on the selected channels See also Level sensitive Edge Triggering A technique that uses a logic level transition rather than a logic state as a trigger condition The logic analyzer would trigger on the transition to a defined state See also Trigger Event See Simple Event and Compound Event Event Bus Provides a means for modules to communicate low speed events 2 40 ns to each other in real time Event Filter A trigger specification feature that lets you specify the amount of time an event must be present in order to be considered true External Clock A clock external to the logic analyzer and usually synchronous with the system under test See also Acquisition Clock and Internal Clock External Clocking A clock mode in which the sampling of input logic signals is synchronized with the activity of the system under test The representation of the signals is stored in memory by what is commonly called the external or synchronous clock that is a signal supplied externally to the logic analyzer Field A display region containing a value or values that can be selected or modified Field Cursor A screen marker used to move from field to field Field Note A brief on line descripti
227. n page D 2 to save files from the hard disk At this point if you want to continue press y If you do not want to change the swap space size of your hard disk press n or press the Return key default is n do not continue D 7 Appendix D Loading System Software D 8 Bad Block List Display If you try to change the swap space size of an unformatted hard disk an error message will be displayed and the change request will be cancelled If the hard disk has never been formatted you must format it before changing the swap space size swap partition is created after the hard disk 1s formatted or reformatted The default size of the swap partition is 6 megabytes you can change it to 8 megabytes After the change swap space size operation completes you should return to the BOOT gt prompt by leaving the SCSI Hard Disk Format Utility select the Exit option in the Main Menu You must then run the Make Utility to build the file system and the Install Utility to reload the system software after changing the size of swap partition If you do not run these two utilities the system will not function properly Both of these utilities are described later in this section The SCSI Hard Disk Format Utility lets you view the bad block list a bad block is an area on the hard disk that contains unusable bytes The Bad Block List display shows all known Manufacturer s defects and Grown defects defects developed on the hard disk a
228. n the prompt appears insert the first optional system software disk that you require for your application Continue installing the disks at each prompt until you have installed all required disks 6 After you have installed the last disk type c to complete the software installation procedure the system will then power down 7 Place DIP switch 1 in the open up position and power on the mainframe You can install application software using the same procedure given for installing optional system software However it may be easier to install the application software disks using the Disk Services menu D 17 Appendix D Loading System Software Removing Optional You can remove the optional system software and application software using the System Software or Install utility on disk Removing software in this manner provides additional free Application Software space on the hard disk drive You can also remove application software using the Disk Services Menu but not the optional system software If the BOOT gt prompt is already displayed proceed to step 4 If not begin with step 1 1 Power off the mainframe Face the rear of the mainframe and locate the DIP switches mounted on the Controller board refer to Figure D 1 on page D 3 2 Place DIP switch 1 the left most DIP switch in the closed down position Place DIP switch 2 in the open up position Leave all other DIP switches in their original positions 3 Powe
229. n view the timing over the entire acquisition or you can magnify the data to look at data over small clock increments 40 Point the mouse at the Timing button and press the left button to display the timing menu The menu should look similar to Figure 2 15 Das SGASEI 1 Timing m E Display Addr aes trni t Lontrnp d Control Dumi 1 Clock F MARE DATA Poor Eug pe la i e E M BM Figure 2 15 Timing Menu FE DEFT RE SEARCH PRIHT abi i E MG o Like the State menu the data channels are grouped according to the definitions in the Channel menu All of the address channels are grouped together and all of the data channels are grouped together You can scroll through timing data in similar manner as in the State menu However instead of scrolling data up or down you scroll the data to the right or to the left 41 Point the mouse at either of the two double arrow or single arrow scroll buttons and press the left button to scroll the data 42 Point the mouse at the right or left arrows on the Joydisk and press the left button to scroll the data The data will scroll in the direction you indicated DAS System User Manual Operating Basics Split Screen Display DAS System User Manual 43 Point the mouse at the up or down arrows on the Joydisk and press the left button Notice that the data does not scroll and that the instrument beeps at you telling you that you cannot scroll data
230. nation State is currently undefined D skew Values file is empty Disk failed to return block size External Deskew has not been performed for a multicard 92416 module The possible problem is not indicated by a channel showing invalid deskew status This message also occurs when you enter the 92A16 External Clock menu for a single 92A16 module The deskew operation just performed found one or more channels of deskew item n to be invalid Refer to the Channel Definition overlay to the Channel menu for detailed deskew status information The deskew operation just performed indicates that there may be a problem with clock equation 2 The possible problem is not indicated by a channel showing invalid deskew status The master deskew probe must be attached to Pod B ofthe master card in your module One ofthe probes you are using is nota 92A16 16E probe External deskew of a multiple card module has not been performed You may be using an incompatible probe or your probe may be faulty Check your probes Deskew has been completed not necessarily successfully You cannot restore deskew status information from a deskew status file that is empty All flow control commands must have a value entered in the corresponding label field The State specified in the Go To Action does not exist You must add it When formatting or booting the hard disk the disk failed to return the SCSI disk mode information The disk probably is de
231. nction as two separate modules or as a two card module Because of this you can select either formation with the module formation number FE DEF TNE CLUSTER Pia Emm Hil iw 10M MM 98 M Figure 3 1 System Configuration Menu The System Configuration menu has the following key fields and features m Cluster Status The status of clusters is displayed on the right side of the menu The contents of currently defined clusters and unclustered modules are displayed You define clusters in the Cluster Definition overlay m Module Formation Number This field displays the number assigned to the current module formation As you cycle through the module formation numbers the configuration list to the right of this field changes to display the designated modules 3 2 DAS System User Manual Reference m Module Formation List This list indicates the name of the module forma tion The name consists of the module type plus a number to differentiate multiple module formations of the same type for example 92A96 1 92A96 2 You can change the name of the module by moving the cursor to the fill in field and typing in a new name each module name must remain unique Changing the name of the module also changes the name of the module in the legend of function key F1 Function key F1 starts the module or cluster named on the function key legend Function key F6 DEFINE CLUSTER calls the Cluster Definition overlay Function key F8 CHANG
232. nected with peripheral printer or a host computer The color X terminal displays the interactive control menus When connected to a network the DAS can be controlled by a workstation refer to the 922XTerm User Manual for more information on using a DAS NT on a network When connected to a host computer the DAS supports transfers of acquisition stimulation data and instrument setup data The DAS comes standard with a local area network LAN interface GPIB and RS 232 remote control is also available When connected to a host computer the following capabilities are available m File transfers via ftp LAN or Kermit RS 232 m Remote control via LAN 92LANP and PCL GPIB and RS 232 m Networked operation with interactive control and data display on X compatible workstations The DAS supports a Programmatic Command Language PCL that serves as an alternative to the keyboard and menu interface The PCL commands allow you to start and stop acquisition to save load and transfer files and to query the mainframe for a variety of status and error information Data can be processed either by the DAS or the host computer When data processing is performed by the host the DAS serves as a source for raw or partially processed data Getting Started Mainframe Hardware DAS Mainframe with Option 04 The DAS mainframe provides computing power input output features and mass storage for the internal acquisition and pattern generation modul
233. ned to that cluster will reflect the new cluster name The new cluster name will also be listed as one of the selections when you open the Cluster field A module cannot be in more than one cluster at a time If you add a module that is already part of a cluster to another cluster it will be removed from the old cluster When the cluster has been defined select function key F8 EXIT amp SAVE to change the system configuration After you define the module formation and define a cluster if appropriate you can start the module or cluster by pressing F1 START function key F1 in most menus You can create a tightly linked cluster of modules and define the coordination and communication between modules in a cluster You can specify which modules you want to link as well as how each of those modules behaves in relation to each of the other modules This lets you solve integration problems quickly Clusters allow you to do the following m Time correlate modules m Set up interactive triggering between two modules m Efficiently use acquisition and pattern generation modules together NOTE You cannot access the Cluster Setup menu until you define a cluster in the System Configuration menu After you create a cluster you can call up the Cluster Setup menu for that cluster and see the default communication parameters for modules in the cluster You can then use the Cluster Setup menu and its overlays to change any of the parameters
234. nels in a DAS 92E9 Expansion mainframe A maximum of seven 928532 Modules can be placed in a mainframe assuming there is no 92C02 GPIB Expansion Module in slot 8 Each 92832 operates individually as a module or can be part of a module However you can only run up to four modules at a time The 92832 in the module installed highest numbered slot must have its high speed bus jumpers in the terminated position all other 92832 Modules in the module must have their high speed bus jumpers in the open nonterminated position For more information on the high speed bus jumpers refer to the 92816 32 Pattern Generation Module User Manual A 92832 can be combined with one or more 92832 Modules to create a single module up to 252 channels in a mainframe and 288 channels in a DAS 92E9 Expansion mainframe A 92832 cannot be placed in the higher numbered slot adjacent to a 92A96 or 92C96 Module A maximum of eight 92532 Modules can be placed in a DAS 92E9 Expansion mainframe assuming there is no 92C02 GPIB Expansion Module in slot 8 Each 92832 operates individually as a module or can be part of a module However you can only run up to four modules in the entire system at a time The 92832 in the highest numbered slot must have its high speed bus jumpers in the terminated position all other 92832 cards in the module must have their high speed bus jumpers in the open nonterminated position For more information on the high speed bus jumpers refe
235. ng parameters are normally assigned by your system administrator After setting the parameters select item U to begin the Flash ROM update process You are asked to confirm your actions before starting the operation Enter y to confirm your actions A series of messages are displayed When the operation is ready to load the X terminal software information appears on the screen Follow the steps listed below and the displayed instructions to update the Flash ROM The following steps assume that you have a 9202XT terminal the procedure is similar for other TekXpress X terminals Read the entire Flash ROM procedure on the terminal screen before continuing To return to the start of the procedure on the screen press the Return key NOTE If your X terminal is not a 9202XT or 9203XT Terminal XP17 or XP18 skip to Step 2 1 Before starting the Flash Update procedure information regarding the software compression is displayed Follow the instructions on the screen to make the appropriate selections for your Flash ROM configuration 2 Information about Step 1 of the Flash ROM procedure is displayed Read the information carefully before proceeding E 9 Appendix E Configuration Utility E 10 The configuration parameters that you specified for the instrument are displayed on the terminal Write these parameters down you need to enter the parameters in the Boot Monitor the parameters are not visible after you reset the te
236. ng setups saved on DAS systems you can also restore setups from the Tektronix TLA 510 and TLA 520 Logic Analyzers All modules and clusters in the saved setup are listed at the bottom of the overlay When modules are placed they are highlighted in yellow This allows remaining and currently placed modules to be easily identified DAS System User Manual Reference DAS System User Manual If the saved setup file contains any clusters cluster setup or system setup each cluster is listed on the right edge of the overlay When all the modules of a cluster are assigned the Restore Cluster field for the cluster appears that allows the cluster to be restored with the placed modules When this field is set to Yes the placed modules from the indicated cluster will be restored as a cluster If the field is set to No the modules will be restored as unclustered module setups Function key F4 PLACE MODULES causes the system to try to place all modules in the saved setup Module placement can be changed after auto placement by changing the selected saved modules manually Since modules can only be placed in one position at a time it may be necessary to remove a saved module from its position by selecting a blank before selecting it in the desired position Function key F1 ESCAPE amp CANCEL closes the overlay and discards any changes made to the overlay no clusters or modules are restored Function key F8 EXIT amp SAVE saves the ne
237. ning 32 channels Maximum of 32 channels per group channels truncated Maximum of 32 sections per group Minimum legal value is 10 ns You cannot add more than 32 channels per group This message appears if you attemptto add more than the maximum channels to a group the channels are truncated to fita maximum of 32 channels to a group You cannot add any more sections without deleting currently existing ones Entry is smaller than the allowable minimum value for this field Enter a value of 10 ns or larger Minimum legal value is 2 Entry is smaller than the allowable minimum value for this field Enter a value of 2 or larger Missing IRQ Call label The IRQ Call label has not been defined in the Program menu Module module name Fast Clock The memory storage rate is greater than the maximum clock rate of the module Module module name Slow Clock The module has not detected a clock from the system under test Module Cluster currently running System configuration cannot change Module name already exists Move cursor to a clock equation Move cursor to desired menu Move cursor to second line of a clock equation Name already exists Cluster names must be unique No active fields present No assertable or unassertable signals available No channels in any group press Select Menu key No data acquired for active window press Select Menu key No deskewed channels
238. nn Figure 2 15 Timing Menu 0 cece cece cee en nnn Figure 2 16 Split Screen Menu cece cece cece enone Figure 3 1 System Configuration Menu e Figure 3 2 Multimodule Operation Sequence Figure 3 3 Cluster Definition Overlay eese Figure 3 4 Cluster Setup Menu eee Figure 3 5 Signal Definition Overlay eese Figure 3 6 92C02 Module External Event Pins Figure 3 7 Time Correlation Between Two Acquisition Modules in a Cluster cece ce cw cece cece rere enone Figure 3 8 Correlation Definition Overlay Figure 3 9 Autorun Definition Overlay eeeee Figure 3 10 System Monitor Menu eee Figure 3 11 Save Restore Menu Save Setup Operations Figure 3 12 Save Restore Menu Save Refmem Operations Figure 3 13 Save Restore Menu Restore Setup Operations 1 7 1 14 2 2 2 3 2 4 2 5 2 9 2 12 2 13 2 16 2 20 2 25 2 26 2 27 2 28 2 30 2 32 DAS System User Manual Table of Contents DAS System User Manual Figure 3 14 Restore Formation Overlay ee Figure 3 15 Save Restore Menu Delete Operations Figure 3 16 Disk Services Menu Copy File Operation Figure 3 17 Disk Services Menu Delete File Operation Figure 3 18 Symbol Editor Menu Pattern Sy
239. nostics at power on These tests provide basic checks to verify the operating status Since the terminal provides the user interface you should power on the terminal before powering on the mainframe Mainframe Diagnostics The mainframe runs diagnostics to functionally check the internal components and operating software When the power on diagnostics are successfully completed most instrument functions are verified NOTE Diagnostics normally run at power on unless you specify Execute Custom in the Diagnostics field in the Boot Option overlay In this case the diagnostics will execute on the next power on cycle after meeting the conditions in the overlay Refer to Boot Options Overlay on page 3 57 for more information Power on diagnostics take approximately 10 seconds for each module installed in the mainframe If any errors occur you can display the error indication in the Diagnostics menu The menu reports the diagnostic results with a PASS or FAIL indication If a diagnostic error is found the system displays a four digit error code adjacent to the faulty module in the Diagnostics menu In the event a failure occurs record all displayed error information and contact your local Tektronix service center Terminal Diagnostics The terminal is tested by a Kernel Self Test and an Extended Self Test The Kernel Self Test performs the minimum hardware tests to ensure that the terminal will boot The test is executed at power on and takes
240. nt has been detected type y in response UNREF FILE l OWNER 0 MODE M SIZE S MTIME M CLEAR DAS System User Manual An unreferenced file has been detected type y in response If the file has a size greater than 0 run the file system Install utility Verify option to ensure that no system files have been deleted D 13 Appendix D Loading System Software Table D 4 Phase 4 File System Check Error Messages Cont Message UNREF DIR I OWNER O MODE M Explanation An unreferenced directory has been detected type y in response If the file has a size SIZE S MTIME M CLEAR greater than 0 run the file system Install utility Verify option to ensure that no system files have been deleted BAD DUP FILE I I OWNER 0 MODE M A file inode containing bad blocks of duplicate blocks has been detected type y in SIZE S MTIME M CLEAR response If the file has a size greater than 0 run the file system Install utility Verify option to ensure that no system files have been deleted BAD DUP DIR I I OWNER 0 MODE M A directory inode containing bad blocks or duplicate blocks has been detected type y SIZE S MTIME M CLEAR in response If the directory has a size greater than 0 run the file system Install utility Verify option to ensure that no system files have been deleted FREE INODE COUNT WRONG IN SUP An inconsistency in the free inode count has been detected The actual number of ERBLK FIX fr
241. ntry does not match an available selection DAS System User Manual Appendix C Error Messages Table C 1 Error Messages Cont Error Message No more entries to delete Key ignored No more groups to delete No more pods to delete in this group No more than n sequences may be entered Key ignored Explanation There are no more items to delete The function key is ignored There are no more groups to delete The function key is ignored There are no more pods to delete The function key is ignored The maximum number of sequences has already been entered The function key is ignored No more than 256 conversion rules may be entered Key ignored The maximum number of conversion rules has already been entered The function key is ignored No more than 8 fields may be entered in a sequence Key ignored The maximum number of fields has already been entered in this sequence The function key is ignored No Power Up restore System config does not match The system hardware configuration does not match the configuration in the Power Up Setup file The system powered on to its default settings No Power Up restore Last shutdown was abnormal The previous shut down was not normal The system powered on to its default settings No S W Normal No Start System resources cannot be allocated Not converted Not found No valid acquisition data No valid runtime or acquisition dat
242. nts refer to Mainframe Power Requirements on page 1 8 Module Power Requirements Different combinations of modules requires that different amounts of power be supplied by the Master mainframe or Expansion mainframe Some combinations may cause the line current to exceed the limits of the power cord and power supply being used To determine which power cord supply is required check the terminal display during power on for a message describing the total wattage for the modules currently installed in each attached mainframe Note This power on message is erased after the Menu Selection overlay displays Compare the total card wattage requirements listed in Table 1 3 with the available mainframe power listed in Tables 1 1 and 1 2 If the installed modules require more power than is available from your current power cord supply you must upgrade the mainframe to meet those requirements NOTE If you changed the configuration of cards in the mainframe since the last power down verify that the current power cord supply supports the new configuration If you plan to add other modules to your system later check the power values in Tables 1 1 1 2 and 1 3 to ensure that the total wattage required by the new configuration can be supplied by your current mainframe power cord supply Table 1 3 lists the power consumed for each module This table can also be used when calculating the amount of power required for your specific config
243. nu The overlay shown in Figure 3 9 defines the conditions under which repeated or multiple acquisitions will stop After you identify the Autorun parameters in the Autorun Definition overlay and you change the Run Mode field in the Cluster Setup menu to Autorun you are ready to compare reference memory data to acquired data Select function key F1 START to begin the compare operation Instead of stopping after the first acquisition the system compares the acquired data to the data contained in the selected reference memory file s If the selected module or cluster is autorun ning the number of times it has started and restarted 1s shown in the upper right corner of the status line You can view the status of all modules and clusters operating in the Autorun mode along with the number of times each has started in the System Monitor menu The Autorun count for the selected module is also displayed on the Module Status line at the top of the current menu The system compares the acquired data and reference memory data sequentially for each module with a compare definition The system continues the comparison until it finds a difference between the acquired data and the reference memory data or until there is no more data to compare If the system meets the stop conditions identified in the Compare Definition fields of the Autorun Definition overlay or if you press F1 STOP the system stops If it does not meet the stop conditions it contin
244. nu lets you create and edit symbol tables Symbol tables are files of alphanumeric symbol names and associated data values There can be up to 5 000 symbols in each symbol table Large symbol tables can slow the response time of the operating system You can use no more than 50 symbol tables at one time Symbol tables can be created using the Symbol Editor utility menu or transferred from a host computer and edited using this menu Each entry in a symbol table consists of an alphanumeric symbol name with its associated numeric value or range of values After you create a symbol table you can specify the symbol table file for the appropriate channel group in the Channel menu and use symbolic names as a substitute for numeric values in the Trigger Setup menu and in State and Disassembly Display menus Symbol tables perform like look up tables For example if the address of a printer I O port is at address F734BC you can define a symbol printer port corresponding to that value Then in the Trigger menu you can specify the symbol name as the word recognizer value and cause the module to trigger when printer port F734BC appears on the address bus Alternatively you can specify symbolic display radix for the address channel group and the symbol name printer port will be displayed in the State menu every time F734BC appears on the address bus Two types of symbol tables are possible range symbol tables and pattern symbol tables Range symbols rep
245. number of clocks to fill the remainder of the acquisition memory after the acquisition trigger event has occurred When the acquisition module has triggered and filled its memory both the acquisition and pattern generator modules will stop To automatically display the acquired data when the cluster stops start the cluster from a setup or display menu of the acquisition module DAS System User Manual Reference Autorun Comparisons To repeatedly acquire and compare data acquired by an acquisition module to the Between a Refmem and data in a reference memory until the data is equal or not equal follow these steps Acquired Data 1 Forma cluster containing the acquisition module in the Cluster Definition overlay of the System Configuration menu Or form a cluster containing an acquisition module and a pattern generator if you are going to use the pattern generator to stimulate the system under test 2 Set up the menu of the acquisition module to capture data to which subsequent data will be compared The initial acquisition will be saved as a reference memory The reference memory is used when the system is operating in the Autorun mode to compare newly acquired data against 3 Setup the Clock menu External is usually used and the Trigger menu to ensure that data is acquired consistently on each cycle 4 Acquire data for the reference memory Save the data as a reference memory in the Save Restore menu 5 Select Autorun in t
246. o return to the original mode of operation all that is necessary is to restore the image from the hard disk If you will be switching modes often you can alternate between saved images rather than reload software from the floppy disks NOTE You must have an image saved on the hard disk before you attempt to restore an image if not the current image will be lost DAS System User Manual Appendix E Configuration Utility User created files such as saved setups reference memories and trigger libraries remain in place when you save or restore an image The files do not become part of the saved image and are not replaced when you restore an image Therefore when you convert a system from one mode of operation to another by saving then restoring or installing new system software existing user files that were present in the original mode will still be present in the new mode It is not necessary to save the user files separately when switching modes although doing a backup before such a major change is always a good idea Likewise saving a system software image does not make a copy of the user files and is not a substitute for a backup Be aware that a saved image of system software can only be restored once After it is restored the saved image no longer exists Therefore if you alternate between different versions of system software you must resave the current system software before each restore operation Restoring an image t
247. o the acquisition or pattern generation circuit card The term 92C96 refers to the 92C96 Data Acquisition Module The 92C96 is the configurable 92A96 Data Acquisition Module The 92C96 functions identically to the 92A96 Data Acquisition Module The tilde symbol represents active low signals Earlier references to the DAS included the following terms DAS 9200 The nomenclature for earlier versions of the digital analysis system DAS 9221 DAS 9200 SE The various names assigned to the mainframe 9200T and 9201T These were the names of early non X terminal versions of the standard terminals for the DAS DAS System User Manual Getting Started Product Description DAS System User Manual This chapter introduces you to the Digital Analysis System DAS and provides instructions for starting to use the system The Digital Analysis System DAS is a highly modular family of digital analysis tools including a mainframe a color terminal acquisition and pattern generation modules application software packages and probes You select the tools and configure them to suit your needs The result is a custom digital analysis system tailored to your own applications You can use the DAS in one of two ways as a stand alone digital analysis system or as an networked digital analysis system The DAS NT is the networked version while the DAS XP is the stand alone version When used in the stand alone configuration the DAS can be con
248. ode of operation you can restore the previously saved image from the hard disk If you plan to switch modes often you can alternate between saved images rather than reloading software from the floppy disks You must have an image saved on the hard disk before you attempt to restore an image if not the current image will be lost Once you save an image you cannot use the image You have to restore an image before you can use it In other words the saved image is inactive until you restore it You can have more than one inactive image saved on the hard disk however you can have only one active image DAS System User Manual E 3 Appendix E Configuration Utility Restore Image of Saved System Software E 4 User created files such as saved setups reference memories and trigger libraries remain in place when you save or restore an image The files do not become part of the saved image and are not replaced when you restore an image Therefore when you convert a system from one mode of operation to another by saving then restoring or installing new system software existing user files that were present in the original mode will still be present in the new mode It is not necessary to save the user files separately when switching modes although doing a backup before such a major change is always a good idea Likewise saving a system software image does not make a copy of the user files and is not a substitute for a backup Be aware
249. of the software applications that support the acquisition module in addition to the General Purpose and High Speed Timing support Once you choose a software support your instrument will automatically define the Setup menus 3 Point the mouse at the High Speed Timing selection or any other selection in the Software Support field and press the right button The pop up menu will close and the High Speed Timing selection will be listed in the field However before any changes can take effect you will be asked to confirm your action You can always respond to a query by pressing the keys as described in the query message or use the mouse To confirm your action with the mouse point the mouse to the center of the query message and press the left button To abort or reject your action point the mouse anywhere outside of the message and press the left button the select field will return to its previous selection and no changes will take place 4 While the query message is displayed point the mouse outside of the message and press the left button to abort the selection DAS System User Manual Operating Basics Set Up the Channel Menu DAS System User Manual Besides selecting the software support you can also use the Config menu to define the memory depth of the acquisition The Config menu also gives you a visual indication of how the module input and output signals are defined After defining the contents of the Config menu the
250. ogether such that the clock edge is always active You have assigned a module to more than one cluster If you press the Return key the specified cluster will be destroyed You ve defined a cluster with no modules this cluster definition cannot be saved If you press the Return key the cluster definition will be deleted A Compound Eventcan contain only one counter or timer The Store Event and Combination selections in the storage field are not valid if the third clause in the last fourth State is currently in use The width ofthe conversion destination must be equal to or greater than the source width Counter not available 2 Timers in use Only two counter timer resources are available Counter or Timer unavailable 2 Counters and or Timers maximum Only two counter timer resources are available Current clock equation fully expanded You can have a maximum of four lines in a 92A96 clock equation Cursor must be in an Action Macro Position cursor on the Action Macro you wantto change and press the function key again Cursor must be in an Event Macro Position cursor on the Event Macro you wantto change and press the function key again DAS System User Manual Appendix C Error Messages Table C 1 Error Messages Cont Error Message Cursor must be in the State to be deleted Data channel deskew is suggested when Clks Quals are redeskewed Explanation In order to dele
251. old 32 or Advance S 32 instruction s You must confirm your choice if you press the Return key all empty groups or pods will be deleted Press the Return key to verify that you want to remove the instruction press the Esc key to cancel operation Press Return to remove If IRQ J ump Call and or Return instruction s or press Esc to cancel Press Return to remove If Full J ump If End Jump Reload and or Incr P age instruc tion s or press Esc to cancel Press Return to remove Return instruction or press Esc to cancel Press Return to restore default channel groups or press Esc to cancel Press Return to restore default channel names or press Esc to cancel Press Return to restore default channels or press Esc to cancel Press Return to restore default group ordering or press Esc to cancel Press Return to restore default inhibit masks or press Esc to cancel Print unable to open prolog file Press the Return key to verify that you want to remove the instruction press the Esc key to cancel operation Press the Return key to verify that you want to remove the instruction press the Esc key to cancel operation Press the Return key to verify that you want to remove the instruction press the Esc key to cancel operation You must confirm your choice if you press the Return key all default channel groups will be restored You must confirm your choi
252. on Messages displayed at the bottom of the screen instruct you when to insert the source and destination disks you verify each step by selecting or pressing the Return key You can also duplicate 720 Kbyte floppy disks that have been previously formatted on a 720 Kbyte machine However you cannot duplicate the contents of a 720 Kbyte floppy disk to a 1 44 Mbyte floppy disk or vice versa Prior to duplicating a floppy disk the system checks the destination floppy disk to see if it has been formatted If the disk has not been formatted or if it has an incompatible format the disk will be reformatted DAS System User Manual 3 35 Reference Install Application Operation Remove Application Operation Backup User Files Operation 3 36 The Install Application operation loads an application program from floppy disks onto the hard disk This operation lets you access the functions of that applica tion through the menus Included with each application software package is a manual that describes the operation of that application Messages displayed on the screen instruct you on how to proceed with the install operation Any application specific instructions are included in the application user manual The Remove Application operation removes previously installed application software from the hard disk The Remove Application operation functions the same as the Delete File operation except that it frees disk space by removing applicat
253. on against a reference memory until a predefined condition is met Card An individual circuit board which occupies a single slot in the logic analyzer mainframe An individual card may or may not constitute a module some modules consist of multiple card sets See also Module Clause A trigger specification term The combination of an Event and an Action When the Event is satisfied the Action is performed See also Compound Action Compound Event Simple Action and Simple Event Clock Cycle A clock sequence that includes both high and low going transitions Glossary 5 Glossary Glossary 6 Clock Equation The Boolean combination of events needed to generate a storage clock You can define a variety of clock inputs and link them using Boolean operators Data will only be sampled and stored in memory when this clock equation is true Clock Qualification The process of filtering out irrelevant data by combining an acquisition clock with one or more bus signals Clock Qualifier An external signal that acts as a gate for the acquisition clock When the external signal is false the acquisition clock is not allowed to load acquired data into the acquisition memory See also Acquisition Memory Cluster A group of modules started and stopped as a unit collected to perform a specific function Clusters are defined by the user in the System Configura tion menu Only clustered modules can be time correlated or pass signals
254. on invalid Value changed it must be a multiple of 5 ns Waiting for Stop This is a fill in field type in your selection Only decimal values can be entered in this field Enter a number between 0 and 9 Only two counter timer resources are available You must remove one counter if you wantto use a timer The installation of the selected software support has failed one or more support files are missing The 9202XT server is not running or the network connection is missing The X server address specified in the Configuration utility may be different from the Internet address setin the 9202XT terminal display A jump label is specified buta label has notactually been entered in the labe field for a sequence A jump label is specified buta label has notactually been entered in the labe field for a sequence A jump label is specified buta label has notactually been entered in the labe field for a sequence A jump label is specified buta label has not actually been entered in the label field for a sequence The last system power off occurred from unknown causes This type of power off may corrupt the disk file system but it is usually fixed atthe next power on All Word and Channel Event recognizers have been allocated The selected Word or Channel Event cannot be accommodated This clock operates in 5 ns increments Trigger conditions have been satisfied and memory is full however the manual stop mo
255. on of the field in which the cursor currently resides Part of the Notes System Fill in Field A display field that has no list of choices Instead you enter a value by typing a string of characters into the field DAS System User Manual Glossary DAS System User Manual Flag A bit that can be set as a marker A flag can be used as either an event or an action in a trigger specification program When used as an event a flag is tested for true false value like any other event when used as an action a flag can simply be set or cleared as the result of a condition being satisfied Glitch A signal that makes a transition through the threshold voltage two or more times between successive sample clocks Signals that are faster than the sampling rate such as noise spikes or pulse ringing can be captured by a logic analyzer as glitches only applicable to asynchronous acquisitions Hold Time The length of time a signal must remain stable after the acquisition clock has occurred in order to be considered valid Interactive Triggering The use of trigger setups to allow two modules to work together Interactive triggering might involve such applications as the passing of trigger signals from one module to another the arming of one module by another and intermodule handshake capability Internal Clock A clock mode in which the sampling of input logic signals occurs asynchro nously to the activity of the system under test The repre
256. on the modules in your logic analyzer Setup Time Length of time an input signal must be present before being clocked to be considered stable and valid Glossary 13 Glossary Glossary 14 Signal Event When a trigger menu includes a signal from another module in an event clause that signal is called a signal event See also Simple Event Simple Action A trigger specification term Any action that can be performed by an acquisition module running in real time See also Compound Action Simple Event Any of several conditions events that can be detected by a running acquisition module Examples of simple events include word recognizers timer counters external triggers and signals passed from other modules Simple events can be combined with Boolean operators to create Compound Events Skew The relative time difference between input channels specified in terms of one edge relative to another The misrepresentation of data caused by parallel channels with different propagation delays Split screen A feature available in some display menus that lets you divide the screen display area into two data windows split either horizontally or vertically Each window has its own cursor and can display its own source of data and its own display type Stand alone A self contained logic analysis system rather than a remote host configura tion in which the logic analyzer acts as a peripheral to a host computer State A trigger
257. or module It is an 18 channel sequential stimulus system This option can operate to a maximum of 100 MHz The total memory is 16 K for each channel NOTE For more detailed information on individual modules including specifications and complete menu field descriptions refer to the appropriate user manual System Software The DAS is controlled by system software which is stored on the hard disk drive To determine the version number of the software currently installed in the main frame check the Diagnostics menu The Version menu displays the version numbers of modules in the mainframe both menus are in the Utility menu group System software loads into memory RAM at power on and performs the following tasks m Manages system resources that is memory CPU storage devices common control functions files and file access and data communication I O devices m Provides system service subroutines so that acquisition and pattern genera tion modules and applications programs have a common set of subroutines W Provides common system control functions such as start stop control and allocation of system hardware resources m Controls communication between standard subroutines modules application software and I O devices standard optional and mass storage As a backup the DAS can also load system software from a set of floppy disks 1 22 DAS System User Manual Getting Started Application Software First Time O
258. or output terminals of the product ensure that the product is properly grounded To avoid electric shock or fire hazard do not operate this product with covers or panels removed To avoid fire hazard use only the fuse type and rating specified for this product To avoid electric shock do not operate this product in wet or damp conditions To avoid injury or fire hazard do not operate this product in an explosive atmosphere To avoid injury remove jewelry such as rings watches and other metallic objects Do not touch exposed connections and components when power is present Product Damage Precautions Use Proper Power Source DAS System User Manual Do not operate this product from a power source that applies more than the voltage specified xi General Safety Summary Use Proper Voltage Setting Provide Proper Ventilation Do Not Operate With Suspected Failures Before applying power ensure that the line selector is in the proper position for the power source being used To prevent product overheating provide proper ventilation If you suspect there is damage to this product have it inspected by qualified service personnel Safety Terms and Symbols Terms in This Manual A AN Terms on the Product Symbols on the Product Xii These terms may appear in this manual WARNING Warning statements identify conditions or practices that could result in injury or loss of life CAUTION
259. orma cluster containing an acquisition module in the Cluster Definition overlay of the System Configuration menu 2 Access the Signal Definition overlay of the Cluster Setup menu add a signal and set Components to Internal Type to Normal and Line to Don t Care To send a signal with the Event In signal unused continue with these steps 3 Define the signal added in step 2 as an Output from the acquisition module to initiate the signal being sent to the external equipment 4 Change the Components field to External Event Out to be Hi True or Lo True for the 92C02 Module and exit the overlay 5 In the Trigger menu set the event for a word event counter value or any other event appropriate for your application 6 Inthe Trigger menu set the action to Assert or Pulse the signal defined in step 3 when the event occurs DAS System User Manual Reference To receive a signal with the Event Out signal unused 1 Forma cluster containing an acquisition module in the Cluster Definition overlay of the System Configuration menu 2 Access the Signal Definition overlay of the Cluster Setup menu add a signal and set Components to Internal Type to Normal and Line to Don t Care 3 Define the signal added in step 2 as an Input to the acquisition module receiving the signal from the external equipment 4 Change the Components field to External set Event In to be Hi True or Lo True for the 92C02 Module and exit the ove
260. ose the overlay by selecting function key F8 EXIT amp SAVE Whenever you need information on a field or function key the on line notes can be quite helpful DAS System User Manual 2 21 Operating Basics Defining Setup Menus Set Up the Config Menu 2 22 Now that you have become familiar with the basic mouse operation you are ready to learn more about using the Setup and Display menus for acquiring data and displaying results The first step would be to connect the mainframe to the system under test This basically means connecting probes For the purposes of this tutorial you will not connect probes to a system under test After you connect the probes to the system under test you will normally set up the Config Configuration menu NOTE If your system has a pattern generation module select the acquisition module in the Menu Selection overlay Do this by selecting the MENU button at the bottom of the menu and pointing the mouse at the acquisition module under the Module column Press the left mouse button and then return to the Diagnos tics menu 1 To quickly select the Config menu point the mouse at the CONFIG button on the lower left side of the window and press the left mouse button The system displays the Config menu 2 Pointthe mouse at the highlighted Software Support field and press the right button to open and display the different software support selections The Software Support field lists all
261. ot plan to use the GPIB feature on the 92C02 Module you can leave the GPIB cable either connected or disconnected without affecting the other functions of the module Use the following steps to connect the GPIB cable to the Master mainframe 1 Press the GPIB cable male connector onto the port connector 2 Hand tighten the two screws on both sides of the GPIB connector to hold it in place 3 Connectthe other end of the GPIB cable to your host computer in a similar manner Mainframe Grounding To reduce susceptibility to line spike or line variations it is recommended that you connect a ground lead from the ground lug on the rear of the mainframe to ground a short lead made from braided strands is recommended DAS System User Manual 1 15 Getting Started Host Computer or Serial You can connect the DAS to a host computer or to a serial printer with a serial Printer Connections cable Connect the serial cable to either the Host or Auxiliary 9 pin DCE ports on the rear of the mainframe If the host computer has a 9 pin DTE male connector connect straight through using a 9 wire cable with a 9 pin female connector on one end and a 9 pin male connector on the other end If your host computer or serial printer has a 25 pin male connector use an 8 wire cable with connectors wired as shown in Table 1 5 Table 1 5 9 pin DCE to 25 Pin DTE Cable Connections 9 Pin Male Connector Port Signal Name mainframe End Terminal Connecto
262. oth complete and correct Installing Base System The Base System Software contains the essential software for the mainframe Software Use this program to add or replace Tektronix supplied files The program will not disturb user generated files such as reference memories and system setups If the BOOT gt prompt is already displayed proceed to step 4 If not begin with step 1 1 Power off the mainframe Face the rear of the mainframe and locate the DIP switches mounted on the Controller board refer to Figure D 1 on page D 3 2 Place DIP switch 1 the left most DIP switch in the closed down position Place DIP switch 2 in the open up position Leave all other DIP switches in their original positions 3 Poweron the terminal Power on the mainframe wait for the prompt BOOT gt and then insert the INSTALL floppy disk DAS System User Manual D 15 Appendix D Loading System Software D 16 4 In response to the BOOT gt prompt type f install and press the Return key The following menu is displayed Press i to install Base System Software Optional System Software or Application Software Press r to remove Optional System Software or Application Software Press v to verify currently installed software Selection 5 Type i to start the system software installation procedure The following menu will appear immediately File System Installation Procedure When the BOOT gt prompt appears
263. ou must remove the 92A60 90 Memory board before you can disconnect the Buffer Probe cables and remove the 92A60 90 Controller board m f your mainframe contains a 92HS8 Master interface card and an Expander interface card in adjacent slots you must first remove the Master interface card to avoid damaging components on the Expander interface card Perform the following steps to remove a module from a mainframe 1 Remove the top cover and the card cage door as previously described 2 Insert the two board ejector tools into the card to be removed as shown in Figure F 4 3 Use the ejector tools to gently pull the module from the connectors CAUTION To avoid bending the backplane alignment pins apply even force on the ejector tools while pulling the module from the mainframe connectors 4 Grasp the sides of the module and pull it from the card cage 5 Replace the card cage door and ejector tools before installing the top cover If you ordered your mainframe with a 92C02 GPIB Expansion Module the GPIB connector should already be installed However if you ordered the 92C02 Module separately from the mainframe you can install the GPIB connector to the mainframe by performing the following steps 1 Install the 92C02 Module in slot 8 of your mainframe using the steps given earlier in this appendix To give you enough working room inside the mainframe you should temporarily remove the card in slot 7 if there is one installe
264. pad 9 Page Down R15 Keypad 3 Keypad 3 Select Previous Keypad Keypad Select Next Keypad Keypad Open amp Close Keypad Enter Keypad Enter Scroll Left Up Ins Keypad Ins or Keypad 0 Ins Keypad Ins or Keypad 0 DAS System User Manual Operating Basics Table 2 4 Keyboard Equivalents Cont Key Function Typical X Terminal key Tektronix X Terminal Key Scroll Right Down Del Keypad DelorKeypad Del Keypad Del or Keypad Call Menu Selection Overlay Function Key F9 Function Key F9 Print L6 Copy Not Present Notes Help Not Present Break L1 Stop Not Present Rubout Shift Backspace Shift Backspace You may want to experiment moving between menus using the on screen buttons to become familiar with their operation Later in this tutorial you will learn how to go through the basic Setup menus and use the on screen buttons to scroll through data NOTE You can always return to the Menu Selection overlay by selecting the MENU button at the bottom of the menu or by pointing the mouse at the Status bar at the top of the menu and pressing the left mouse button Function Keys You have already seen how to use the basic function keys to enter and leave the Set Date Time overlay You have also learned how to use the function keys with the mouse and from the keyboard This section provides more information on using the function keys Function keys F1 through F8 are display dependent In other words t
265. pe the name of the operation or enough letters to uniquely identify the operation and then press the Return key File Sets A file set consists of a number of files that have been combined The system automatically creates file sets for certain DASdisk file types Any file type that exists on the hard disk as a directory of files rather than just one file becomes a file set when it is copied to the floppy disk Currently the DASdisk file types that are file sets include the Trigger Compare Mask Reference Memory and Setup file types DASdisk provides two operations for handling file sets the Unpack and Pack operations The Unpack operation lets you separate a file set into its individual files the Pack operation lets you combine a group of files into a file set You must perform the Pack operation on files that the system expects to be file sets Gf they have been updated before writing those files onto a floppy disk See The Unpack Operation on page G 3 and The Pack Operation on page G 4 NOTE Most files on the DAS are binary files G 2 DAS System User Manual Appendix G DASdisk Utility Change Operation Init Operation List Operation Dir Operation Unpack Operation DAS System User Manual When the DASdisk program executes the first prompt asks you for the drive that contains the floppy disk You can use the Change Operation to redesig nate the floppy disk drive whenever desired To redesignate the drive
266. pecifies the Internet address of the X server that displays the window in the 9202XT or 92X Term Autostart operating modes In this mode the instrument automatically initiates an X window display on the default X server when the instrument is powered on If this parameter is set to the special value of Use Name then the default X server name is used instead of the address In this case the default X server name and address must be entered in the etc hosts file If the operating mode is set to something other than 92X Term Autostart or 9202XT this parameter has no affect Your system administrator should provide you with the correct Internet address for your default X Server Enter the new value in the format XXX XXX XXX XXX where each XXX represents a decimal number in the range of 0 to 255 or enter 1 to select the Use Name option and press the Return key To retain the current address press the Return key without entering any numbers Selecting item L from the Main menu lets you set the service number assigned to the DAS LAN PCL LAND service This number is used by host software requesting LAN PCL services from the instrument The legal range of values for this entry is 1025 to 65535 Host software provided by Tektronix assumes that this service is assigned the value 10999 f you specify a different value you must also change the host based software Enter a new value in the range of 1025 to 65535 or press the Return key withou
267. perate in the stand alone mode If you want to use the default factory settings enter Yes or Y at the prompt The utility will load the default settings If you do not want to use the default settings enter No or N at the prompt and you will be returned to the main menu DAS System User Manual E 5 Appendix E Configuration Utility Factory Default network configuration NETWORK OPTIONS Current Factory DAS Network Name DAS Internet Address 123 123 125 2 10 0 0 1 Network Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 255 0 0 0 Gateway Internet Address 123 123 123 14 0 0 0 0 X Server Name eldar 0 0 TEK DISPLAY 0 0 X Server Internet Address 123 21 1 0 10 0 0 2 Do you want to use the Factory settings Yes No Figure E 3 Configuration Utility Factory Default Network Configuration Set Operating Mode Select item O to set the operating start up mode for the system software There are different operating modes 9202XT mode 92XTerm Manual mode and 92XTerm Automatic mode The available operating modes depend on the system software The 9202XT mode is for use with the color X terminals while the two 92XTerm modes are for use with work station X server displays Table E 1 lists the software versions and the operating modes they support Table E 1 System Software vs Operating Modes Operating Mode DAS NT System Software 92XTerm Manual Ni X 92XTerm Autostart X Enter an X for the 9202XT operating mode an M to select the 92X Ter
268. peration Performing an Acquisition Moving Forward DAS System User Manual Application software packages are available each package includes an instruc tion manual Refer to the appropriate manual for more detailed information A list of application software currently installed is shown in the Version menu Use the Disk Services menu to install application software from floppy disks The Microprocessor Support packages provide both hardware and software mnemonic disassembly formats Each support package includes a microproces sor specific probe adapter which provides the hardware necessary to properly acquire data from the microprocessor After connecting the terminal and the probes you should be ready to power on the instrument Power on the terminal and then the mainframe The terminal performs its power on checks then the power on sequence for the system begins The DAS temporarily displays a power on screen with the product logo system software version and information on the hard and floppy disk drives When the power on sequence is complete the system displays the Menu Selection overlay You are now ready to use the DAS Acquire data by using the following basic steps 1 Connect the probes from the DAS to the system under test If necessary refer to your acquisition module user manual for details on connecting probes 2 Set up the acquisition parameters by either programming the Setup menus or by restoring a setup f
269. ponent failure or corruption of the system software 1 CE Certification only applies to the following DAS 9200 Series units DASXP Opt 04 DASNT Opt 04 DAS9221 Opt 04 Degradation of performance may occur momentarily during the electrostatic discharge fast transient power line surge or electromagnetic field in the way of incorrectly acquired data which in turn may cause false triggers or other momentary erratic operation of the instrument Corruption of system software includes any other non temporal result which prevents the instrument from returning to its normal operating mode Table A 2 Mainframe and 92C02 Module Mechanical Characteristic Description Weight Mainframe 57 lbs 25 kg no accessories 74 lbs 33 kg fully loaded 92C02 Module Approx 1 Ib 10 oz 0 73 kg Physical Dimensions Mainframe Height 11 13 in 28 3 cm with feet 10 5 in 26 7 cm rackmount height Width 16 8 in 26 7 cm Depth 23 5 in 59 7 cm 92C02 Module Height 10 0 in 25 4 cm Length 15 5 in 39 4 cm A 2 DAS System User Manual Appendix A Specifications V V 16 8 in 26 7 cm i 1113in 28 3 cm 23 5 in 59 7 cm _ ___ gt Figure A 1 Mainframe Unit Dimensions Table A 3 Electrical Characteristic Serial Communication Interface Operational Modes Baud Rates Terminal P ort
270. pt Microsoft Windows File format BMP Version Adobe 3 0 Windows 3 1 compatible PC Paintbrush PCX X11 Window Dump XWD HP Laserjet and Deskjet Version 5 X11 R4 compatible If you encounter problems printing to a remote file or to a remote printer have your system administrator check the network permissions You may also need to set up an entry in the rhosts file to allow a connection from the DAS If necessary your system administrator can set up the rhosts file for you If you send the output to either a local or network printer the printer must be capable of printing the output format as specified in the Format field Uses Renate Path Print fobs being prepared for nutgut Fal DEFAULT FORMAT Figure 3 24 Print Screen Setup Overlay PRIHT lur FEH 3 51 Reference 3 52 Kermit File Transfers When you direct the output to a network printer additional information appears in the overlay as shown in Figure 3 25 The bottom of the overlay displays status information in the print queue Function key F5 CLEAR QUEUE lets you abort any print jobs and clear them from the local print queue on the DAS After you enter the changes in the overlay save the changes by selecting function key F8 EXIT amp SAVE When you use the Print Screen tool the output will be stored in the format and output destination you specified Commun Cat PRIHT SCREEN SETUP Send Output Tor Wot HE Hedin Nonockr
271. ption If you only press the Return key the default action inside the square brackets will be selected D 4 DAS System User Manual Appendix D Loading System Software Format Setup Menu A DAS System User Manual This menu initiates the formatting of your hard disk it also lets you specify the swap space size value This value will be used the next time you request a swap space size change in the Change Swap Size submenu or Initiate Format in this menu FORMAT SETUP MENU Current Active Options Swap Size 6 Meg Recommended Selections Available a Initiate Format Use Recommended Settings Defects Manufacturers and Grown Recommended Defects Manufacturers Only Swap Size 6 Meg Recommended Swap Size 8 Meg Go to Main Menu Enter choice default g The selections in the Format Setup menu let you format the hard disk change the swap size option or return to the main menu Option c maps out the manufacturer s bad block list and any bad blocks that may have been detected by earlier format operations Option d maps out the manufacturer s bad block list only To make a selection enter the letter preceding the selection description If you only press the Return key the default action inside the square brackets will be selected If you select Initiate Format the SCSI hard disk internal disk format command will be initiated The current active swap size option will be used during the format oper
272. r Protective Ground Shield Shield Shield Carrier Detect Pin1 Pin1 Receive Data Pin2 Pin2 Transmit Data Pin3 Pin3 Data Terminal Ready Pin4 Pin4 Signal Ground Pin5 Pin5 Data Set Ready Pin 61 No Connection Request To Send Pin7 Pin 7 Clear To Send Pin 8 Pin8 Pin 6 is pulled up to 5 V If your host computer or printer has a 25 pin DCE female connector you must provide a cable wired as shown in Table 1 6 Table 1 6 9 pin DCE to 25 Pin DCE Cable Connections 9 Pin Male Connector Port Signal Name mainframe End 25 Pin Male Connector Protective Ground Shield Shield Pin 1 Carrier Detect Pin 1 Pin 4 Receive Data Pin 2 Pin2 Transmit Data Pin 3 Pin 3 Data Terminal Ready Pin 4 Pin 5 Signal Ground Pin5 Pin7 Data Set Ready Pin 61 Pin 6 Request To Send Pin 7 Pin8 1 16 DAS System User Manual Getting Started Terminal Host and Auxiliary Port Baud Rate Selections DAS System User Manual Table 1 6 9 pin DCE to 25 Pin DCE Cable Connections Cont 9 Pin Male Connector Port Signal Name mainframe End 25 Pin Male Connector Clear To Send Pin 8 Pin 20 1 Pin 6 is pulled up to 5 V The serial printer connects to the Auxiliary port on the mainframe the connector is accessible on the rear panel When printing to a serial printer the Auxiliary Port output data format consists of 8 bits character no parity and one stop bit For specific information on using a printer with specific mod
273. r all input output buffers For more information refer to the DAS 9200 Programmatic Command Language User Manual Function key F3 PREVIOUS VALUES returns all fields to the values prior to entering this menu or to the values set the last time you selected this function key Function key F4 DEFAULT VALUES restores all fields to their default values The LAN overlay contains fields for information that is assigned by your system administrator This information is needed for your host or terminal to communi cate with the system and is required for initial start up It also contains status fields that provide information on the status of the 92LANSE subsystem Figure 3 23 shows an example of a typical LAN overlay 3 47 Reference You can view the LAN communication parameters but cannot change them You must use Appendix E Configuration Utility to change the networking parameters Utilities Commun cat die LAN SETUP AMD STATUS Ethernet 5stun Pame ITI eer DTE ai Hacks Server Status Lan Honi Eyan is up Ethernet koa LEES ERES ES Saryor Present tite 1 Listening Fi ESCAPE uw ust Pett iiia piii sabi Eu iT Figure 3 23 LAN Overlay The LAN overlay displays the following information m Name field This field specifies the name of the system When you establish communications with the system from a host you will use the name in this field This name serves only as a reference for connectin
274. r cord to the monitor power connector See gero ee ENS AM Power on the monitor and logic module Wait for the serial window to appear and then power on the mainframe The terminal should be set for the correct settings to communicate with the mainframe when it is shipped from the factory After powering on the terminal and the mainframe the terminal will display its Boot Monitor Table 1 4 lists the default boot parameters of the terminal If the terminal does not boot properly you should check the boot parameters against those in the table Table 1 4 Terminal Default Boot Parameters Parameter Default Value Parameter Default Value IADDR 10 0 0 2 DNODE 0 0 IHOST 10 0 0 1 BMETHOD ROM IMASK 255 0 0 0 BDISPLAY DISABLED IGATE 0 0 0 0 BAFROM NVRAM BPATH 05 On initial power on the default value is XP300 os XP10 os for the 9202XT and 9203XT Terminals and then changes to os The terminal should display a series of messages in the Boot Monitor When the boot process is complete the serial window will be displayed with the word Connected The serial window should then display the file system check messages as the system completes its boot process After a few moments the DAS display appears 1 13 Getting Started Mainframe Connections 1 14 After determining the location of your mainframe you are ready to connect the mainframe to the power source to the X Terminal or to a host computer network Expans
275. r port will always power on to a default baud rate of 9600 You can use the other switch settings to provide alternative baud rate settings The restore parameters setting causes the three ports to power on with the baud rates specified in the Communications menu It is recommended that you operate your DAS with all DIP switches in the up or Open position 117 Getting Started Software Installation 1 18 Table 1 7 Baud Rate DIP Switches Setting Switch Use Up Open Down Closed Result of Setting Boot Control Switches 1 amp 2 Up Up Normal system boot Down Up BOOT gt prompt Up Down Not used Down Down Not used Terminal Port Switches 3 amp 4 Up Up 38400 baud default Up Down 2400 baud Down Up 1200 baud Down Down Restore P arameters Host Port Switches 5 amp 6 Up Up 9600 baud default Up Down 2400 baud Down Up 1200 baud Down Down Restore P arameters Auxiliary P ort Switches 7 amp 8 Up Up 9600 baud default Up Down 2400 baud Down Up 1200 baud Down Down Restore Parameters The DAS comes with the system software already installed and ready to use If you order your DAS with any application software products such as one of the microprocessor disassembler products you must install the software on the hard disk before using it Refer to your application software user manual for information on installing the application software A copy of the back up system so
276. r to the 92816 32 Pattern Generation Module User Manual F 7 Appendix F User Service Mainframe Guidelines Tables F 1 and F 2 define how to use the slots in the mainframes Table F 1 Card Placement Guidelines Master Mainframe Slots Uses Qand1 Controller board and 92LANSE Module 2 through 7 No restrictions except 92C02 GPIB Expansion cards cannot be placed here 8 A 92HS8 Master card cannot be placed here If you use an Expansion mainframe this slot must contain a 92C02 GPIB Expansion card Do not place 92A16 16E 92496 or 92C 96 cards here due to cooling consider ations Table F 2 Card Placement Guidelines Expansion Mainframe Slots Uses 0 Expansion Slave board 2 through 7 No restrictions except 92C02 GPIB Expansion cards cannot be placed here 8 In the last or only Expansion mainframe in the chain you can place any card here except a 92HS8 Master card If you use other Expansion mainframes you must have a 92C02 Expansion card in slot 8 Do not place 92A16 16E 92A96 or 92C96 cards here due to cooling considerations Figure F 1 shows the general approach for spacing cards in the mainframe card cage for even distribution of cooling resources The top half shows card placement when cards will not be grouped into module formations cards not in adjacent slots the bottom half shows card placement for multicard modules and for cards that will be grouped into module formations Figure F 2 sho
277. ration of the DAS m Reference This chapter contains reference information on the system level menus and guidelines for multimodule operation XV Preface Manual Conventions xvi Appendices The appendices contain information on the product specifica tions acquisition and pattern generation module specifications are listed in the respective module user manuals product options and accessories error messages software installation procedures software configuration proce dures the DASdisk utility and user service procedures User service procedures provide guidelines for changing the configuration of the acquisition and pattern generation modules Glossary and Index If your are new to the DAS you should read the Getting Started and Operating Basics chapters before using the DAS for the first time You should also review the acquisition and pattern generation module user manuals to become familiar with the capabilities of the individual modules of the DAS The following terms and conventions are used throughout this manual The term mainframe refers to the mechanical chassis of the DAS The term system refers to the entire digital analysis system including the mainframe terminal and probes The term terminal refers to the color X terminal If you have a DAS NT system your DAS can be connected to a network and be controlled by X11 R4 workstations in addition to the X terminals The term module refers to either t
278. ration or press the Escape key to abort if you continue the operation you will be prompted to insert a new disk You can press the Escape Esc key at any time to abort the backup process DAS System User Manual Reference Restore User Files Operation DAS System User Manual NOTE Be sure to label each floppy disk with the volume number displayed on the screen The label will help you keep track of the disks If you decide to continue the backup operation after an error the system will restart the backup operation with the current disk or it will specify the volume number of an earlier disk If the backup operation requires more than one floppy disk the system will prompt you to insert the next disk Before writing data to the floppy disk the system verifies that the disk does not contain any information from a previous volume in the current backup process if it does the system displays an error message and prompts you to start over again When the backup operation is complete and no errors occurred the system displays the message Backup operation complete with no errors The Restore User Files operation allows you to restore user files from one or more volumes of floppy disks to the appropriate directories on the hard disk Select function key F8 EXECUTE OPERATION to begin the restore process You will be prompted to insert the first floppy disk insert the disk and press the Return key NOTE It is not a good
279. re displayed under the Cluster Contents column You can change the name of any cluster under the Cluster Contents column by selecting the Cluster Name field and entering a new name of up to ten alphanumeric characters Function key F2 CLUSTER ALL clusters all of the modules in the system The modules are put in either Cluster 1 or the cluster that the cursor is positioned on in the Cluster Name field Function key F3 CLEAR CLUSTER clears all of the modules from the cluster that the cursor is positioned on in the Cluster Name field Modules that were part of the cluster become unclustered and none is shown for them in the Cluster Select field Function key F4 CLEAR ALL clears all of the modules from all the clusters in the system All modules become unclustered indicated by none in the cluster Select field Function key F6 ALT CLUSTER alternates the contents of the screen to display the other four clusters DAS System User Manual 3 5 Reference Cluster Setup Menu 3 6 To create a cluster access the Cluster Definition overlay press function key F6 DEFINE CLUSTER in the System Configuration menu and move the cursor to the Cluster field next to the module you want to cluster Open the field and select the cluster name The default cluster names are Cluster 1 Cluster 2 and so on To change the cluster name move the cursor to the Cluster Name field of the cluster name you want to change Enter the new name All the modules assig
280. resent a contiguous set of integers marked by specific lower and upper bounds For example range symbols can be used to mark the boundaries of subroutines the location of global tables or the set of locations used by a peripheral Range symbols are typically used in displaying the address bus of a microprocessor When defining a range symbol table do not overlap ranges of values For example if SYMI covers the range 1000 3FFE and SYM2 covers 2000 2FFF then the values in range 2000 2FFF may be recognized as either SYM1 or SYM2 and the values in the range 3000 3FFF may not be recognized as SYM1s at all DAS System User Manual Reference Pattern symbols describe a pattern of bits Each bit in a pattern symbol can be 0 1 or X don t care Pattern symbols are used when a group of signals define a logical state For example a microprocessor has a set of pins that indicate the type of bus cycle in progress A memory read cycle may be indicated when the RD and MREQ pins are 0 logic low and the BUSAK and M1 pins are 1 logic high You can define a pattern symbol name called mem read that corresponds to bit pattern 1100 and thereby mark all memory read bus cycles in the State display menu For other bus cycles the logic state of these pins is also important and you can define different bit patterns for each cycle type To use symbolic names in module setup and display menus you must first perform the following tasks 1 Create a
281. rform the following steps 1 Inthe PC File Name field enter the name of the PC file you want to copy Pressing the Return key without entering a file name aborts the Write operation 2 Inthe Disk File Name field enter the file name that you want to use for the name of the file on the floppy disk Press the Return key DASdisk displays a list of file types If no name is entered the PC file name is used 3 Inthe File Type Number field enter the correct file type number If the correct file type is not listed add a file type using the Add operation 4 Enter Y to confirm the operation 5 Press any key to return to the Main menu If the named file already exists on the floppy disk an error message is displayed and the operation is not performed You will have to delete the file from the floppy disk using the Delete operation before the write can be performed DAS System User Manual Appendix G DASdisk Utility Delete Operation Quit Operation DAS System User Manual File names longer than 14 characters are truncated to 14 characters no warning message is displayed All alphanumeric characters and the following special characters are valid D v ge ch l You can only use one period in a file name and it cannot be the first character NOTE Make sure that you specify the correct file type when writing a PC file to the floppy disk For example putting a setup file on the floppy disk but identif
282. rk a data sequence location The data cursor becomes active once a data window for instance a state display or timing diagram is opened Delta Mark A user placed mark appears as a triangular delta symbol on a timing diagram display that can be used as either the start point or end point of a delta time measurement Delta Time The time difference between two points in memory For example the difference between a trigger point and the data cursor in a timing diagram display Demultiplex To identify and separate multiplexed signals for instance some signals from a microprocessor To separate different signals sharing the same line and organize those signals into useful information Deskew Removing or minimizing static time delay between signals with respect to each other Display Menu A general class of menus that allows you to view data that you have acquired Examples of display menus include State and Timing menus DNRZ Delayed Non Return to Zero data format This format lets you specify a delay value for the leading edge of a signal The signal will remain asserted until it is forced low by the next data value Don t Care A symbol X used in place of a numeric character to indicate that the value of a channel or character is not to be considered Edge A signal transition from low to high or high to low Glossary 7 Glossary Glossary 8 Edge Positioning The process of or ability to choose the relative positio
283. rlay 5 In the Trigger menu set the event to test for the signal defined in step 3 to be asserted 6 Inthe Trigger menu set the action to meet the needs of your application Printer and Hardcopy General Use DAS System User Manual The DAS provides different ways of capturing menus and printing data to meet most printing needs You can send the print data to a printer or save the data in a file for use with a text editor or in a host application Depending on whether the DAS is connected to a hosted network or is used in a self contained configura tion you can send the print data to one or more of the following destinations m A local file stored in the Print Output directory of the DAS m A local printer connected to the RS 232C Auxiliary port of the DAS W A remote network file m A network printer hosted or self contained The DAS provides two main tools for printing You can use the Print Screen tool to print an image of any one of the DAS menus screens You can use the Print Setup overlays available with most Setup and Display menus to print the setup data state data disassembly data and timing data according to the parameters specified in the individual Print Setup overlays For most printing you should use the Print Screen tool to capture and print data Use the Print Screen Setup overlay in the Communications menu to specify the print screen setups refer to Print Screen Setup Overlay on page 3 50 Then refer to Cap
284. rminal Do not continue with the instructions on the terminal screen until you have completed steps 4 through 15 of the following instructions The boot path information is case sensitive upper or lower case Be sure to copy the boot path exactly as displayed The terminal will not boot properly if the boot path is wrong Reset the terminal by pressing the Control Alt and Delete keys simulta neously When the Boot Monitor appears on the screen press the space bar to stop the boot process This prevents the terminal from completing the boot process before the parameters are set NOTE Some NVRAM parameters cannot be set at the Boot Monitor If you experience problems with the Flash procedure try restoring the factory settings of the terminal by issuing the NVFACTORY command and then returning to this procedure 5 10 Enter the Internet address for the terminal For example IADDR 123 21 1 0 Enter the Internet address for the system For example IHOST 123 123 125 2 Enter the Network Subnet Mask For example IMASK 255 255 255 0 Enter the Gateway Internet address if required For example IGATE 123 123 125 14 Enter the boot path name of the boot file For example if you have a 9204XT or 9205XT Terminal enter BPATH XP300 os If you have a 9202XT or 9203XT Terminal enter BPATH XP10 os Enter the boot method parameter that the X terminal will use after the Flash ROM update is complete by typing BMETHOD
285. rn to the Main menu NOTE Be sure that the file type you specify is a valid File Type If an invalid File Type name is used floppy disk files of the invalid type will show on the screen but they cannot be copied to the hard disk Use the Remove operation to delete invalid File Types The Remove Operation lets you remove a file type You may want to use this operation to remove a file type that was added by mistake You can also use the Remove operation to delete file types you never intend to use You can use the Add operation to add file types that you remove and later need The Remove menu that appears when you select the Remove operation from the Main menu To remove a file type enter the number of the file type to remove and press Y to confirm the operation Press the Return key to return to the Main menu To read a file or a file set from a floppy disk to the PC select the Read operation in the Main menu and perform the following steps 1 Enter the name of the file in the File Name field press the Return key Pressing the Return key without entering a file name aborts the Read operation 2 Enter the PC file name in the PC File Name field press the Return key DASdisk displays a list of file types If no name is entered the disk file name is used 3 Inthe File Type Number field enter the correct file type number from the list of file types If the correct file type is not on the list you must add the file type to the l
286. rom the hard disk drive 3 Acquire data normally you can press the F1 START function key 4 Use the Display menus to analyze the results of the acquired data These are the basic steps for acquiring data You should refer to the acquisition module user manual for more details on setting up and using the menus The Digital Analysis System is a powerful tool for solving complex problems It can be as simple as pressing the start button For more complex applications you can restore or load setups from application software programs and analyze the resultant data on a host computer network The following tools or products can be used with the Digital Analysis System to help you solve hardware or software problems 1 23 Getting Started 1 24 Microprocessor Disassemblers The DAS can be used with several microproces sor disassembler application software packages Each application comes with software and an instruction manual Networked X Windows Interface The networked X windows interface is standard with DAS NT systems The 92X Term product allows you to upgrade a stand alone DAS system to a DAS NT system with a network X window interface You can display the menus on a workstation while the actual mainframe is located in a remote location The 92XTerm upgrade comes with software and user manual Programmatic Command Language PCL The 92LANP product allows you to control the operation of the DAS from a host computer over a L
287. ron the terminal Power on the mainframe wait for the prompt BOOT gt and then insert the INSTALL floppy disk 4 Inresponse to the BOOT gt prompt type f install and press the Return key The following menu is displayed Press i to install Base System Software Optional System Software or Application Software Press r to remove Optional System Software or Application Software Press v to verify currently installed software Selection D 18 DAS System User Manual Appendix D Loading System Software Verifying Base Optional and Application Software DAS System User Manual 5 Type r to start the system software installation procedure A menu similar to the following will appear immediately DAS Software Removal Procedure XXXXX Kbytes space remaining The following Optional System Software and or Application Software is currently installed 1 92A96 2 92516 To remove a software package type in the number on the same line as the name of the package and press Return To exit type in 0 and press Return or simply press Return with no number specified Which Optional System Software or Application Software package would you like to remove After you enter your selection the Install procedure removes the selected package and displays the remaining list of software packages You are then prompted for another selection If there are no optional system software or application software packages
288. rovides the necessary software to operate the 92A60 90 and 92A60D 90D Data Acquisition Modules You can remove or exclude this software in DAS systems that do not contain 92A60 90 or 92A60D 90D Modules m 92A96 Support This package provides the necessary software to operate the 92A96 and 92C96 Data Acquisition Modules You can remove or exclude this software in DAS systems that do not contain 92A96 or 92C96 Modules m 92HS8 Support This package provides the necessary software to operate the 92HS8 8E Data Acquisition Modules You can remove or exclude this software in DAS systems that do not contain 92HS8 8E Modules m 92S16 Support This package provides the necessary software to operate the 92816 92832 92SXK109 and 92SX118 Pattern Generation Modules You can remove or exclude this software if your system does not contain pattern generation modules m Remote Operation Support This package provides the necessary software to operate the system remotely using the Programmatic Command Language PCL You can remove or exclude this software in DAS systems that you will not operate remotely with 92LANP m 9202XT Support XP17 Supplement This package provides the necessary software to update the Flash ROM in the 9202XT or 9203XT terminals It also provides additional software to service the terminal m 9204XT Support XP100 and XP200 Supplement This package provides the necessary software to update the Flash ROM in the 9204XT 9205XT and 9
289. rror messages D 13 phase 5 error messages D 14 file transfer DASdisk utility G 1 G 10 file transfers Kermit 3 52 filesets for the DASdisk utility G 2 fill in field defined Glossary 8 flag defined Glossary 9 Flash ROM E 9 floppy disk 720 Kbyte operation 3 33 3 35 DASdisk utility G 1 G 10 flow control auxiliary port 3 46 host port 3 47 format floppy operation 3 34 Format Setup menu D 5 formatting the hard disk D 2 D 8 function keys 2 19 Autorun Definition overlay 3 20 Cluster Definition overlay 3 5 3 6 Cluster Setup menu 3 8 Communications menu 3 45 3 47 3 53 3 54 Correlation Definition overlay 3 14 3 15 Diagnostics menu 3 56 Disk Services menu 3 32 3 35 File Functions overlay 3 44 LAN overlay 3 49 Print Screen Setup overlay 3 52 program controlled defined Glossary 12 Restore Formation overlay 3 29 Save Restore menu 3 26 Search Definition overlay 3 44 Signal Definition overlay 3 8 3 11 Symbol Editor menu 3 41 System Configuration menu 3 3 System Monitor menu 3 20 3 21 Version menu 3 60 fuse replacement F 18 G gateway address 3 48 E 7 glitch defined Glossary 9 GPIB port connections 1 15 port number E 9 GPIB Expansion module 1 4 connecting the GPIB connector F 16 Graph Display menu 2 9 grounding the mainframe 1 15 1 19 Index 4 H hard disk drive 1 4
290. ry entry with no allocation bits set type y in response Run the system file system Install utility Verify option to ensure that no system files have been deleted The procedure detected duplicate or bad block numbers associated with this file type y in response Run the file system Install utility Verify option to ensure that no system files have been deleted DAS System User Manual Appendix D Loading System Software Phase 3 Check Connectivity This phase checks for unreferenced directories Table D 3 summarizes the error messages that can be generated during Phase 3 testing Table D 3 Phase 3 File System Check Error Messages Message UNREF DIR l I OWNER O MODE M SIZE S MTIME T RECONNECT SORRY NO lost found DIRECTORY Explanation The procedure detected an unreferenced directory you have no recourse but to clear it Type n in response to the RECONNECT prompt The procedure prompts you to clear the inode Type y in response to the CLEAR prompt Run the file system Install utility Verify option to ensure that no system files have been deleted When this message displays you must rebuild your system First run the file system Make procedure then use the file system Install utility to reload the system software SORRY NO SPACE IN lost found DIRECTORY When this message displays you must rebuild your file system First run the file system Make procedure Then use the file system Install utility to
291. s 3 23 Save System Setup 3 25 saving current system software E 3 E 4 saving files on the hard disk D 2 scrolling defined Glossary 13 state data 2 29 timing data 2 30 Search Definition overlay 3 44 function keys 3 44 searching for symbols 3 44 select field defined Glossary 13 selecting module formations 3 61 selecting fields fill in fields 2 15 self contained network defined Glossary 13 sequence ranges 3 19 sequential pattern generator defined Glossary 13 server 3 49 server password 3 49 server status messages 3 49 service procedures F 1 F 26 Set Date Time overlay 3 56 Date field 3 57 Time field 3 57 setup file defined Glossary 13 menu defined Glossary 13 menus 2 5 DAS System User Manual time defined Glossary 13 signal event defined Glossary 14 Signal Definition overlay 3 8 card field 3 14 combination field 3 11 components 3 11 Event In field 3 14 Event Out field 3 14 function keys 3 8 3 11 Modules column 3 11 signal direction 3 11 signal event line 3 10 signal name 3 10 signal type 3 10 slot field 3 14 signal event resources 3 9 simple action defined Glossary 14 simple event defined Glossary 14 site considerations 1 11 skew defined Glossary 14 slot field 3 14 software application software 1 23 3 36 D 22 loading application software D 17
292. s by the stickers on the front panel of the mainframes Figure 2 1 shows a front view of the Master mainframe The DC ON OFF switch floppy disk drive and hard disk drive are located at the front of the instrument as shown Expansion mainframes look similar to the Master mainframes but do not include the power switch and disk drives The DC ON OFF switch is located in the upper right corner of the front facade of the Master mainframe When in the OFF Standby position the DC voltages are removed from the circuitry however AC voltages still exist inside the mainframe The switch is illuminated when it is in the ON position To remove AC voltages from the mainframe you must remove the power cord The DC ON OFF switch not the power cord should be used for powering the mainframe s on and off Since the power off sequence is logic controlled you will notice a slight delay before DC power is removed from the mainframe During a normal power off the mainframe saves information on the type of shutdown occurring and saves the current state of the file system DAS System User Manual 2 1 Operating Basics Front Panel m DC On Off switch Floppy Disk Drive Hard Disk LED
293. s does not decrease m Verify that the printer is on line and has paper m Verify that flow control and baud rate settings of the printer match the settings for the Auxiliary port in the Communication menu The Print Screen Setup overlay shows data being sent to the printer but the printer does not print m Verify that the printer is on line and has paper m Verify that the output format specified in the overlay is compatible with the output format of the printer W Check the connections between the printer and the DAS m Verify that flow control and baud rate settings of the printer match the settings for the Auxiliary port in the Communication menu No output file is sent to the remote host The DAS displays the following error message at the top of the menu rcp Failed to send file m Verify that your host and network are TCP IP compatible m Verify that your host supports the UNIX rcp remote copy service m Verify that the host name internet address and user name are correctly specified in the Print Screen Setup overlay m Verify that your user account on the host allows remote access by the DAS if necessary add the internet name of the DAS to your rhost file m Verify the Remote Path field in the Print Screen Setup overlay has a valid path You can use either an absolute path name for example user david print output or a relative path name for example print output You must create the path name before exe
294. s in conjunction with one another You can use multimodule operation to do the following tasks m Time correlate data between two or more modules on the display screen m Trigger one acquisition module when an event occurs on another module or cross trigger two modules W Perform stimulus response testing with a pattern generator module and acquisition module starting and stopping as a unit m Repeatedly compare the data acquired by an acquisition module to the data in a reference memory until the data is equal or unequal m Change the pattern generator output pattern when an event occurs on another module W Output a trigger signal to external test equipment such as an oscilloscope You can use the System Configuration and Cluster Setup menus to define module formations to cluster to group modules and to define interactions between modules within a cluster The following pages provide procedures on how to set up the multimodule operations listed above These are general descriptions only no specific acquisition module or pattern generator information is given Refer to your module user manual for specific details such as channel grouping and clocking selections Acquisition and pattern generation modules which are the building blocks of Digital Analysis Systems can be used individually or in combination to perform specific tasks You can combine or split apart modules of the same type to achieve more or fewer channel widths For
295. s message is displayed CAUTION Disturbing the terminal or the instrument can cause the Flash ROM Update process to fail Do not move the terminal or the mainframe or press any keys unless instructed to do so If the screen blanks out or goes dark you can move the mouse or press one of the Shift keys to reactivate the display without disturbing the update process E 11 Appendix E Configuration Utility Leave the Utility E 12 17 If the Flash Operation Completed message is displayed enter y in response to the next prompt on the screen The text to Step 3 of the Flash Update procedure is displayed carefully read this information Entering n at the prompt returns you to Step 1 of the Flash Update procedure to restart the entire process 18 Press the Control Alt and Delete keys simultaneously to reset boot the terminal from the Flash ROM Verify that the Serial window appears after the boot process is complete 19 If the Serial window does not appear restart the Flash Update procedure again from the Configuration Utility Main menu 20 If the Serial window appears boot the instrument normally and verify that the window displays on the terminal Typing the final command will exit the Configuration utility and you will be returned to the BOOT gt prompt There are two ways to leave the Configuration utility by saving the changes or by discarding the changes Either way you will be returned to the BOOT gt pro
296. s on rackmounting refer to the document Option 05 Rackmount Installation Instructions DAS System User Manual 1 5 Getting Started Expansion Mainframe 3 Slot 35 8 slots for Acquisition and or Pattern Generation Modules Slot27 Expansion Slave Board Expansion Cable Expansion Mainframe 2 Slot 26 Expansion Board 7 slots for Acquisition and or Pattern Generation Modules Slot 18 Expansion Slave Board Expansion Cable Expansion Mainframe 1 Slot 17 Expansion Board 7 slots for Acquisition and or Pattern Generation Modules Slot 9 Expansion Slave Board Expansion Cable Master Mainframe Slot 8 Expansion or Exp GPIB 6 slots for Acquisition and or Pattern Generation Modules Slot 0 Controller Board Figure 1 1 Master Mainframe and Expansion Mainframes 1 6 DAS System User Manual Getting Started Installation DAS System User Manual Expansion Mainframe Mainframe Data Probe Acquisition Data P robe Master Pattern Generation System under Test Figure 1 2 Expansion Mainframe Stacked on Master Mainframe Most DAS mainframes are shipped from the factory with acquisition or pattern generation cards already installed Besides connecting the entire system all you have to do is connect the probes and po
297. s on the keyboard Table 2 1 describes the mouse buttons and their functions on a typical three button mouse The table provides a brief overview of using the mouse more details of using the mouse in menus are provided later in this tutorial Table 2 1 Three Button Mouse Description Button Name Description Left Select Selects a field Move the pointer to the field and press the left button Use this button to select on screen function keys move the data cursor in display menus and scroll acquired data in display menus Center No action Right Opens a field or displays a pop up menu When a field is open use the left button to change the active value of the opened field use the right button to select a new value and close the pop up menu Operating Basics 2 12 Figure 2 7 shows an example of the Menu Selection overlay The display from your system should be similar Note that the overlay has four different types of menus in the center of the overlay All of the menus are briefly described under Menu Overview earlier in this manual The function key legends for each of the menus appear near the bottom of the overlay Das SGASEI 1 Dag MEHU SELECTION Module Fi Z F5 FE ESCAPE MIYE TO HWE TO HOE TI CANCEL SETUP DISPLAY UTILITY FRIHI HOD Figure 2 7 Menu Selection Overlay There are different ways to access menus The easiest way is to point the mouse at the menu selection and press the left butto
298. sary 7 diagnostics F 19 bypassing 3 57 Diagnostics menu 2 10 2 13 3 55 3 58 Boot Option overlay 3 57 Configuration field 3 56 function keys 3 56 Set Date Time overlay 3 56 DIP switches 1 17 Disassembly Display menu 2 9 Discrete I O port specifications A 5 disk drives floppy See floppy disk drive disk free space 3 33 Disk Services menu 2 10 3 31 3 38 720 Kbyte floppy disk operation 3 33 3 35 backup user files operation 3 36 copy file operation 3 32 delete file operation 3 34 3 35 destination disk 3 34 destination disk name 3 34 disk free space 3 33 disk information area 3 34 duplicate floppy operation 3 35 format floppy operation 3 34 function keys 3 32 3 35 guidelines 3 31 install application operation 3 36 operation field 3 34 remove application operation 3 36 restore user files operation 3 37 source disk 3 34 source disk name 3 34 source file type field 3 34 display menu defined Glossary 7 menus 2 8 timing defined Glossary 15 DNRZ defined Glossary 7 Don t Care symbol defined Glossary 7 DTR 3 46 3 47 DAS System User Manual duplicate floppy operation 3 35 edge defined Glossary 7 positioning defined Glossary 8 sensitive defined Glossary 8 triggering defined Glossary 8 editing symbol tables 3 38 3 45 ejector tool F 11 electrical specifications 92C0
299. select the Change Operation in the Main menu enter the letter of the desired drive and press the Return key After the operation is completed press any key to return to the Main menu You must initialize a formatted floppy disk before DASdisk can perform operations on the disk unless it has been formatted on the DAS The Init operation erases any information on the disk and initializes it The disk must already be formatted To initialize a disk select the Init operation and confirm the operation When the initialization operation is complete press any key to return to the Main menu The List Operation displays the contents of the floppy disk installed in the drive you specified DASdisk groups the files into file types that are sorted in alphabetical order The files within each file type are also displayed in alphabeti cal order DASdisk displays the file name size in bytes and date of creation If the list is longer than one screen the message MORE appears on the bottom of the screen Press any key to display the next page of the list The Dir operation lets you list the contents of a PC directory To list the contents of a directory select the Dir operation in the Main menu specify the name of desired directory with either a full or relative path and press the Return key Pressing the Return key without specifying the directory in the PC Directory Name field displays the current working directory If the specified directory does no
300. selection registered or a field with nonselectable items There are two ways to leave an overlay you can close the overlay saving changes you have made or close the overlay discarding any changes To leave the overlay and save the changes point the mouse at the F8 EXIT amp SAVE function key legend and press the left button alternately you can press function key F8 on the keyboard To leave the overlay without saving any changes select Fl CANCEL amp ESCAPE or press function key F1 You will be prompted to confirm your action so you do not accidentally lose any of your changes Press the Return key to confirm your actions the overlay closes and any changes you made are discarded Press the Esc Escape key to abort the close operation There may be some exceptions on what changes are saved or discarded when you exit the overlays If you are unsure of the changes and actions for leaving specific overlays refer to the discussion of the specific overlays in the Reference chapter of this manual Notice the two rows of on screen buttons at the bottom of the menu These same buttons appear at the bottom of every menu These buttons are activated by pointing the mouse and pressing the left button Figure 2 9 shows the on screen buttons as they appear at the bottom of each menu Table 2 2 lists the on screen buttons and their functions F4 F5 F6 F F8 MOVE TO MOVE TO MOVE TO MOVE TO EXIT SETUP DISPLAY UTILITY APPLICTN amp SAVE SELE
301. sentation of the signals is stored in memory by what is commonly called the internal or asynchronous clock Joydisk An octagonal button on the display that is used for scrolling data Key Note A brief on line description of any active function key Part of the Notes System Level sensitive A trigger specification term An event recognizer is said to be level sensitive when the event is only true in an acquisition cycle in which the selected channels are true for a specified amount of time See also edge sensitive and event filter Mainframe A mechanical cabinet providing power cooling and backplane resources The mainframe also houses I O connectors and drives for both hard and floppy disks Glossary 9 Glossary Glossary 10 Master Mainframe In any multiple mainframe arrangement the first mainframe in the chain must contain a controller board it is designated the Master mainframe AII other mainframes in the chain are called Expansion mainframes None of the expansion mainframes can contain a Controller board Master Module Some acquisition modules are available in two versions Master and Expander Master modules can operate without relying on signals from any other instrument modules Expanders with the exception of the 92HS8E must operate in conjunction with a Master Menu A screen display that offers choices to select or scroll through and or data and status information Menu Selection Overlay An overlay
302. sk may be inconsistent NOTE If you run the File System Check procedure from the floppy disks the logic analyzer will ignore the settings in the Boot Option overlay The system normally performs the file system Check procedure at power on unless you change the parameters in the Boot Option overlay to the Diagnostics menu refer to Boot Option Overlay on page 3 57 Under certain conditions the system may ask you to perform the file system Check procedure manually In this case you would perform this procedure The file system Check procedure may not be able to completely recover from all types of damage to the file system If system software files are either corrupted or cleared you must rebuild the file system using the file system Install utility NOTE You must run the file system Check procedure when at power on a message indicates that the file system has been damaged and cannot be automatically repaired The system will not operate with a damaged file system that it cannot repair There are six phases of the file system Check procedure described later in detail During these phases software attempts to reconstruct the file system by deleting unreferenced files rebuilding the free block list and fixing any inconsistencies It may take multiple attempts to complete the repair process You should run the file system Check procedure until you no longer get errors or queries normally no more than five times Once you
303. splay that contains information on cluster modules that were previously saved information includes the name of the cluster module used to acquire the data the module used the slot number the module occupied and the number of slots used The right side shows the System Configuration display that contains information on the cards currently configured into clusters modules in the system The information presented here is equivalent to that displayed in the File Contents listing To switch the active cursor between the two sides select function key F4 CHANGE CURSOR Save Module Refmem This operation stores acquired data from a specified module as a reference memory file The Save Module field appears when you select Save Module Refmem If you acquire a correlated acquisition and save the data of each module as a separate refmem the modules cannot be correlated when you view them This restriction is true even if you use the split screen display to view the refmems simultaneously Restore Setup Operations Use the restore setup operation see Figure 3 13 to restore a setup for a specific module or cluster or to restore all setups for the entire system the selections are Restore Setup and Restore Partial Setup Use Restore Setup to restore any module cluster or system setup file If only a partial restore is possible the system will display the Restore Formation overlay when you select function key F8 EXECUTE OPERATION Use the Restore Forma
304. st port For more information on the DAS 9200 PCL protocol refer to the DAS 9200 Programmatic Command Language User Manual The Kermit file transfer protocol is discussed in detail later in this section Mode field This field selects the number of significant data bits per charac ter in a character frame selections are 7 bit ASCII and 8 bit binary For either selection a character frame is composed of 1 start bit 8 data bits and 1 stop bit 2 stop bits at 110 baud In 7 bit mode the system ignores the most significant bit of the data from the host all flow control characters and an interrupt character are available The system cannot send or receive binary block information hex block format must be used In 8 bit mode all eight data bits are significant XON XOFF flow control is not available and there is no interrupt character In this mode the system can send and receive data using all types of transmission formats including binary Input EOL field This field selects the character the system recognizes as the end of a message from the host selections are CR carriage return and NL LF new line line feed If your host sends CRLF both characters at the end of a message set this field to NL LF Output EOL field This field selects the characters the system sends at the end of a message selections are CR NL LF and CRLF Interrupt field This field selects the character sent to the system to cause a device clear clea
305. stem is powered Doing so will damage the hard disk or corrupt the file system A 3 5 inch high density 1 44 megabyte floppy disk drive is standard in the mainframe The floppy disk drive is used for loading application software copying files for use on other DAS mainframes making restoring backup files and transferring data to host computers A light on the front of the floppy disk drive indicates when a floppy disk is being accessed Backup system software can also be loaded onto the hard disk from disks inserted in the floppy disk drive Backup procedures are described with on screen steps that inform you how to proceed The mainframe supports three RS 232 communication ports accessible on the rear panel m The terminal port connects the mainframe to the display terminal Baud rates are 38400 default 19200 9600 4800 2400 1200 600 300 and 110 m The host port connects the mainframe to RS 232 compatible host computer systems Baud rates are 38400 19200 9600 default 4800 2400 1200 600 300 and 110 m The auxiliary port provides the connection to other RS 232 compatible devices for example a printer The port sends out 8 bits per character and no parity parity is off Baud rates are 38400 19200 9600 default 4800 2400 1200 600 300 and 110 The local area network interface connects the mainframe to the X window terminal or to a network The LAN software provides you with a means to transfer files between
306. symbol table using the Symbol Editor menu or transfer a symbol table to the system from a host computer 2 Specify the Symbolic radix for the appropriate channel group in the Channel menu A new File field will appear allowing you to name the symbol table to be used for this channel group Only one symbol table per channel group is allowed but each channel group can have its own symbol table 3 You can now use symbolic names to define word recognizer events in the Trigger menu After making an acquisition you can view symbolic values in the State or Disassembly display menus When you first enter the Symbol Editor menu the default pattern type symbol table is displayed You can immediately begin editing this menu Alternatively you can select function key F2 FILE FUNCTIONS to create a new symbol table or to open an existing symbol table to edit Be aware however that many applications microprocessor disassembly programs supplied with symbol tables are write protected and can only be opened as read only files The Symbol Editor menu provides a variety of function keys that you can use to help create edit and search for symbol and pattern values Selecting function key F3 changes the definition of the function keys from edit mode to search mode Figure 3 18 shows a pattern type symbol table DAS System User Manual 3 39 Reference 3 40 i 2 2 7 ART FILE PUT DELETE Clistwr lt 3 FUNCTIONS F2 F3 F F i 1 rn
307. t and Auxiliary Port Baud Rate Selections Software Installation 0 0 cc cece teens Configuration Hardware System Software sparet iae ene e nE eet n Application Software 01 0 0 cece eee ee First Time Operation 1 0 0 0 eee cece eee EA Performing an Acquisition 0 lees Moving Forward 0 cece cece es Functional Overview cece eee c cree e cece eer rnnt Powering On and Powering Off 0 0 0 c cece eens Powering On the DAS XP 21 teas Powering On the DAS NT 0000 cece tees Workspace Menu 1 2 2 cece eee he Powering Off xi XV XV T m LAI NN WwW Ww See eeew L 2 1 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 4 Table of Contents Menu Overview ipe suet de yp ba RO e ER a p LE RE a Eee 2 5 Setup Menus i cR ELDER HE qe Vikas SE sae EL REDE Ee E Sag 2 5 Display Menus i oe ei banat e EE ELEME ES ES EUR 2 8 Utility Menus oss sansa erste cae EON EI E EUER EN BIER Ve 2 10 Application Menus pscs teener eeren te ee eee 2 10 Tutorial eresse eonna esa une Y sty Edo AS ea baring ay NS UR ES 2 11 Selecting Menus 45 c eee Du eet edb wer ch ERE ERES 2 11 Fields dut eu AERE UIN PEDE MEE Sas don Ed 2 14 Select Fields s c ueber eaten et teta umet eu 2 14 Elan Fields tedata a bbe hide eh goes EXER 2 15 Field Color Conventions 0 0 c eee cece eee 2 15 Exiting Overlays nanak Poin be etic athe hare eb pete ede sre anes 2 16 On Scre
308. t entering number to retain the current value DAS System User Manual Appendix E Configuration Utility Set GPIB Port Number Update Terminal Flash ROM DAS System User Manual This selection is only valid if your system has a 92C02 GPIB Module installed Selecting item P from the Main menu lets you set the GPIB port address assigned to the instrument when it is used in a GPIB network Legal values are Off line and addresses 0 through 30 When the value is set to Off line the instrument is prevented from responding to any GPIB activity Enter a new value in the range of 0 to 30 or 1 for Off Line Press the Return key to retain the current value If you have a Tektronix X terminal you can use the Configuration utility to update the terminals internal Flash ROM Updating the Flash ROM is only necessary when the terminal s software or fonts require updating with a new version You may also need to update the Flash ROM as a result of any service work done to the terminal If you desire to update the Flash ROM you first must set the network configuration parameters for the instrument using the Configura tion utility NOTE You do not need to update the Flash ROM in the terminal to change the Internet address Use the other selections in the Configuration Utility Main menu to update the internet information for the instrument Update the terminal internet information in the Boot Monitor Internet addresses and other network i
309. t exist DASdisk aborts the operation To return to the Main menu after the operation is complete press any key You can use either or Vin the path names You can t use the wildcard character to specify path names but you can use it to specify which files should be listed For example if you enter c dasfiles or c dasfiles DASdisk lists all files in the directory dasfiles If you enter c dasfiles abc DASdisk lists all files in the dasfiles directory that begin with abc DASdisk lists directories with their files in columns and sorted alphabetically Subdirectories have attached as a suffix The Unpack operation lets you unpack file set that exists as a single file on a PC The Unpack operation separates a file set into individual files DASdisk also creates a new file named mapfile that contains a list of the files in the original file set and both the DAS and PC file names for each file Because this file is required to repack a file set be careful not to delete mapfile if there is a possibility that you will ever repack the file set Appendix G DASdisk Utility To unpack a file set select the Unpack operation from the Main menu and perform the following steps 1 Inthe PC Fileset Name field enter the name of the file set to be unpacked press the Return key Pressing the Return key without specifying a file set aborts the operation 2 Inthe Destination Directory Name field enter the name of directory in which to place
310. tart mode E 6 92XTerm Manual mode E 6 optional accessories B 3 optional system software D 20 D 21 92A16 16E D 21 92A60 90 D 21 92A96 D 21 92C96 D 21 92HS8 8E D 21 92816 32 D 21 installing D 17 Remote Operation D 21 options F 23 F 26 Index 5 Index output formats 3 51 overlay defined Glossary 11 overlays Autorun Definition overlay 3 16 Boot Option overlay 3 57 Cluster Definition overlay 3 4 Correlation Definition overlay 3 14 File Functions overlay 3 43 LAN overlay 3 47 Print Screen Setup overlay 3 50 Restore Formation overlay 3 28 Search Definition overlay 3 44 Set Date Time overlay 3 56 Signal Definition overlay 3 8 P packaging F 1 paged memory defined Glossary 11 password server changing 3 49 pattern generator defined Glossary 11 PCL 1 24 port number E 8 protocol 3 47 pipeline defined Glossary 11 pod clock defined Glossary 11 connector defined Glossary 11 defined Glossary 11 ID defined Glossary 11 podlet defined Glossary 11 post fill defined Glossary 12 post processing defined Glossary 12 PostScript 3 50 3 70 power cords 1 5 1 8 1 11 F 24 power requirements 1 8 mainframe 1 8 1 9 modules 1 10 1 11 power source dropped cycles 1 9 terminal 1 8 power supply 1 5 power switch 2 1 F 24 power off procedure 2 5 Power
311. te a State position the cursor on the State and press the function key After redeskewing Clks Quals you may also want to deskew data channels again Decimal fields cannot be partially don t cared Decimal to binary conversion will not work if one or more decimal digits is a don t care Decimal input radix use 0 9 or X Input radix is decimal enter a value using 0 9 or X Delay cannot exceed memory depth use 0 2047 The delay value you entered is larger than memory Enter a new value between 0 and 2047 Delay cannot exceed memory depth use 0 4093 The delay value you entered is larger than memory Enter a new value between 0 and 4093 DELETE key is only valid in a sequence line Key ignored Move the cursor to the sequence line area and press the function key again DELETE key is only valid in the conversion table Key ignored Move the cursor to the conversion table area and press the function key again Deskew complete Deskew operation detects possible Clk Eqn 2 problem Deskew complete Unable to deskew one or more channels of n Deskew failure timing errors may occur with Clk Eqn 2 Deskew not performed Pod B of slot n must have a P6461 probe Deskew not performed P robe at n must be a P6460 P6461 or P6461E Deskew not performed timing errors may occur with Clk Eqn 2 Deskew procedure complete D Destination label not specified in sequence s n Desti
312. te a file make selections in the Source Disk Source File Type and Source File Name fields You can also choose a file to delete by moving the active cursor through the directory listing with the scroll keys Complete the delete operation by selecting function key F8 EXECUTE OPERATION and confirm your choice The Format Floppy operation prepares an unformatted 1 44 Mbyte floppy disk for file storage This operation destroys the contents of the disk The format used by the system can be read and written by IBM PC disk drives through the DASdisk utility You can also read and write this same format on SUN worksta tions using the tar command For more information on the DASdisk utility refer to Appendix G DASdisk Utility DAS System User Manual Reference Verify Floppy Operation The Verify Floppy operation checks that all blocks on the installed floppy disk match their corresponding checksums Floppy disks with bad blocks cannot be used Ciustar 2 IH sk P Caleta Fils LED ES last F5 FB TDENTIF EXECUTE FLOPPY OPERATION rock PT Se hm M D DG ht emen Du fee E E M BM D BD ee sex Figure 3 17 Disk Services Menu Delete File Operation Duplicate Floppy The Duplicate Floppy operation duplicates the entire file contents for the Operation installed floppy disk You can duplicate system software disks application software disks and user file disks If you want to copy or an individual file use the Copy File operati
313. ter or timer values and the amount of acquisition memory being used The following Setup menus are available for the pattern generation modules Configuration Menu The Configuration menu shows the current hardware configuration and software mode for the pattern generation module Channel Menu The Channel menu lets you collect channels into logical groups for data entry and display purposes You can change the names radix and display order of each group Program Menu The Program menu allows you to enter data and instructions to stimulate the circuit or system under test You can also send a signal to the acquisition module Monitor Menu The Monitor menu lets you debug pattern generation programs by watching pattern generator circuit under test interactions at a reduced clock rate You can set break points in the pattern generation programs and single step through problem areas Display menus control the display format and viewing characteristics of acquired data Display menus are module dependent see Figure 2 6 Module display menus are described in detail in the module manuals Application menus are described in the application software manuals DAS System User Manual Operating Basics MODULE Display 92A16 16E State Timing Graph Disassembly 92A96 State 92C96 Timing 92A 60 90 Graph Disassembly Stack Data 92HS8 8E 9216 32 no Display Menus with these Modules Figure 2 6 Module Display Menus The
314. ter you specify the name or value you want to search for in the Search By field select function key F8 EXIT amp SAVE to store the overlay To begin the search select function key F7 SEARCH BACKWARD or F8 SEARCH FORWARD You can use the Symbol Name field in the overlay to define the name or value to search for If you select Symbol Name you can specify the target name using UNIX style regular expressions For example a period will match any character a d in brackets will match any character in the range a to d and an asterisk will match zero or more occurrences of the preceding character If you search for a symbol value in a range table enter a specific number The first symbol with a range containing that value will be found For pattern tables enter a bit pattern using digits allowed by that radix Specifying a digit causes a search for that digit at that specific position in the pattern this is also true for X don t care values However a period will match any value in the bit pattern DAS System User Manual Reference Symbol Mane diresa INTR PRK Hrita Figure 3 21 Search Definition Overlay Symbol Editor Menu Communications Menu DAS System User Manual The Communications menu Figure 3 22 allows you to specify communication port information There are three RS 232 ports Terminal Auxiliary and Host For the Terminal port you can specify the transmit and receive baud rate for communica
315. tern generation modules from previously saved files Figure 3 13 shows the Restore Setup operation selected The restore setup operations follow m Restore Setup m Restore Partial Setup DAS System User Manual Reference The delete operations let you delete stored setups and reference memory files from the hard disk Figure 3 15 shows the Delete Setup operation selected The delete operations follow m Delete Setup m Delete Refmem Save Setup Operations Using the save setup operations you can save a copy of the menu setups for the entire system for a cluster or for a single module Setups are saved on the hard disk The Operation field selects which level of setup information is stored The Save System Setup selection stores the setups of all modules in the system Save Cluster Setup stores the setups of the modules assigned to the specified cluster Save Module Setup stores the setup information for an individual module You can also save any one of these setup types in a file named Power Up and the system will automatically restore this setup at power on The Display field in the Save Restore menu changes the type of information presented within the menu selections are Directory File Contents Sys Config and File Contents Sys Config The Directory selection shown in Figure 3 11 displays a directory that lists all the setup files or all the refmem files depending on the selected operation residing on the specified disk
316. that has a password and do not know the password you must enter the overlay and reassign one To assign a null password press the Return key in the password field this turns off the password Then you will not need a password to communicate with the server Use the Print Screen Setup overlay to specify the setups needed to print any of the menus screens using the Print Screen tool If you have a stand alone system DAS XP you can execute the Print Screen tool from the Workspace menu If you have a networked system DAS NT and your remote host does not have screen capture utilities you can execute the Print Screen tool using the remote shell command rsh Refer to Capturing and Printing Menus on page 3 72 for instructions on capturing and printing menus The Print Screen Setup overlay lets you specify where to send the output and lets you define the format of the output On the local system you can save the output in a file in the Print Output directory on the hard disk or you can direct the output to a printer connected to the RS 232C Auxiliary port The printer can be a serial printer or you can use a serial to parallel converter to print to a parallel printer NOTE If you have a stand alone system DAS XP ignore the caution message about the etc host file that displays when you access the overlay If your DAS is connected to a network you can send the output to a remote host file or to a network printer with a TCP IP compat
317. that lists the installed modules or clusters in your mainframe and the available menus Microprocessor Support Optional microprocessor support software that allows the logic analyzer to disassemble data acquired from microprocessors Mnemonic Disassembly A display format for data acquired from a microprocessor or a data bus for example GPIB A logic analyzer decodes bus activity and displays it as cycle types instruction names interrupt levels etc Advanced forms of mnemonic disassembly can detect queue flushes and provide a display that resembles the original assembly language source code listing Module A functioning acquisition or pattern generation unit A module may consist of one or more cards You can use the System Configuration menu to combine cards of the same type to create variable width modules Module Formation A functional grouping of modules of similar types that reside in adjacent mainframe slots Based on the card slot configuration of your mainframe system software automatically creates a set of all possible module formation selections for each module type at power on For example if your main frame contains two 92A16 cards and three 92A16E cards in adjacent slots software establishes all valid module combinations of that module type there are 8 in this case each formation is assigned a unique identification number Each valid combination is a module formation For instance formation 0 default might contain
318. the acquisition memory is shorter than the reference memory If the entire range of the acquisition memory is out of the specified range the system ignores the comparison as if no comparison definition was made for the module For example the system has an acquisition module that uses a reference memory that contains 5000 sequences with the trigger position at sequence 3000 The Sequence Range in the Autorun Definition overlay is from 1900 to 2099 200 sequences in a block before the trigger Three examples of comparing data follow m The acquisition module acquires 3000 sequences with the trigger position at sequence 2000 In this case sequences 900 1099 in the acquisition will be compared with those specified in the reference memory m The acquisition module acquires 3000 sequences with the trigger position at sequence 1000 In this case sequences 0 99 in the acquisition will be compared with sequences 2000 2099 in the reference memory The range is truncated because the relative sequences do not exist in the acquired data m The acquisition module acquires 3000 sequences with the trigger position at sequence 100 In this case no sequences will be compared The system continues checking other compare conditions for the cluster as if no comparison definition was defined for the acquisition module If no other module is present the Autorun stops Once the system determines the comparison range it compares the data applying th
319. the master clock signal the pulse width is approximately 8 ns Pod Connector A multipin connector that receives data acquisition and pattern generation probes Pod connectors form the physical connection between the logic analyzer and each probe Pod ID A number that identifies the location of each probe slot number plus pod letter for example 2B Each probe contains a button that when pushed causes the Pod ID for that probe to appear on the screen Podlet A circuit contained in a flex lead and attached to a probe that provides square pin connections to the circuit under test for one data acquisition channel or one pattern generation channel and a ground pin Glossary 11 Glossary Glossary 12 Post fill A requirement that a logic analyzer continue to acquire data after the trigger until a predetermined number of samples has been taken When the trigger position is programmed to occur in the center of memory a logic analyzer will take enough data samples after the trigger to fill one half of the acquisition memory See also Trigger Position Post processing Any type of acquisition or reference memory analysis that occurs after rather than during the acquisition Pre fill A requirement that a logic analyzer fill a predetermined number of acquisi tion memory sequences with new data before accepting a trigger With the trigger programmed to occur in the center of memory one half of the memory must be filled b
320. the unpacked files of the file set DASdisk automatically creates this directory If you press the Return key without specifying the directory DASdisk assigns the specified file set name to the destination directory If the name for the destination directory and the file set are identical when the operation is complete the original file set will no longer exist if they differ the original file set is unaffected 3 Enter Y to confirm the operation 4 After the operation is complete press any key to return to the Main menu Pack Operation The Pack operation lets you create a file set from files in a PC directory You can also repack a directory that was unpacked You perform the Pack operation on file types that the DAS expects to be file sets See File Sets on page G 2 for a list of file types If you repack a directory the directory will contain a file called mapfile which contains a list of the original files in the file set This file must be present in the source directory to successfully pack the file set DASdisk will only pack files in the directory that were in the original file set To pack a file set select the Pack operation in the Main menu and perform the following steps 1 Inthe PC Directory Name field enter the name of the directory that contains the files to be packed press the Return key Pressing the Return key without specifying a directory aborts the operation 2 Inthe Destination Directory Name field
321. tion key F7 ADD SIGNAL to change this field to the fill in mode and enter a name of your choice If you do not enter a name a default name for example Signal 1 will appear when you press the Return key Click on the right mouse button while pointing at this field to view a list of all currently defined signals m Type field This field specifies the type that is speed of signal you define The choices are Normal and High Speed The High Speed selection is useful for applications that require high speed communication lines m Line field This field assigns a signal to a specific event line 1 16 Modules in different clusters can use the same event line as long as the line is specified by number in this field for each cluster This field only appears when you select Normal in the Type field since high speed events can only be internal Selections are 1 2 3 16 and Don t Care default 3 10 DAS System User Manual Reference m Components field This field only appears if a 92C02 GPIB Expansion Module is included in your system It lets you designate whether you define signal components within the mainframe Internal or whether you define signal components connected to the 92C02 Module External You can define both internal and external signal components for a given signal event If External is selected additional fields appear in this overlay m Combination field This field determines the relationship between normal
322. tion overlay to specify how to match the setup file to the current hardware configuration Restore Partial Setup This operation allows you to restore only part of a previous setup file When you select function key F8 EXECUTE OPERATION the Restore Formation overlay displays DAS System User Manual 3 27 Reference 3 28 Restore Formation Overlay utsittlon Sava Rasto Idia FB EXECUTE OPERATION Pate Hon l 8 E BM E E E BM ee sent Figure 3 13 Save Restore Menu Restore Setup Operations The Restore Formation overlay lets you assign the module setups in the saved setup file to the current hardware in the system This overlay appears when you select the Restore Partial Setup operation or when the current hardware configuration does not match the saved setup configuration on a Restore Setup operation Figure 3 14 is an example Restore Formation overlay The left half of the configuration box shows the current hardware configuration The select fields in the right half of the configuration box allow the saved module setups to be assigned to the hardware cards in the system Saved module setups can be assigned to any compatible hardware This allows setups from systems with different card placement to be interchanged It also allows setups saved from one module to be restored into a different module Hardware cards can be reconfigured to form compatible modules during the restore operation In addition to restori
323. tion with a console terminal For the Auxiliary port you can specify baud rate and flow control control of data transmission The end of line characters sent to a serial printer are specified in the print overlay associated with the data you want to send For the Host port you can specify the protocol to use DAS 9200 PCL or Kermit baud rate mode 7 or 8 significant bits per charac ter flow control input output end of line characters and the interrupt character From the Communications menu you can call the LAN overlay to display the network parameters by selecting function key F5 LAN You can also call the Print Screen Setup overlay to specify the print screen setup parameters by selecting function key F6 PRINT SETUP 3 45 Reference 3 46 utstition Communicat Idi Fj F5 F PRE DEFAULT LAH PRINT WALES MITT SETUP F T Inr LALI e pe mee 903 OS DX El a Dn l2 8 E 58 M E E E D Figure 3 22 Communications Menu The Communications menu has the following key features and fields m Baud Rate fields You can set the baud rates for the Terminal port Auxiliary port and the Host port The default baud rate for the Terminal port is 38400 the default baud rate for the other ports is 9600 The last selected rate is always stored in nonvolatile RAM and can also be selected by using the DIP switches on the Controller board accessible through the rear panel The Auxiliary port connects to a ser
324. tisfied refer to Autorun Definition Overlay on page 3 16 Reference Signal Definition Overlay 3 8 m Start Mode field This field specifies the start mode for the cluster The default is Normal all modules are started together the other selection is ATE acquisition modules are started before pattern generation modules m Stop Mode field This field specifies the stop mode for the cluster The default is Auto operation automatically ceases when acquisition is com plete the other selection is Manual you must select function key F1 STOP CLUSTER to stop operation Function key F2 DEFINE SIGNAL calls the Signal Definition overlay Function key F4 DEFINE CORRELATN calls the Correlation Definition overlay and function key F5 DEFINE AUTORUN calls the Autorun Definition overlay All three of these overlays are discussed later in this chapter Function key F3 SIGNAL TYPES displays the signal types next to signal names in the Inputs and Outputs columns Signals are designated NOR normal and HIG high speed Displayed signal types are based on information you enter in the Signal Definition overlay After you select this key the legend changes to REMOVE TYPES When you select it again signal types disappear from the display You can change the default parameters of the Cluster Setup menu For instance you can define additional signals and correlation for each module You can also determine what types of lines the signal ev
325. to 63 Hz operation over 63 Hz may exceed the protective grounding conductor leakage current limit of 3 5 mA Mainframe Std 115 VAC single 105 127 VAC lt 12 A phase Mainframe Opt A1 A5 230 VAC 200 250 VAC lt 10 A single phase w Mainframe Opt 1A 115 VAC single 105 127 VAC lt 15 A phase Mainframe Opt 1B 120 208 VAC 90 127 VAC lt 8 A 90 127 VAC line to neutral for each phase 3 phase Opt 1B discontinued effective B061162 92C02 Module Data Transfer Rate Controller To 175 Kbytes second minimum No headers or 92C02 trailers binary blocks DMA mode Power consumption 1 The terminals do not have a 110 230 VAC switch The voltage ranges are from 90 260 VAC Operation to low line of 90 VAC is possible if the card cage load is reduced to 425 W or less Table A 4 Standard Electrical Interfaces Characteristic Description RS 232 Interface The interface is defined as a Data Communications Equipment DCE pinpoint RS 232 Operational Details Operational Modes Full Duplex Half Duplex Flagging Data Type Asynchronous Control Lines DCD CTS DSR Bits per Character 7 bit ASCII 8 bit Binary Parity None Odd Even Stop Bits 1 Protocols Kermit Xmodem DAS 9200 PCL Flow Control XON XOFF DTR CTS receive amp transmit Baud Rates Terminal 38400 default 19200 9600 4800 2400 1200 600 300 110 Host 38400 19200 9600 default 4800 2400 1200 600 300 110 A 4
326. to a counter timer Clause Maximum of 1 Edge Event per Clause A Clause cannot contain more than one Edge Event Maximum of 1 Action per Signal in a Clause A Signal can only perform one Action at a time Maximum of 1 Event Filter per State A State cannot contain more than one Event Filter Maximum of 1 Glitch Event per Clause A Clause cannot contain more than one Glitch Event Maximum of 1 Go To State Action per A Clause cannot contain more than one Go To State Action Clause Maximum of 1 unique Edge type Channel Only one edge detector resource is available Event Maximum of 1 unique Glitch type Channel Only one glitch detector resource is available Event Maximum of 2 Simple Events per Clause A Clause cannot contain more than two Simple Events Maximum of 4 States The Trigger Program already contains the maximum allowable number of States Maximum of 8 pods per group A group cannot contain more than eight pods Maximum of 8 Simple Actions per Clause A Clause cannot contain more than eight Simple Actions Maximum of 10 replacement traces restore You can only replace ten original timing traces before an original must be restored some before saving another C 6 DAS System User Manual Appendix C Error Messages Table C 1 Error Messages Cont Error Message Maximum of 32 channels per group Explanation You cannot add more than 32 channels per group This message appears if you attemptto add to a channel group already contai
327. to this group use 0 or 1 Leading character in this field cannot be Explanation You entered a value in a word recognizer field that is legal for the group radix but which cannot be used because there aren t enough bits associated with that digit to handle the value entered Enter the value again using 0 or 1 Entries in this field may not begin with or Begin entry with an alphanumeric tor character Lines per page value too large for PostScript PostScript allows a maximum of 60 lines per page setto maximum Maximum legal value is 4 999 995 ns Entry exceeds maximum allowable value for this field Enter a value between 0 and 4 999 995 ns Maximum legal value is 320 ns Entry exceeds maximum allowable value for this field Enter a value between 0 and 320 ns Maximum legal value is 64 Entry exceeds maximum allowable value for this field Enter a value between 0 and 64 Maximum legal value is 999 999 Entry exceeds maximum allowable value for this field Enter a value between 0 and 999 999 Maximum number of Action Macros already You must delete an Action Macro in order to define another defined Maximum number of Event Macros already You must delete an Event Macro in order to define another defined Maximum of n groups allowed You cannot add any more groups without deleting currently existing ones Maximum of 1 Action per Counter Timer per You cannot assign more than one Action
328. turing and Printing Menus beginning on page 3 72 for instructions on using the Print Screen tool for capturing and printing menus 3 67 Reference 3 68 Hard Copy of a Setup State or Disassembly Menu You can use the Setup Print overlays to print the Setup menu data and data acquired by the DAS in the State Timing or Disassembly menus Unlike using the Print Screen tool the print data does not include all information displayed on the menu such as function key legends You specify the amount and type of data to print in the individual Setup Print overlays Select the PRINT button in the Setup or Display menus to display the Setup Print overlay The individual overlays are described in more detail in the 92A96 amp 92C96 User Manual and to the 92816 32 User Manual You can print the data from a Setup menu or print acquired data or reference memory data from the State menu or the Disassembly menu The printed data is generated using ASCII characters and looks similar to the data on the screen To print a hardcopy of a Setup menu or of State or Disassembly data to a serial printer perform the following steps 1 If you have not already done so connect an appropriate RS 232 cable between the serial port on the printer and the Auxiliary port on the rear panel of the mainframe Be sure to select a cable compatible with the configuration of the serial interface port on your printer Refer to your printer manual for information
329. type install to continue with the installation process or type config to adjust the LAN or Operating mode parameters or save an image of the current system software If you need to adjust the network parameters type config and refer to the Configuration Utility Otherwise continue with the next step NOTE Do NOT remove the INSTALL disk yet The program transfers several files from the floppy disk to the hard disk The BOOT gt prompt will appear 6 Type install in response to the BOOT gt prompt and press the Return key The system will access the hard disk and after a few seconds will display the following message File System Installation Procedure XXXXX Kbytes disk space remaining Insert next DAS system floppy disk and press Return When installation is complete press c gt 7 Remove the INSTALL disk insert the Base System Software Vol 1 of n disk and press the Return key When the prompt returns insert the next disk in the sequence and press the Return key Continue loading Base System Software disks in sequence until you have installed all of them 8 After you have installed all of the Base System Software disks install the optional system software disks that you require for your application DAS System User Manual Appendix D Loading System Software Installing Optional System Software Installing Application Software DAS System User Manual 9 When you have installed all of
330. types in the same symbol table FILE FUNCTIONS Function Edit Statia File Mares F5 EXECUTE FURCTION PRIHI Hiba Figure 3 20 File Functions Overlay Symbol Editor Menu DAS System User Manual 3 43 Reference Search Definition Overlay 3 44 The File Function overlay has the following key fields m Function field This field specifies the desired operation The fields on the overlay change according to the operation you select m Edit Status field This field lets you create a new file edit an existing file or read an existing file When you select New File a File Type field appears where you specify the file type Select either Range or Pattern m File Name field This field lets you enter the name of a new file or specify the name of an existing symbol table file Function key F1 ESCAPE amp CANCEL closes the overlay and restores the field selections to their previous values However the results of any operation you performed while using the overlay will be retained by selecting the F5 EXECUTE FUNCTION key Selecting function key F5 executes the specified file function no changes will take place until you select or press this function key The Search Definition overlay Figure 3 21 is used to search for a symbol by name or by value To perform a search enter Search mode press F3 until the key reads F3 EDIT MODE and then press F6 DEFINE SEARCH The Search Definition overlay displays Af
331. ues acquiring data until the stop conditions are met or until you select function key F1 STOP After starting the system in the Autorun mode it may take a few moments for the label on the key to change to F1 STOP DAS System User Manual Reference DAS System User Manual Pattern generation modules clustered with acquisition modules will restart with each Autorun comparison This capability lets you perform repeated functional tests on a board or device without using an external controller You can use External clocking in most cases for acquisition modules operating in the Autorun mode to ensure that data is acquired consistently on each cycle For each module with a compare definition the system determines a reference point within the data to use as comparison point If a single trigger exists for both the acquisition memory and the reference memory the system uses the trigger position as the comparison point Otherwise it uses the end of data point as the comparison point The sequence range is limited by the sequences in the reference memory You can define the sequence range using the Sequence Range fields in the Autorun Definition overlay within the reference memory that you want to compare against If the length of the reference data the length of the acquired data or the trigger positions do not match you must adjust the sequence range The system truncates the sequence range if the trigger positioning is shifted or if
332. ules refer to the appropriate module user manual The baud rate and flow control are selectable in the Communications menu For information on how to set the Baud rate DIP switches refer to Terminal Host and Auxiliary Port Baud Rate Selections When printing to a serial printer ensure that your printer communication settings match those of the Auxiliary port For specific instructions on the use and care of your printer refer to its supporting documentation Output data is transmitted on pin 2 of the Auxiliary port connector and is received on pin 3 For recommended cable connections to either DTE or DCE type serial printer ports refer to Tables 1 5 and 1 6 on page 1 16 There are two different ways that you can select the baud rates for the Terminal Host and Auxiliary Ports on the DAS The easiest way is to set the baud rates in the Communications menu You can also override the selections in the Commu nications menu using the DIP switches mounted on the Controller board You can access these switches through an opening on the rear panel of the mainframe DIP switch pairs 3 and 4 5 and 6 and 7 and 8 select the baud rates for the RS 232 ports as listed in Table 1 7 DIP switch 1 is the left most switch as you face the rear of the mainframe The operation of DIP switches 1 and 2 is described later in this manual For example if you set DIP switches 7 and 8 both in the up position the baud rate for the Auxiliary Port serial printe
333. up in a setup file named Power Up that will automatically be Setups restored when you power on the system If you intend to use the power on restore feature you must use the correct file name Power Up If there are any deviations from the spelling and case sensitivity of the file name the system will ignore the file and return to the default settings Note also that the configuration you save in the file must match the hardware configuration when you power on the system if it doesn t the system displays an error message in the Diagnostics menu and returns to the default settings If the previous shut down was abnormal the system will restore to the default setups instead of the setups in the Power Up file The system will display an error message indicating this in the Diagnostics menu This feature prevents the system from restoring a faulty setup that may have caused the abnormal shut down DAS System User Manual 3 25 Reference Save Refmem Operations 3 26 Using the save refmem operation you can store the contents of a current acquisition from either a correlated set of modules or from a single module the selections are Save Correlated Refmem and Save Module Refmem After being stored the acquisition memory file is called a reference memory or refmem Only the master module in the correlated set needs to be specified the other modules in the set are automatically stored The list of refmem files displayed with the operatio
334. up to have channels 1 and 0 the remaining channels of Section CO are unused Select function key F8 ADD select Add Group and press the right button A new group appears below the Control group With the cursor in the new name field type the word Qual and press the Return key You have just assigned the name Qual to the new group Point the mouse at the new Section field press the left button and type CO The unused channels of Section CO appear in the Channels field Point the mouse at the Channels field press the left button type the number 2 and press the Return key You have just assigned Channel 2 to be the single component of the Qual group Repeat steps 18 through 21 to add a Clock group with Section CO and Channel 3 The Channel menu should look similar to Figure 2 11 You can continue changing the Channel menu to suit your needs If for any reason you need to return to the default settings you can select function key F4 DEFAULT GROUPING You can also use the other function keys in the Channel menu to further define the input polarity of each data channel and specify the input threshold voltages for each probe But describing these operations is beyond the scope of this tutorial Refer to your module user manual for information on these function keys 2 24 DAS System User Manual Operating Basics Set Up the Clock Menu DAS System User Manual Fal F5 F amp Fr FB DEFAULT DEFTHE DEFIRE DELE
335. urations For example assume a mainframe contains the following modules one 92A16 two 92A16Es one 92816 and one 92832 The total power required equals 107 W A16 166 W A16Es 78 W S16 79 W S32 or 430 watts total This value when compared with the power cord options in Tables 1 1 and 1 2 rules out the use of the standard 12 A power cord which is only able to deliver up to 400 watts The next highest power cord option must be used this is the Option 1A power cord that supplies up to 500 watts to the card cage Table 1 3 Power for Modules with Probes Module Power watts 92A16 107 92A16E 83 92A96 S D UD 1401 92A96D XD 140 DAS System User Manual Getting Started Site Considerations DAS System User Manual Table 1 3 Power for Modules with Probes Cont Module Power watts 92C96D XD SD 1401 92A60 130 92A90 D 130 92516 78 92532 79 92S X109 78 925 X118 19 92C02 30 92HS8 20 92HS8E 12 1 92096 Acquisition Module power requirements reduced to 140 W max effective SN B061162 and above The system software checks for certain configurations at power on and also prompts you to use the correct power supply and power cord The power supply and module cards can be damaged if you have an illegal configuration the wrong power supply or the wrong power cord For example if you have more than four 92C96 Modules in one mainframe the system will display a warning message at power on and t
336. using the up or down arrows If the timing menu has several channels of data displayed that fill up more than the window can display you can use the up or down buttons on the Joydisk to position the channels you want to view on the screen 44 Point the mouse over the timing data just inside the right edge of the window and press the left button The cursor will move towards the pointer location 45 Press the left button a few more times The data will scroll every time you press the button You can also use the function keys at the bottom of the menu to further define your display data or to search for specific data For more information on the features of the Timing menu refer to the acquisition module user manual In addition to the Timing and State displays you can also view data in a Disassembly menu or Graph menu The Disassembly menu has features similar to the State menu and will not be discussed in this tutorial In most cases you will want to use the Disassembly menu with one of the microprocessor support packages For detailed information on the Disassembly menu refer to the manual that came with your microprocessor support package Refer to your module user manual for information on the Graph menu An important feature of the Display menus is the capability to display a split screen menu In other words you can create a Display menu to show part of the data as Timing data and the other data as State or Disassembly data 1
337. ut signal 4 Ext EventOut This output pin sends the event signal specified in the Signal Definition overlay for use as a trigger or arming signal to an external device such as an oscilloscope 5 BTSYNC L This is an active low buffered version of the mainframe s synchronizing clock TSY NC that clocks events on and off the bus The TSYNC rate changes depend on the number of Expansion Mainframes thatare in the system Use this signal to reconstruct the timing of an event as it is sent and received by the mainframe 6 BTSYNC This is an active high version of the BTSY NC L output Events are passed between modules in the mainframe over the backplane board You can send events to other modules that reside in an Expansion mainframe via the expansion cable Events however can also be passed to or received from an external device through the square pin connectors on the 92C02 Module Modules recognize incoming events on the leading rising edge of the BTSYNC signal Table 3 3 lists the minimum durations of asynchronous external event signals Table 3 3 Asynchronous External Events Number of Mainframes Event In Event Out Attached Minimum Duration Minimum Duration 1 45 ns 35 ns 2 85 ns 75 ns 3 165 ns 155 ns 4 165 ns 155 ns To recognize incoming synchronous external events the events must be valid 10 ns prior to the rising edge of the BTSYNC signal Also the events must be held valid for at least 10 ns aft
338. ve contact plug for connection to the power source and protective ground The plug protective ground contact connects to accessible metal parts of the mainframe through the power cord protective grounding conductor WARNING For protection against electrical shock insert the power cord plug into a power source receptacle that has a securely grounded protective ground contact The power cord connection for the Master mainframe and Expansion mainframe is on the rear panel The standard power cord for the mainframe is rated at 12 A other optional power cords are also available for mainframe configurations requiring more power Table F 7 lists the standard power cord options Table F 7 Power Cord Identification Plug Configuration Normal Usage Option Number North America Standard 125V Europe Al 230 V DAS System User Manual Appendix F User Service Table F 7 Power Cord Identification Cont Plug Configuration Normal Usage Option Number United Kingdom 230 V North America 230 V S witzerland 230V North American 115V 15A Plug NEMA 5 20P North American 120 208V 3 P hase Plug NEMA L21 30P DAS System User Manual F 25 Appendix F User Service F 26 DAS System User Manual Pp Q n Appendix G DASdisk Utility The DASdisk utility program allows you to transfer files between the DAS and a PC Using a PC you can then analyze files print fil
339. vent Out 2 External Event In 5 BTSYNC L 6 BTSYNC Figure 3 6 92C02 Module External Event Pins 3 12 The external event signal square pins are 0 025 inch 0 635 mm in size To make connections to the signal and ground pins use a twisted pair of wires 24 gauge minimum fitted with square pin connectors The length of the wires should not exceed 3 feet 1 m The remaining end of each wire can be fitted with the appropriate connector depending on the use of the signal If you connect an external event in pin on a separate mainframe use the same size connector you used when you connected to the external event out square pin If you connect to an oscilloscope you may want to use a BNC or simply leave the wire bare CAUTION The external event I O pins are not static protected Before connecting to any external event I O square pins follow proper static grounding procedures by touching your finger to the mainframe chassis Table 3 2 defines the external event I O signals DAS System User Manual Reference DAS System User Manual Table 3 2 External Event I O Connections Pin Signal Description 1 This is the ground reference for the external event in signal 2 Ext Event In This input pin accepts a TTL level signal as an event The event is routed to modules according to parameters defined in the Signal Definition overlay Cluster Setup menu 3 Ground This is the ground reference for the external event o
340. w configuration and closes the overlay Ciuster SCASBI 1 RESTORE FORMATTOW Fi ESCAPE amp CANCEL PRIHI Hrita FEHU Figure 3 14 Restore Formation Overlay 3 29 Reference Delete Operations The delete operations Figure 3 15 let you delete setup files or reference memories stored on the hard disk selections are Delete Setup and Delete Refmem Select the file to delete and function key F8 EXECUTE OPERATION confirm the delete operation You will be asked to confirm your actions before the delete operation begins Delete Refmem This operation deletes the reference memory file specified in this menu the file is not deleted until you select function key F8 EXECUTE OPERATION and confirm the operation FB EXECUTE OPERATION FI PET Free il a eh hhh at eus Dna l 28 eE BM E M E D tet Figure 3 15 Save Restore Menu Delete Operations 3 30 DAS System User Manual Reference Disk Services Menu DAS System User Manual The Disk Services menu allows you to do the following operations m Copy or delete files on the hard or floppy disk m Format and verify floppy disks m Duplicate the entire contents of a floppy disk on another floppy disk m Install or remove application software m Identify the floppy disk and file type m Backup user files from the hard disk to floppy disks m Restore user files from floppy disks to the hard disk Once in the Disk Services menu you can access all operations
341. w point the mouse at the location where function key F2 would normally appear A note appears telling you that there is no function for key F2 The system knows that there is no valid function assigned for the key 5 Pointthe mouse in the middle of the Diagnostics menu and press the left button A message appears describing the purpose of the left mouse button 6 Press the Esc key to erase the messages on the menu 7 Select function key F5 SET TIME to call the Set Date Time overlay 8 Point the mouse at the Month field and press the left button to move the cursor to the Month field 9 Select the Notes button A message appears describing the purpose of the field 10 Point the mouse at the long message window just above the function key legend and press the left button The message window closes and the notes disappear 11 With the cursor still in the Month field point at the field and press the right button pop up menu opens listing possible selections for the Month field 12 Select the Notes button A set of notes describing the current highlighted selection appears Depending on the contents of the field different messages appear for each field Other times when the notes information is not critical the same note appears for each selection 13 Clear the notes by pressing the Return key The notes disappear and the field closes 14 Before closing the overlay verify that the correct date and time are selected Cl
342. wer If you ordered additional cards separate from the mainframe you can install them yourself This section describes how to install a system To configure and install any additional modules in the mainframe refer to Appendix F User Service Always read all guidelines warnings and cautions before attempting any installation procedures Also check to make sure the mainframe power cord is the proper rating for the configuration of cards you will be using The basic steps to install your logic analyzer follow 1 Determine the power requirements for your mainframe and terminal refer to Power Requirements 2 Determine the best locations for the mainframe and the terminal refer to Site Considerations on page 1 11 3 Connect the power cord to the mainframe connect the power cord to the appropriate power source 4 Connect the terminal to the mainframe refer to Mainframe Connections on page 1 14 5 Connect the probes to the acquisition or pattern generation module refer to your module user manual for instructions on connecting the probes 6 Connect the probes to the system under test Getting Started Power Requirements 1 8 The mainframe and terminal should connect to a power source that meets the requirements stated in this section The mainframe must be supplied with a properly rated power cord The mainframe power requirements depend on the number and type of modules installed To determine which power source
343. when changing to from Daylight Savings Time uttittlan Diagnostic dia EET DATE TIME Date BEB tot Tira 16 res Lan korg om Figure 3 28 Set Date Time Overlay DAS System User Manual Reference The Set Date Time overlay has the following features m The Date field which allows you to set the current date day month and year Selections include all valid calendar values m The Time field which allows you to set the current time the hour followed by the minute value All time values are expressed in the military format for example 1 00 p m becomes 1300 hours Boot Option Overlay The Boot Option overlay called by function key F6 BOOT CHECKS lets you control how often the DAS will perform the diagnostics and file system check procedures By default diagnostics and the file system checks are performed every time you power on the DAS You can use the selections in the overlay to define how often to run the diagnostics and file system checks These features allow you to effectively bypass the diagnostics and file system checks to reduce the time for the DAS to complete the power on process Figure 3 29 shows an example of the Boot Option overlay BOOT OFTIOW OVERLAY F war lipis uring next Power Up Skipped 1 Power lps Lest executed 5 dryisi agn 3 Executed ducing lasi Power Up 11 mints ago LAHLEL PEIHI Hrita FEHU Hish HE iT Figure 3 29 Boot Option Overlay DAS System User M
344. word or cTB In the cword form you select a contrasting pair of colors from the colors shown in Table G 1 For example if you specify cblue your text would be white and the background would be blue You can use either uppercase or lowercase letters Table G 1 Screen Colors vs Switch Word word text background blue white blue gray white gray red white red yellow yellow gray cyan white cyan magenta white magenta brown white brown green yellow green In the CTB form you specify two different colors for the text and background by entering two characters from the list below For example if you specify cWB your text would be white and the background would be blue The cTB switch is case sensitive DAS System User Manual Appendix G DASdisk Utility Table G 2 lists valid color characters Table G 2 Valid Color Characters for DASdisk Character Color Character Color k black K gray light black b blue B ight blue g green G ight green C cyan C ight cyan r red R ight red m magenta M ight magenta y brown dark yellow Y ight yellow w white W bright white You may also use the characters P or p purple to specify magenta and T ort turquoise to specify cyan If you specify the same color for text and background your input is ignored The c switch is only valid while running DASdisk When you exit DASdisk using the Quit function default DOS colors are restored The b sw
345. ws this same information for the DAS 92E9 Expansion mainframe F 8 DAS System User Manual Appendix F User Service Single Card Modules 1 Module 2 Modules 3 Modules Controller Controller Controller OFM WwW HUH co OoOrRN WwW H amp B UD CO OoOrFRN WwW HUM co 4 Modules 5 Modules 6 Modules Controller Controller Controller OoOrFRN WwW HUH co OoOrFRN WwW HUD co OFM WwW HUD s CO Multi Card Modules Cards in Adjacent S lots 2 Card Module 3 Card Module 4 Card Module oOrFRN WwW HUM co OFM WwW BUD 4 OFM WwW HUD 4 co Controller Controller Controller 5 Card Module 6 Card Module 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 C r3 NM WwW HR UID co Controller Controller Figure F 1 Module Placement in the Master Mainframe DAS System User Manual F 9 Appendix F User Service Single Card Modules 1 Module 2 Modules 3 Modules Cc rn nC HUD co OFM W HUH N co OoOrFRN WwW HUD s co Expansion Slave Expansion Slave Expansion Slave 4 Modules 5 Modules 6 Modules Expansion Slave Expansion Slave OFM WH UID co OrFN WwW HUD co Or NM WwW HUH co Expansion Slave Multi Card Modules Cards in Adjacent S lots 2 Card Module 3 Card Module 4 Card Module OoOrRN WwW HUD C OFM WwW BUD co OFM WwW BUD J4co Expansion Slave Expansion Slave Expansion Slave 5 Card Module 6 Card Module 7 Card Module OoOrRN WwW HUD co OoOrFRN WwW HUM co
346. y ing it as a reference memory file type may cause the DAS to malfunction when it tries to use the file The DASdisk program informs you if a file to be copied in this operation will not fit on a single floppy disk It also tells you how many blank floppy disks will be required You are then asked if you want to continue with the operation If so the floppy disk will be written to until filled and you will be prompted to insert the next blank floppy disk A multiple volume floppy disk set can contain only one file The Delete operation lets you erase a file on a floppy disk To delete a file select the Delete operation in the Main menu and perform the following steps 1 In the Disk File Name field enter the name of the file to delete press the Return key DASdisk displays a list of file types Pressing the Return key without entering a file name aborts the Delete operation 2 Inthe File Type Number field enter the correct file type number 3 Enter Y to confirm the operation DASdisk searches the floppy disk directory for a file that matches the Disk File Name If a match exists the file is deleted from the floppy disk If no match exists or you do not confirm the operation the operation aborts 4 Press any key to return to the Main menu Selecting this operation from the Main menu causes an orderly return to DOS and restores the default PC screen colors If you leave DASdisk using Ctrl C holding down the control key while t
347. y n SPLER UR bed tens E 1 Main Menu eiLuEee6 ERES Se br LHP EPI M e Gade ted sheet E 2 Display Hardware Configuration and Diagnostic Results E 2 Save Image of Current System Software 0000 E 3 Restore Image of Saved System Software 0000 E 4 Delete Saved Image of System Software 0000 E 5 Show Factory Default Network Configuration lesse esse E 5 Set Operating Mode 0 00 eee eee ee E 6 Set DAS Network Name 0 0 0 0 eee eee E 6 Set DAS Internet Address 0 0 0 0 oc eee eee E 7 Set Network Subnet Mask 0 00 E 7 Set Gateway Internet Address 0 00 0 eee eee E 7 Set Default X Server Name 0 2 0 0 eee eee eee E 7 Set Default X Server Address 0 20 02 cee ee eee eee E 8 Set LANPCL Port Number 0 0 0 0 eee cece eee eee E 8 Set GPIB Port Number 0 00 0 eee eee eee E 9 Update Terminal Flash ROM 0 0 0c eee ee eee E 9 Leave the Utility acid ah ae ae ee a ee ME EE E 12 Appendix F User Service ccc cece ccc ccccccescsccecs F 1 Initial Inspection 4 or kore EUR eee Ba NUS Wea NIC wes C AAE F 1 Repacking for Shipment 0 0 eee eee eee eens F 1 Preventive Maintenance voorin eiie e E A E E ene F 2 Exterior Mainframe merie ea Rhee Sh SS Res Hh Bue SE Ee 4 F 2 Floppy Disk Drives eei GER eke ee tio EW ee ee a a F 2 Terminal ue rHERTRUPOUUUHES O
348. your mainframe is set to use check the line voltage indicator on the rear panel of the mainframe Terminal Power Requirements The color terminal requires a power source that allows one cycle surge currents of less than 30 A Mainframe Power Requirements The Master mainframe and Expansion main frames support different numbers of acquisition and pattern generation cards based on the type of power cord supply being used with each mainframe The standard 12 A power cord should be used for mainframe configurations drawing less than 400 watts 12 A 115 V and for Expansion mainframes drawing less than 475 watts When the configuration of cards in the mainframe requires more power a higher current power cord must be used refer to Tables 1 1 and 1 2 If installed cards require more than 700 watts 750 in Expansion mainframes the DAS will automatically shut off If the power requirements of the cards installed in the mainframe exceed the power cord and power supply configuration the DAS also automatically shuts off Contact your Tektronix field service representative for assistance in determining the proper power supply or power cord configuration NOTE If you install the 15 A power cord Option 1A be sure to affix the label supplied with the power cord This label should be positioned directly to the right of the power cord connector on the rear panel the label should be placed over the existing description that reads 1900 VA MAX FREQ 48
349. your printer manual for information on how to set the parameters for its serial interface The parameters for the system are set from the Communications menu You can also set the baud rate using the DIP switches on the Controller board near the rear panel of the mainframe 4 Display the Timing menu or data you want to print on your terminal With the mouse point at the PRINT button at the bottom of the menu simulta neously click on the left mouse button to call the print overlay Refer to your module user manual for information on accessing and using the Timing Print overlay You can use the print overlays described in the individual module user manuals to print Setup menu data acquired data reference memory data or timing data with PostScript printers or to save the data as a PostScript file If you want to use the printed data as an Encapsulated PostScript EPS file with a word processor on a host computer or workstation you must perform a few additional steps The EPS files consist of a single page of output while most files can consist of multiple pages of output When saving a Print Output EPS file to include in an application such as a word processor be aware that the EPS file does not contain a preview image Applications requiring a preview image are not compatible with the EPS output from the system DAS System User Manual Reference HP Laserjet Printing DAS System User Manual To use a PostScript formatted fil
350. yping the character C the PC screen colors will remain as they were in the DASdisk menus Appendix G DASdisk Utility Optional Command Line Switches You can use four optional command line switches in the program execution command line The switch character can be either a or a The switch parameter must immediately follow the switch character no space is allowed between the switch character and the parameter The following two examples show how to use the DASdisk command line switches dasdisk d lt drive gt h lt home gt c lt color gt b lt batch gt dasdisk d lt drive gt h lt home gt c lt color gt b lt batch gt The d switch lets you specify which drive has the floppy disk The character immediately following the d is taken as the drive name For example da specifies drive A If you do not specify the d switch the program asks you which drive to use Uppercase and lowercase characters work identically The h switch lets you specify the DASdisk home directory This is the directory in which the DASdisk program looks for the necessary ftinit file The DASdisk program uses the default home directory if you do not specify the h switch The default home directory is the directory containing the dasdisk exe file The c switch lets you select the PC screen text and background colors The c switch has no effect if your PC does not have a color display This switch can be used in two forms c

User Manual Digital Analysis System 070-8485-09

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents